Nikon | D800 E | User's Manual | Nikon D800 E User's Manual

DIGITAL CAMERA
User's Manual
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part
(except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be
made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.
6MB12211-02
En
Printed in Thailand
En
Thank you for your purchase of a Nikon single-lens reflex (SLR)
digital camera. This manual is for both D800 and D800E digital
cameras; save where otherwise noted, operations are identical.
Illustrations show the D800. To get the most from your camera,
please be sure to read all instructions thoroughly and keep them
where they will be read by all those who use the product.
Symbols and Conventions
To make it easier to find the information you need, the following symbols
and conventions are used:
D
This icon marks cautions; information that should be read before
use to prevent damage to the camera.
A
This icon marks notes; information that should be read before
using the camera.
0
This icon marks references to other pages in this manual.
Menu items, options, and messages displayed in the camera monitor are
shown in bold.
Camera Settings
The explanations in this manual assume that default settings are used.
Help
Use the camera’s on-board help feature for help on menu items and other
topics. See page 18 for details.
Digitutor
Digitutor, a series of “watch and learn” manuals in movie form, is available
from the following website:
http://www.nikondigitutor.com/index_eng.html
A For Your Safety
Before using the camera for the first time, read the safety
instructions in “For Your Safety” (0 xiii–xv).
Where to Find It
Find what you’re looking for from:
i
i
i
i
i
i
The Table of Contents..............................................................
The Q&A Index .........................................................................
The Quick Start Guide .............................................................
The Index..................................................................................
Error Messages ........................................................................
Troubleshooting ......................................................................
X Introduction
s Tutorial
x Live View Photography
y Movie Live View
d Image Recording Options
N Focus
k Release Mode
S ISO Sensitivity
Z Exposure
r White Balance
J Image Enhancement
l Flash Photography
t Other Shooting Options
I More About Playback
Q Connections
U Menu Guide
n Technical Notes
0 iv
0 ii
0 xxi
0 441
0 417
0 412
0
1
0 15
0 45
0 59
0 79
0 91
0 103
0 109
0 115
0 145
0 163
0 181
0 193
0 219
0 239
0 259
0 371
i
Q&A Index
Find what you’re looking for using this “question and answer”
index.
Taking Photographs
i
0
Shooting and Framing Options
Is there a quick and easy way to take snapshots?
Can I frame photos in the monitor (C live view
photography)?
Can I shoot movies (1 movie live view)?
Can I join photographs taken at regular intervals to
create a time-lapse movie?
xxi, 37
45
59
207
i Release Modes
Can I take photos in quick succession?
How do I take pictures with the self-timer?
103
106
i Focus
Can I choose how the camera focuses?
Can I choose the focus point?
91
96
i Exposure
Can I make photos brighter or darker?
130
How do I preserve details in shadows and highlights? 174, 176
i Using the Flash
How do I use the flash?
181
i Image Quality and Size
How do I take pictures for printing at large sizes?
How can I get more pictures on the memory card?
Viewing Photographs
84–87
0
i Playback
How do I view photographs on the camera?
How do I view more information about a photo?
Can I view photos in an automatic slide show?
Can I view photos on a TV?
Can I protect photos from accidental deletion?
219
222
267
256
233
i Deletion
How do I delete unwanted photos?
ii
234
Retouching Photographs
How do I create retouched copies of photos?
How do I make JPEG copies of RAW (NEF) photos?
Can I create a copy of a photo that looks like a
painting?
Can I trim movie footage on the camera or save
movie stills?
Menus and Settings
How do I use the menus?
How do I keep the displays from turning off?
How do I focus the viewfinder?
How do I set the camera clock?
How do I format memory cards?
How do I restore default settings?
How do I get help for a menu or message?
Connections
How do I copy photos to a computer?
How do I print photos?
Can I print the date of recording on my photos?
Maintenance and Optional Accessories
0
341
353
359
74
0
15
291, 292
35
27, 329
32
193, 270,
280
18
0
239
247
250
0
What memory cards can I use?
434
What lenses can I use?
371
What optional flash units (Speedlights) can I use?
380
What other accessories are available for my camera?
387, 389
What software is available for my camera?
How do I clean the camera?
393
Where should I take my camera for servicing and
400
repairs?
iii
Table of Contents
Q&A Index .................................................................................................ii
For Your Safety .................................................................................... xiii
Notices.................................................................................................... xvi
Quick Start Guide.................................................................................xxi
Introduction
1
Package Contents...................................................................................1
Getting to Know the Camera..............................................................2
Camera Body ....................................................................................... 2
The Control Panel.............................................................................. 6
The Viewfinder Display.................................................................... 8
The Information Display................................................................10
The BM-12 Monitor Cover ............................................................14
Tutorial
15
Camera Menus...................................................................................... 15
Using Camera Menus .....................................................................16
Help ......................................................................................................18
First Steps ............................................................................................... 19
Charge the Battery ..........................................................................19
Insert the Battery .............................................................................21
Attach a Lens.....................................................................................24
Basic Setup.........................................................................................26
Insert a Memory Card.....................................................................29
Format the Memory Card .............................................................32
Adjust Viewfinder Focus ...............................................................35
iv
Basic Photography and Playback .................................................. 37
Turn the Camera On....................................................................... 37
Ready the Camera........................................................................... 39
Focus and Shoot.............................................................................. 40
Viewing Photographs.................................................................... 43
Deleting Unwanted Photographs............................................. 44
Live View Photography
45
Focusing in Live View .................................................................... 48
The Live View Display: Live View Photography ................... 51
The Information Display: Live View Photography............... 54
Manual Focus ................................................................................... 55
Movie Live View
59
Indices ................................................................................................. 63
The Live View Display: Movie Live View ................................. 64
The Information Display: Movie Live View............................. 66
Image Area ........................................................................................ 67
Movie Settings ................................................................................. 70
Viewing Movies .................................................................................... 72
Editing Movies ...................................................................................... 74
Trimming Movies ............................................................................ 74
Saving Selected Frames................................................................ 77
Image Recording Options
79
Image Area............................................................................................. 79
Image Quality........................................................................................ 84
Image Size .............................................................................................. 87
Using Two Memory Cards ................................................................ 89
v
Focus
91
Autofocus ............................................................................................... 91
Autofocus Mode ..............................................................................91
AF-Area Mode...................................................................................93
Focus Point Selection.....................................................................96
Focus Lock..........................................................................................98
Manual Focus ......................................................................................101
Release Mode
103
Choosing a Release Mode ..............................................................103
Power Source and Frame Rate................................................. 104
Self-Timer Mode.................................................................................106
Mirror up Mode ..................................................................................108
ISO Sensitivity
109
Manual Adjustment ..........................................................................109
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control ..........................................................111
Exposure
115
Metering ...............................................................................................115
Exposure Mode...................................................................................117
e: Programmed Auto .................................................................. 118
f: Shutter-Priority Auto .............................................................. 119
g: Aperture-Priority Auto ........................................................... 120
h: Manual......................................................................................... 122
Long Time-Exposures.......................................................................124
Shutter-Speed and Aperture Lock...............................................126
Autoexposure (AE) Lock..................................................................128
Exposure Compensation.................................................................130
Bracketing ............................................................................................132
vi
White Balance
145
White Balance Options ....................................................................145
Fine-Tuning White Balance............................................................148
Choosing a Color Temperature ....................................................152
Preset Manual .....................................................................................154
Image Enhancement
163
Picture Controls..................................................................................163
Selecting a Picture Control........................................................163
Modifying Existing Picture Controls.......................................165
Creating Custom Picture Controls ..........................................169
Sharing Custom Picture Controls............................................172
Preserving Detail in Highlights and Shadows.........................174
Active D-Lighting ..........................................................................174
High Dynamic Range (HDR) ......................................................176
Flash Photography
181
Using the Built-in Flash....................................................................181
Flash Modes ....................................................................................183
Flash Compensation.........................................................................188
FV Lock ..................................................................................................190
Other Shooting Options
193
Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default Settings .......................193
Multiple Exposure .............................................................................195
Interval Timer Photography ..........................................................201
Time-Lapse Photography ...............................................................207
Non-CPU Lenses.................................................................................212
Using a GPS Unit ................................................................................215
vii
More About Playback
219
Viewing Images..................................................................................219
Full-Frame Playback .................................................................... 219
Thumbnail Playback .................................................................... 219
Playback Controls ........................................................................ 220
Photo Information.............................................................................222
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom........................................231
Protecting Photographs from Deletion.....................................233
Deleting Photographs .....................................................................234
Full-Frame and Thumbnail Playback..................................... 234
The Playback Menu...................................................................... 236
Connections
239
Connecting to a Computer ............................................................239
Before Connecting the Camera............................................... 239
Direct USB Connection ............................................................... 243
Ethernet and Wireless Networks............................................. 245
Printing Photographs.......................................................................247
Connecting the Printer............................................................... 248
Printing Pictures One at a Time............................................... 249
Printing Multiple Pictures.......................................................... 251
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set ................................. 254
Viewing Photographs on TV..........................................................256
HDMI Options ................................................................................ 257
Menu Guide
259
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images...............................259
Playback Folder......................................................................... 260
Hide Image ................................................................................. 260
Playback Display Options...................................................... 261
Copy Image(s) ........................................................................... 262
Image Review ............................................................................ 265
After Delete ................................................................................ 266
viii
Rotate Tall ...................................................................................266
Slide Show...................................................................................267
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options ..............................268
Shooting Menu Bank...............................................................269
Extended Menu Banks............................................................270
Storage Folder ...........................................................................271
File Naming.................................................................................273
Color Space.................................................................................274
Vignette Control .......................................................................275
Auto Distortion Control .........................................................276
Long Exposure NR
(Long Exposure Noise Reduction) .................................277
High ISO NR ................................................................................277
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings ..............278
Custom Settings Bank.............................................................280
a: Autofocus ....................................................................................281
a1: AF-C Priority Selection .....................................................281
a2: AF-S Priority Selection .....................................................282
a3: Focus Tracking with Lock-On........................................283
a4: AF Activation.......................................................................283
a5: AF point Illumination .......................................................284
a6: Focus Point Wrap-Around..............................................284
a7: Number of Focus Points..................................................285
a8: Built-in AF-assist Illuminator..........................................286
b: Metering/Exposure..................................................................287
b1: ISO Sensitivity Step Value ..............................................287
b2: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl ...........................................287
b3: Exp./Flash Comp. Step Value ........................................287
b4: Easy Exposure Compensation ......................................288
b5: Center-Weighted Area ....................................................289
b6: Fine-Tune Optimal Exposure ........................................290
c: Timers/AE Lock ..........................................................................290
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L .........................................290
c2: Auto Meter-off Delay........................................................291
c3: Self-Timer..............................................................................291
c4: Monitor off Delay...............................................................292
ix
d: Shooting/Display ..................................................................... 292
d1: Beep....................................................................................... 292
d2: CL Mode Shooting Speed .............................................. 293
d3: Max. Continuous Release............................................... 293
d4: Exposure Delay Mode ..................................................... 293
d5: File Number Sequence ................................................... 294
d6: Viewfinder Grid Display.................................................. 295
d7: ISO Display and Adjustment......................................... 295
d8: Screen Tips .......................................................................... 295
d9: Information Display ......................................................... 296
d10: LCD Illumination............................................................. 296
d11: MB-D12 Battery Type .................................................... 297
d12: Battery Order ................................................................... 298
e: Bracketing/Flash....................................................................... 299
e1: Flash Sync Speed............................................................... 299
e2: Flash Shutter Speed ......................................................... 300
e3: Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash .......................................... 301
e4: Modeling Flash................................................................... 307
e5: Auto Bracketing Set ......................................................... 307
e6: Auto Bracketing (Mode M)............................................. 308
e7: Bracketing Order ............................................................... 308
f: Controls ........................................................................................ 309
f1: D Switch................................................................................ 309
f2: Multi Selector Center Button ......................................... 309
f3: Multi Selector....................................................................... 310
f4: Assign Fn Button ................................................................ 311
f5: Assign Preview Button ..................................................... 315
f6: Assign AE-L/AF-L button ................................................. 315
f7: Shutter Spd & Aperture Lock ......................................... 316
f8: Assign BKT Button.............................................................. 316
f9: Customize Command Dials ............................................ 317
f10: Release Button to Use Dial ........................................... 318
f11: Slot Empty Release Lock ............................................... 319
f12: Reverse Indicators ........................................................... 319
f13: Assign MB-D12 AF-ON ................................................... 320
x
g: Movie ............................................................................................321
g1: Assign Fn Button ...............................................................321
g2: Assign Preview Button ....................................................322
g3: Assign AE-L/AF-L button ................................................323
g4: Assign Shutter Button .....................................................324
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup...............................................325
Format Memory Card..............................................................326
Monitor Brightness ..................................................................326
Image Dust Off Ref Photo......................................................327
Flicker Reduction......................................................................329
Time Zone and Date................................................................329
Language.....................................................................................330
Auto Image Rotation...............................................................331
Battery Info .................................................................................332
Image Comment.......................................................................333
Copyright Information............................................................334
Save/Load Settings ..................................................................335
Virtual Horizon...........................................................................337
AF Fine-Tune ..............................................................................338
Eye-Fi Upload.............................................................................339
Firmware Version......................................................................340
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies .............341
D-Lighting ...................................................................................344
Red-Eye Correction ..................................................................345
Trim................................................................................................346
Monochrome .............................................................................347
Filter Effects ................................................................................348
Color Balance .............................................................................349
Image Overlay............................................................................350
NEF (RAW) Processing.............................................................353
Resize ............................................................................................355
Quick Retouch ...........................................................................357
Straighten....................................................................................357
Distortion Control ....................................................................358
Fisheye .........................................................................................358
Color Outline..............................................................................359
Color Sketch ...............................................................................359
Perspective Control .................................................................360
xi
Miniature Effect ........................................................................ 361
Selective Color .......................................................................... 362
Side-by-Side Comparison ..................................................... 364
O My Menu/m Recent Settings ....................................................366
Technical Notes
371
Compatible Lenses............................................................................371
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)..............................................380
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS).......................... 381
Other Accessories..............................................................................387
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter................. 391
Caring for the Camera......................................................................393
Storage ............................................................................................. 393
Cleaning........................................................................................... 393
The Low-Pass Filter ...................................................................... 394
“Clean Now” ............................................................................... 394
“Clean at Startup/Shutdown”.............................................. 396
Manual Cleaning ...................................................................... 397
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions..........................401
Defaults .................................................................................................405
Exposure Program.............................................................................411
Troubleshooting ................................................................................412
Error Messages....................................................................................417
Specifications......................................................................................423
Approved Memory Cards ...............................................................434
Memory Card Capacity ....................................................................436
Battery Life ...........................................................................................439
Index.......................................................................................................441
xii
For Your Safety
To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to
others, read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using
this equipment. Keep these safety instructions where all those who use
the product will read them.
The consequences that could result from failure to observe the
precautions listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol:
icon marks warnings. To prevent possible injury, read all
A This
warnings before using this Nikon product.
❚❚ WARNINGS
A Keep the sun out of the frame
Keep the sun well out of the frame
when shooting backlit subjects.
Sunlight focused into the camera
when the sun is in or close to the
frame could cause a fire.
A Do not look at the sun through the
viewfinder
Viewing the sun or other strong
light source through the
viewfinder could cause
permanent visual impairment.
A Using the viewfinder diopter adjustment
control
When operating the viewfinder
diopter adjustment control with
your eye to the viewfinder, care
should be taken not to put your
finger in your eye accidentally.
A Turn off immediately in the event of
malfunction
Should you notice smoke or an
unusual smell coming from the
equipment or AC adapter
(available separately), unplug the
AC adapter and remove the
battery immediately, taking care
to avoid burns. Continued
operation could result in injury.
After removing the battery, take
the equipment to a Nikonauthorized service center for
inspection.
A Do not disassemble
Touching the product’s internal
parts could result in injury. In the
event of malfunction, the product
should be repaired only by a
qualified technician. Should the
product break open as the result
of a fall or other accident, remove
the battery and/or AC adapter
and then take the product to a
Nikon-authorized service center
for inspection.
xiii
A Do not use in the presence of flammable
gas
Do not use electronic equipment
in the presence of flammable gas,
as this could result in explosion or
fire.
A Keep out of reach of children
Failure to observe this precaution
could result in injury. In addition,
note that small parts constitute a
chocking hazard. Should a child
swallow any part of this
equipment, consult a physician
immediately.
A Do not place the strap around the neck of
an infant or child
Placing the camera strap around
the neck of an infant or child
could result in strangulation.
A Do not remain in contact with the
camera, battery, or charger for extended
periods while the devices are on or in use
Parts of the device become hot.
Leaving the device in direct
contact with the skin for extended
periods may result in lowtemperature burns.
A Observe proper precautions when
handling batteries
Batteries may leak or explode if
improperly handled. Observe the
following precautions when
handling batteries for use in this
product:
• Use only batteries approved for
use in this equipment.
• Do not short or disassemble the
battery.
xiv
• Be sure the product is off before
replacing the battery. If you are
using an AC adapter, be sure it is
unplugged.
• Do not attempt to insert the
battery upside down or
backwards.
• Do not expose the battery to
flame or to excessive heat.
• Do not immerse in or expose to
water.
• Replace the terminal cover when
transporting the battery. Do not
transport or store the battery with
metal objects such as necklaces or
hairpins.
• Batteries are prone to leakage
when fully discharged. To avoid
damage to the product, be sure to
remove the battery when no
charge remains.
• When the battery is not in use,
attach the terminal cover and
store in a cool, dry place.
• The battery may be hot
immediately after use or when the
product has been used on battery
power for an extended period.
Before removing the battery turn
the camera off and allow the
battery to cool.
• Discontinue use immediately
should you notice any changes in
the battery, such as discoloration
or deformation.
A Observe proper precautions when
•
•
•
•
•
•
handling the charger
Keep dry. Failure to observe this
precaution could result in fire or
electric shock.
Dust on or near the metal parts of
the plug should be removed with
a dry cloth. Continued use could
result in fire.
Do not handle the power cable or
go near the charger during
thunderstorms. Failure to observe
this precaution could result in
electric shock.
Do not damage, modify, or
forcibly tug or bend the power
cable. Do not place it under
heavy objects or expose it to heat
or flame. Should the insulation be
damaged and the wires become
exposed, take the power cable to
a Nikon-authorized service
representative for inspection.
Failure to observe this precaution
could result in fire or electric
shock.
Do not handle the plug or charger
with wet hands. Failure to
observe this precaution could
result in electric shock.
Do not use with travel converters
or adapters designed to convert
from one voltage to another or
with DC-to-AC inverters. Failure
to observe this precaution could
damage the product or cause
overheating or fire.
A Use appropriate cables
When connecting cables to the
input and output jacks, use only
the cables provided or sold by
Nikon for the purpose to maintain
compliance with product
regulations.
A CD-ROMs
CD-ROMs containing software or
manuals should not be played
back on audio CD equipment.
Playing CD-ROMs on an audio CD
player could cause hearing loss or
damage the equipment.
A Do not aim a flash at the operator of a
motor vehicle
Failure to observe this precaution
could result in accidents.
A Observe caution when using the flash
• Using the camera with the flash in
close contact with the skin or
other objects could cause burns.
• Using the flash close to the
subject’s eyes could cause
temporary visual impairment.
Particular care should be
observed when photographing
infants, when the flash should be
no less than one meter (39 in.)
from the subject.
A Avoid contact with liquid crystal
Should the monitor break, care
should be taken to avoid injury
due to broken glass and to
prevent the liquid crystal from the
monitor touching the skin or
entering the eyes or mouth.
xv
Notices
• No part of the manuals included with this • Nikon will not be held liable for any
product may be reproduced, transmitted, damages resulting from the use of this
product.
transcribed, stored in a retrieval system,
• While every effort has been made to
or translated into any language in any
form, by any means, without Nikon’s prior ensure that the information in these
manuals is accurate and complete, we
written permission.
would appreciate it were you to bring
• Nikon reserves the right to change the
any errors or omissions to the attention
specifications of the hardware and
of the Nikon representative in your area
software described in these manuals at
(address provided separately).
any time and without prior notice.
Notices for Customers in Canada
CAUTION
This Class B digital apparatus complies
with Canadian ICES-003.
ATTENTION
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est
conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
Notices for Customers in Europe
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF
USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
This symbol indicates that
this product is to be
collected separately.
The following apply only to
users in European countries:
• This product is designated
for separate collection at an
appropriate collection point. Do not
dispose of as household waste.
• For more information, contact the
retailer or the local authorities in
charge of waste management.
xvi
This symbol on the battery
indicates that the battery is
to be collected separately.
The following apply only to
users in European countries:
• All batteries, whether marked with this
symbol or not, are designated for
separate collection at an appropriate
collection point. Do not dispose of as
household waste.
• For more information, contact the
retailer or the local authorities in
charge of waste management.
Notices for Customers in the U.S.A.
Power Cable
At voltages over AC 125 V (U.S.A. only): The power cable must be rated for the voltage in use, be
at least AWG no. 18 gauge, and have SVG insulation or better with a NEMA 6P-15 plug
rated for AC 250 V 15 A.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement
This equipment has been tested and found
to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules.
D800/D800E
These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This CAUTIONS
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate Modifications
radio frequency energy and, if not installed The FCC requires the user be notified
that any changes or modifications made
and used in accordance with the
to this device that are not expressly
instructions, may cause harmful
approved by Nikon Corporation may
interference to radio communications.
void the user’s authority to operate the
However, there is no guarantee that
equipment.
interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause Interface Cables
harmful interference to radio or television Use the interface cables sold or provided
reception, which can be determined by
by Nikon for your equipment. Using
turning the equipment off and on, the user other interface cables may exceed the
is encouraged to try to correct the
limits of Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules.
interference by one or more of the
Notice for Customers in the State of California
following measures:
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product
• Reorient or relocate the receiving
may expose you to lead, a chemical known
antenna.
to the State of California to cause birth
• Increase the separation between the
defects or other reproductive harm. Wash
equipment and receiver.
hands
after handling.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to which Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road,
the receiver is connected.
Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced
Tel.: 631-547-4200
radio/television technician for help.
xvii
Disposing of Data Storage Devices
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage
devices does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted files can
sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using commercially
available software, potentially resulting in the malicious use of personal image
data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s responsibility.
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another
person, erase all data using commercial deletion software, or format the device and
then completely refill it with images containing no private information (for
example, pictures of empty sky). Be sure to also replace any pictures selected for
preset manual (0 158). Care should be taken to avoid injury when physically
destroying data storage devices.
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or
reproduced by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device may be
punishable by law.
• Items prohibited by law from being copied or
reproduced
Do not copy or reproduce paper
money, coins, securities, government
bonds, or local government bonds,
even if such copies or reproductions
are stamped “Sample.”
The copying or reproduction of paper
money, coins, or securities which are
circulated in a foreign country is
prohibited.
• Cautions on certain copies and reproductions
The government has issued cautions
on copies or reproductions of
securities issued by private companies
(shares, bills, checks, gift certificates,
etc.), commuter passes, or coupon
tickets, except when a minimum of
necessary copies are to be provided for
business use by a company. Also, do
not copy or reproduce passports
issued by the government, licenses
issued by public agencies and private
groups, ID cards, and tickets, such as
passes and meal coupons.
Unless the prior permission of the
government has been obtained, the
copying or reproduction of unused
• Comply with copyright notices
postage stamps or post cards issued by
The copying or reproduction of
the government is prohibited.
copyrighted creative works such as
The copying or reproduction of stamps books, music, paintings, woodcuts,
prints, maps, drawings, movies, and
issued by the government and of
photographs is governed by national
certified documents stipulated by law
and international copyright laws. Do
is prohibited.
not use this product for the purpose of
making illegal copies or to infringe
copyright laws.
xviii
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories
Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex
electronic circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including chargers,
batteries, AC adapters, and flash accessories) certified by Nikon specifically for use
with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within the
operational and safety requirements of this electronic circuitry.
The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage the
camera and may void your Nikon warranty. The use of third-party
rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the Nikon holographic seal
shown at right could interfere with normal operation of the camera
or result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking.
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local authorized
Nikon dealer.
AVC Patent Portfolio License
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND
NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (I) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC
STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (II) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER
ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO
PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR
ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
http://www.mpegla.com
D
Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories
Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with
your Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within
its operational and safety requirements. THE USE OF NON-NIKON
ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON
WARRANTY.
D
Servicing the Camera and Accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon
recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or a
Nikon-authorized service representative once every one to two years,
and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees
apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are
particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any
accessories regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional
flash units, should be included when the camera is inspected or
serviced.
xix
A
Before Taking Important Pictures
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or
before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the
camera is functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable for
damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.
A
Life-Long Learning
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing
product support and education, continually-updated information is
available on-line at the following sites:
• For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/
• For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support/
• For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information,
tips, answers to frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice
on digital imaging and photography. Additional information may be
available from the Nikon representative in your area. See the following
URL for contact information: http://imaging.nikon.com/
xx
Quick Start Guide
Follow these steps for a quick start with the D800.
1
Attach the camera strap.
Attach the strap securely to the camera eyelets.
2
Charge (0 19) and insert the battery (0 21).
3
Attach a lens (0 24).
4
Insert a memory card (0 29).
16GB
.
Front
xxi
5
Turn the camera on (0 37).
A
See Also
For information on choosing a language
and setting the time and date, see page 26.
See page 35 for information on adjusting
viewfinder focus.
6
Select autofocus (0 91).
Rotate the focus-mode selector to AF
(autofocus).
Focus-mode selector
7
Focus and shoot (0 40, 41).
Press the shutter-release button
halfway to focus, then press the
shutter-release button the rest
of the way down to take the
photograph.
8
View the
photograph
(0 43).
K button
xxii
Focus indicator
XIntroduction
Package Contents
Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera.
Memory cards are sold separately.
• BF-1B body
cap (0 24,
389)
• BS-1 accessory
shoe cover
(0 380)
• BM-12
monitor
cover
(0 14)
X
• D800/D800E digital
camera (0 2)
• EN-EL15
rechargeable
Li-ion
battery with
terminal
cover
(0 19, 21)
• UC-E14 USB cable
(0 243, 248)
• Strap (AN-DC6 for D800,
AN-DC6E for D800E; 0 xxi)
• Warranty
• User’s Manual (this guide)
• MH-25 battery charger
(AC wall adapter
supplied only in
countries or regions
where required. Shape
of power cable depends
on country of sale; 0 19)
• USB cable clip
(0 243)
• Quick Guide
• ViewNX 2 installer CD (0 239)
1
Getting to Know the Camera
Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls
and displays. You may find it helpful to bookmark this section and
refer to it as you read through the rest of the manual.
Camera Body
1
10
11
X
2
12
3
13
14
4
5
6
7
8
4
16
15
9
1 Release mode dial........................103
2 Release mode dial
lock release ....................................103
3 T button
Image quality .............................. 84
Image size .................................... 87
Two-button reset......................193
4 Eyelet for camera strap .................xxi
5 U button
White balance .........146, 151, 153
6 S button
ISO sensitivity............................109
Auto ISO sensitivity control ...111
7 D button
Bracketing .......133, 137, 141, 316
2
8 Accessory shoe
(for optional flash unit) ...............380
9 Accessory shoe cover ..................380
10 Power switch ................................... 26
11 Shutter-release button........... 40, 41
12 E button
Exposure compensation .........130
Two-button reset......................193
13 Movie-record button ..................... 61
14 I/Q button
Exposure mode
......................................................117
Formatting memory cards ....... 32
15 Control panel..................................... 6
16 Focal plane mark (E).................102
1
2
3
4
5
7
6
8
9
14
15
16
17
18
19
1 Built-in flash.................................. 181
2 Flash pop-up button................... 181
3 M/Y button
Flash mode................................ 182
Flash compensation................ 188
4 Built-in microphone................ 65, 70
5 Flash sync terminal cover .......... 380
6 Ten-pin remote terminal
cover ...................................... 215, 390
7 Flash sync terminal...................... 380
8 Ten-pin remote terminal... 215, 390
9 Connector cover..........243, 248, 256
10
11
12
13
X
10 Connector for external
microphone......................................65
11 USB connector..................... 243, 248
12 Headphone connector ..................65
13 HDMI mini-pin connector.......... 256
14 Mounting index ..............................25
15 Lens release button........................25
16 AF-mode button .........48, 50, 92, 94
17 Focus-mode selector ..... 48, 91, 101
18 Meter coupling lever................... 426
19 Mirror..................................... 108, 398
D
The Microphone and Speaker
Do not place the microphone or speaker in close proximity to magnetic
devices. Failure to observe this precaution could affect the data
recorded on the magnetic devices.
3
Camera Body (Continued)
1
11
2
10
3
4
X
9
5
6
7
8
12
1 AF-assist illuminator....................286 6 Battery-chamber cover latch....... 21
Self-timer lamp .............................107 7 Battery-chamber cover ................. 21
Red-eye reduction lamp.............183 8 Contact cover for optional
2 Sub-command dial ......................317
MB-D12 battery pack ..................387
3 Depth-of-field preview button
9 Tripod socket
................................. 63, 117, 315, 322 10 Lens mount............................. 25, 102
4 Fn (function) button
11 CPU contacts
................................. 83, 191, 311, 321 12 Body cap.................................. 24, 389
5 Power connector cover...............391
A
LCD Illuminators
Rotating the power switch toward D Power switch
activates the exposure meters and
control panel backlight (LCD
illuminator), allowing the display to
be read in the dark. After the power
switch is released, the illuminators will
remain lit for six seconds while the
exposure meters are active or until
the shutter is released or the power switch is rotated toward D again.
4
1
2
3
25
4
5
6
24
23
7
22
8
21
9
20
10
11
12
19
18
17
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Viewfinder ........................................35
Viewfinder eyepiece .............36, 106
Diopter adjustment control .........35
Metering selector ........................ 116
A button
AE/AF lock .........98, 128, 315, 323
B button
AF-ON ...............................46, 60, 92
Main command dial.................... 317
Multi selector................... 16, 42, 221
Memory card slot cover ......... 29, 31
Focus selector lock .........................96
Speaker .............................................73
a button
Live view ................................ 45, 59
Live view selector .................... 45, 59
Memory card access lamp..... 30, 31
R (info) button........................ 10, 13
Ambient brightness sensor for
automatic monitor brightness
control ......................................53, 326
X
13
14
15
17 J (OK) button .................................18
18 W button
Thumbnail ................................. 219
Playback zoom out ................. 231
19 X button
Playback zoom in..................... 231
20 L/Z/Q button
Protect ........................................ 233
Picture Control.......................... 163
Help................................................18
21 G button
Menu.....................................15, 259
22 Monitor ............. 43, 45, 53, 219, 326
23 K button
Playback ...............................43, 219
24 O/Q button
Delete ...................................44, 234
Formatting memory cards........32
25 Eyepiece shutter lever ..........36, 106
5
The Control Panel
1
2
3
4
15
14
5
13
12
11
10
9
6
7
8
X
1 Color temperature indicator .........153
2 Shutter speed ..........................119, 122
3
4
5
6
7
Exposure compensation value .....130
Flash compensation value.............188
White balance fine-tuning.............148
Color temperature ..................146, 153
White balance preset number ......154
Number of shots in
exposure and flash bracketing
sequence............................................133
Number of shots in
WB bracketing sequence ...............137
HDR exposure differential..............180
Number of shots in multiple
exposure.............................................197
Number of intervals for
interval timer photography...........204
Focal length (non-CPU lenses) .....214
Flash sync indicator .........................299
Flexible program indicator ............118
Exposure mode.................................117
Image size............................................ 87
Image quality...................................... 84
8 White balance................................... 145
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
6
White balance fine-tuning
indicator............................................. 151
Exposure indicator .......................... 123
Exposure compensation
indicator............................................. 130
Bracketing progress indicator:
Exposure and flash bracketing.. 133
WB bracketing ............................... 137
ADL bracketing.............................. 141
PC connection indicator ................ 246
HDR indicator..................................177
Multiple exposure indicator.......... 196
SD card indicator .........................31, 32
CompactFlash card indicator....31, 32
Aperture (f-number) ............... 120, 122
Aperture (number of stops)... 121, 374
Bracketing increment ............ 134, 138
Number of shots in ADL bracketing
sequence ........................................... 141
Number of shots per interval........ 204
Maximum aperture
(non-CPU lenses) ............................. 214
PC mode indicator........................... 246
Aperture stop indicator......... 121, 374
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Flash compensation indicator ..... 188
GPS connection indicator ..............217
Shutter-speed lock icon .................126
“Clock not set” indicator.......... 28, 417
Interval timer indicator..........201, 204
Time-lapse indicator ..............207, 210
AF-area mode indicator............ 93, 95
Auto-area AF indicator ............. 94, 95
3D-tracking indicator ................ 93, 95
Flash mode ...............................182, 183
Autofocus mode................................. 91
MB-D12 battery indicator ..............298
Battery indicator ................................ 37
Number of exposures remaining
....................................................... 38, 436
Number of shots remaining before
memory buffer fills .................105, 436
ISO sensitivity....................................109
Preset white balance recording
indicator .............................................156
ADL bracketing amount........142, 314
Time-lapse recording indicator
.....................................................207, 210
Manual lens number .......................214
Capture mode indicator .................246
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
X
27 “K” (appears when memory remains
for over 1000 exposures) ..................38
28 “Beep” indicator ............................... 292
29 ISO sensitivity indicator ................. 109
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator ....... 111
30 Aperture lock icon ........................... 127
HDR (series) indicator ................... 180
Multiple exposure (series)
indicator............................................. 197
31 Exposure and flash
bracketing indicator........................ 133
WB bracketing indicator ................ 137
ADL bracketing indicator............... 141
Active D-Lighting indicator........... 175
32 Exposure compensation
indicator............................................. 130
7
The Viewfinder Display
1
2
4
X
3
5
6
7 8
18 19
9
10 11
20
12
13 14
21
22 23 24
15
16
17
25
1 Framing grid (displayed when On
6 Metering .........................................115
is selected for Custom Setting d6)
7 Autoexposure (AE) lock...............128
..........................................................295 8 Shutter speed lock icon ..............126
2 Focus points.............40, 96, 284, 285 9 Shutter speed.......................119, 122
AF-area mode............................93, 94
Autofocus mode................................91
3 AF area brackets .................... 35, 223 10 Aperture lock icon........................127
4 Virtual horizon display ................313 11 Aperture (f-number)...........120, 122
5 Focus indicator....................... 40, 102
Aperture (number of stops)
.................................................121, 374
8
12 Exposure mode ............................ 117
13 Flash compensation indicator .. 188
14 Exposure compensation
indicator......................................... 130
15 ISO sensitivity ............................... 109
Preset white balance
recording indicator...................... 156
ADL bracketing amount ............ 314
AF-area mode.....................93, 94, 95
16 Number of exposures
remaining ................................38, 436
Number of shots remaining before
memory buffer fills............. 105, 436
Exposure compensation value.... 130
Flash compensation value......... 188
17 Flash-ready indicator .................. 181
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
FV lock indicator .......................... 191
Flash sync indicator..................... 299
Aperture stop indicator..... 121, 374
Exposure indicator....................... 123
Exposure compensation
display ............................................ 130
Low battery warning .....................37
Exposure and flash bracketing
indicator......................................... 133
WB bracketing indicator ........... 137
ADL bracketing indicator........... 141
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator ... 112
“K” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures) ........................................38
X
D
No Battery
When the battery is totally exhausted or no battery is inserted, the
display in the viewfinder will dim. This is normal and does not indicate a
malfunction. The viewfinder display will return to normal when a fullycharged battery is inserted.
D
The Control Panel and Viewfinder Displays
The brightness of the control panel and viewfinder displays varies with
temperature, and the response times of the displays may drop at low
temperatures. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
9
The Information Display
Shooting information, including shutter
speed, aperture, number of exposures
remaining, and AF-area mode, is displayed in
the monitor when the R button is pressed.
R button
123
56
4
X
7
8
9
10
14
13
12
Exposure mode.................................117
Flexible program indicator ............118
Flash sync indicator .........................299
Shutter speed ..........................119, 122
Exposure compensation value .....130
Flash compensation value.............188
White balance fine-tuning.............148
Color temperature ..................146, 152
Number of shots in exposure and
flash bracketing sequence.............133
Number of shots in WB bracketing
sequence............................................137
Number of shots in multiple
exposure.............................................197
Focal length (non-CPU lenses) .....214
5 Color temperature indicator
............................................ 145, 152, 153
1
2
3
4
10
11
6 Aperture stop indicator......... 121, 374
7 Aperture (f-number) .............. 120, 122
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Aperture (number of stops).... 121, 374
Bracketing increment ............ 134, 138
Number of shots in ADL bracketing
sequence ........................................... 141
Maximum aperture
(non-CPU lenses) ............................. 214
Picture Control indicator................ 164
HDR indicator ................................... 177
HDR exposure differential ............. 180
Multiple exposure indicator.......... 196
Autofocus mode indicator................91
Eye-Fi connection indicator .......... 339
Image quality.......................................84
Secondary slot function....................89
Image size.............................................87
15 16 17 18 19 20
21
22
36
35
23
24
25
34
33
32
26
31
30
29
28
27
15 Shutter-speed lock icon .................126 25 “K” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
16 “Clock not set” indicator.......... 28, 417
exposures) ............................................38
17 Interval timer indicator..........201, 204
Time-lapse indicator ..............207, 210 26 Number of exposures
remaining ............................................38
18 GPS connection indicator ..............217
Manual lens number....................... 214
19 Image comment indicator .............333
Time-lapse recording indicator
20 Aperture lock icon ...........................127
..................................................... 207, 210
21
22
23
24
HDR (series) indicator .....................180
Multiple exposure (series)
indicator .............................................197
Copyright information
indicator .............................................334
Exposure and flash
bracketing indicator........................133
WB bracketing indicator.................137
ADL bracketing indicator ...............141
Exposure indicator...........................123
Exposure compensation indicator ...130
Bracketing progress indicator:
Exposure and flash bracketing....133
WB bracketing ...............................137
ADL bracketing..............................141
“Beep” indicator ...............................292
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
X
Fn button assignment..................... 311
AE-L/AF-L button assignment......... 315
D button assignment................. 316
Long exposure noise reduction
indicator............................................. 277
Custom settings bank..................... 280
Shooting menu bank...................... 269
White balance................................... 145
White balance fine-tuning
indicator............................................. 149
Auto-area AF indicator ......................94
Focus points indicator .......................96
AF-area mode indicator ....................93
3D-tracking indicator.........................93
Image area indicator..........................79
Flash mode........................................ 183
11
The Information Display (Continued)
37 38 39 40
50
41
42
X
49
43
44
48
47
45
46
37 FV lock indicator...............................191 44 MB-D12 battery type display........ 297
MB-D12 battery indicator.............. 298
38 Release mode indicator..................103
45 Depth-of-field preview button
Continuous shooting speed
..............................................................104
assignment ....................................... 315
39 Flash compensation indicator ......188 46 Color space indicator ...................... 274
47 Active D-Lighting indicator........... 175
40 Exposure compensation
indicator .............................................130 48 High ISO noise reduction
indicator............................................. 277
41 Vignette control indicator..............275
42 ADL bracketing amount ................142 49 ISO sensitivity indicator ................ 109
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator ....... 111
43 Camera battery indicator................. 37
50 Metering ............................................ 115
A
Turning the Monitor Off
To clear shooting information from the monitor, press the R button twice
more or press the shutter-release button halfway. The monitor will turn off
automatically if no operations are performed for about 10 seconds.
A
See Also
For information on choosing how long the monitor stays on, see
Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off delay, 0 292). For information on
changing the color of the lettering in the information display, see
Custom Setting d9 (Information display, 0 296).
12
❚❚ Changing Settings in the Information Display
To change settings for the items listed below,
press the R button in the information
display. Highlight items using the multi
selector and press J to view options for the
highlighted item.
R button
X
Shooting menu bank.................. 269 7
High ISO noise reduction........... 277 8
Active D-Lighting......................... 175 9
Color space.................................... 274
10
Depth-of-field preview button
assignment.................................... 315
6 Fn button assignment ................ 311
1
2
3
4
5
AE-L/AF-L button assignment..... 315
D button assignment ............... 316
Long exposure noise
reduction ....................................... 277
Custom settings bank................. 280
A
Tool Tips
A tool tip giving the name of the selected item
appears in the information display. Tool tips
can be turned off using Custom Setting d8
(Screen tips; 0 295).
13
The BM-12 Monitor Cover
A clear plastic cover is provided with the
camera to keep the monitor clean and
protect it when the camera is not in use. To
attach the cover, insert the projection on
the top of the cover into the matching
indentation above the camera monitor (q)
and press the bottom of the cover until it
clicks into place (w).
X
To remove the cover, hold the camera firmly
and pull the bottom of the cover gently
outwards as shown at right.
14
sTutorial
Camera Menus
Most shooting, playback, and setup options
can be accessed from the camera menus. To
view the menus, press the G button.
G button
Tabs
Choose from the following menus:
• D: Playback (0 259)
• C: Shooting (0 268)
• A: Custom Settings (0 278)
s
• B: Setup (0 325)
• N: Retouch (0 341)
• O/m: My Menu or Recent settings
(defaults to My Menu; 0 366)
Slider shows position in current menu.
Current settings are shown by icons.
Menu options
Options in current menu.
d
If d icon is displayed, help for current item can be viewed by pressing L
(Z/Q) button (0 18).
15
Using Camera Menus
Menu Controls
The multi selector and J button are used to navigate the menus.
Multi selector
Move cursor up
Cancel and return
to previous menu
Select
highlighted
item
Select
highlighted
item or display
sub-menu
Move cursor down
s
J button
Select highlighted
item
Navigating the Menus
Follow the steps below to navigate the menus.
1
Display the menus.
Press the G button to display the
menus.
G button
2
Highlight the icon for the
current menu.
Press 4 to highlight the icon
for the current menu.
16
3
Select a menu.
Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu.
4
Position the cursor in the
selected menu.
s
Press 2 to position the cursor
in the selected menu.
5
Highlight a menu item.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a
menu item.
6
Display options.
Press 2 to display options for
the selected menu item.
7
Highlight an option.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an
option.
17
8
Select the highlighted item.
Press J to select the highlighted item. To
exit without making a selection, press the
G button.
J button
s
Note the following points:
• Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available.
• While pressing 2 or the center of the multi selector generally has
the same effect as pressing J, there are some cases in which
selection can only be made by pressing J.
• To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the
shutter-release button halfway (0 41).
Help
If a d icon is displayed at the bottom left
corner of the monitor, help can be displayed
by pressing the L (Z/Q) button.
A description of the currently
selected option or menu will
be displayed while the button
is pressed. Press 1 or 3 to
scroll through the display.
L (Z/Q) button
18
First Steps
Charge the Battery
The camera is powered by an EN-EL15 rechargeable Li-ion battery
(supplied). To maximize shooting time, charge the battery in the
supplied MH-25 battery charger before use. About 2 hours and 35
minutes are required to fully recharge the battery when no charge
remains.
1
Connect the AC power cable.
Connect the power cable. The AC
adapter plug should be in the position
shown at right; do not rotate.
2
s
Remove the terminal cover.
Remove the terminal cover from the battery.
3
Insert the battery.
Place the battery in the battery bay as
shown in the illustration on the charger.
19
4
Plug the charger in.
The CHARGE lamp will blink while the
battery charges.
Battery Charging
charging complete
D
Charging the Battery
Charge the battery indoors at ambient
temperatures between 5–35 °C (41–95 °F).
The battery will not charge if its
temperature is below 0 °C (32 °F) or above
60 °C (140 °F).
s
5
Remove the battery when charging is complete.
Charging is complete when the CHARGE lamp stops blinking.
Unplug the charger and remove the battery.
A
The AC Wall Adapter
Depending on the country or region of
purchase, an AC wall adapter may also be
supplied with the charger. To use the adapter,
insert it into the charger AC inlet (q). Slide the
AC wall adapter latch in the direction shown
(w) and rotate the adapter 90 ° to fix it in the
position shown (e). Reverse these steps to
remove the adapter.
AC wall adapter
latch
90 °
20
Insert the Battery
1
Turn the camera off.
D
Inserting and Removing Batteries
Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing batteries.
2
Open the battery-chamber cover.
Unlatch (q) and open (w) the batterychamber cover.
s
3
Insert the battery.
Insert the battery in the orientation
shown (q), using the battery to keep
the orange battery latch pressed to one
side. The latch locks the battery in place
when the battery is fully inserted (w).
q
w
Battery latch
4
Close the battery-chamber cover.
21
A
Removing the Battery
Turn the camera off and open the batterychamber cover. Press the battery latch in the
direction shown by the arrow to release the
battery and then remove the battery by hand.
Note that the battery may be hot after use;
observe due caution when removing the battery.
To prevent short-circuits, replace the terminal
cover when the battery is not in use.
D
s
22
EN-EL15 Rechargeable Li-ion Batteries
The supplied EN-EL15 shares information with compatible devices,
enabling the camera to show battery charge state in six levels (0 37).
The Battery info option in the setup menu details battery charge,
battery life, and the number of pictures taken since the battery was last
charged (0 332).
D
The Battery and Charger
Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages xiii–xv and 401–404
of this manual. Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below
0 °C/32 °F or above 40 °C/104 °F; failure to observe this precaution could
damage the battery or impair its performance. Capacity may be
reduced and charging times increase at battery temperatures from 0 °C/
32 °F to 15 °C/59 °F and from 45 °C/113 °F to 60 °C/140 °F.
If the CHARGE lamp flickers (i.e., flashes about eight times a second)
during charging, confirm that the temperature is in the correct range
and then unplug the charger and remove and reinsert the battery. If the
problem persists, cease use immediately and take battery and charger
to your retailer or a Nikon-authorized service representative.
Do not short the charger terminals; failure to observe this precaution
could result in overheating and damage to the charger. Do not move
the charger or touch the battery during charging. Failure to observe
this precaution could in very rare instances result in the charger
showing that charging is complete when the battery is only partially
charged. Remove and reinsert the battery to begin charging again.
Battery capacity may temporarily drop if the battery is charged at low
temperatures or used at a temperature below the temperature at which
it was charged. If the battery is charged at a temperature below 5 °C (41
°F), the battery life indicator in the Battery info (0 332) display may
show a temporary decrease.
s
The battery may be hot immediately after use. Wait for the battery to
cool before recharging.
The supplied power cable and AC wall adapter are for use with the
MH-25 only. Use the charger with compatible batteries only. Unplug
when not in use.
A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge
when used at room temperature indicates that it requires replacement.
Purchase a new EN-EL15 battery.
23
Attach a Lens
Care should be taken to prevent dust from entering the camera
when the lens is removed. The lens generally used in this manual
for illustrative purposes is an AF-S NIKKOR 24-120mm f/4G ED VR.
Focal length scale
index
Mounting index
Focal length scale
CPU contacts
(0 373)
Lens hood
Lens cap
s
Rear lens cap
Focus mode switch
(0 25, 101)
Zoom ring
Vibration reduction
ON/OFF switch
Vibration reduction
mode switch
Focus ring (0 101)
24
1
Turn the camera off.
2
Remove the rear lens cap and the camera body cap.
3
Attach the lens.
Keeping the mounting index on the lens aligned with the
mounting index on the camera body, position the lens in the
camera’s bayonet mount (q). Being careful not to press the
lens-release button, rotate the lens counter-clockwise until it
clicks into place (w).
s
If the lens is equipped with an A-M or
M/A-M mode switch, select
A (autofocus) or M/A (autofocus with
manual override).
A
Detaching the Lens
Be sure the camera is off when removing or
exchanging lenses. To remove the lens, press
and hold the lens release button (q) while
turning the lens clockwise (w). After removing
the lens, replace the lens caps and camera body
cap.
D
CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings
In the case of CPU lenses equipped with an aperture ring (0 373), lock
aperture at the minimum setting (highest f-number).
A
Image Area
The DX format image area is automatically
selected when a DX lens is attached (0 79).
Image area
25
Basic Setup
The language option in the setup menu is automatically
highlighted the first time menus are displayed. Choose a language
and set the time and date. Note that if the time and date are not
set, B will blink in the monitor and the time and date recorded
with photographs will be incorrect.
1
Turn the camera on.
2
Select Language in the
setup menu.
Power switch
s
Press G to display the
camera menus, then select
Language in the setup menu.
For information on using
menus, see “Using Camera
Menus” (0 16).
3
Select a language.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight
the desired language and
press J.
J button
26
G button
4
Select Time zone and date.
Select Time zone and date
and press 2.
5
Set time zone.
Select Time zone and press 2.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight the
local time zone (the UTC field
shows the difference between
the selected time zone and
Coordinated Universal Time, or
UTC, in hours) and press J.
6
s
Turn daylight saving time
on or off.
Select Daylight saving time
and press 2. Daylight saving
time is off by default; if daylight
saving time is in effect in the local time zone, press 1 to
highlight On and press J.
7
Set the date and time.
Select Date and time and
press 2. Press 4 or 2 to select
an item, 1 or 3 to change.
Press J when the clock is set to
the current date and time.
27
8
Set date format.
Select Date format and press
2. Press 1 or 3 to choose the
order in which the year, month,
and day will be displayed and
press J.
9
Exit to shooting mode.
Press the shutter-release button halfway
to exit to shooting mode.
s
A
The Clock Battery
The camera clock is powered by an independent, rechargeable power
source, which is charged as necessary when the main battery is installed
or the camera is powered by an optional EP-5B power connector and
EH-5b AC adapter (0 387). Two days of charging will power the clock for
about three months. If the B icon flashes in the control panel, the
clock battery is exhausted and the clock has been reset. Set the clock to
the correct time and date.
A
The Camera Clock
The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household
clocks. Check the clock regularly against more accurate time pieces and
reset as necessary.
A
GPS Units (0 215)
If a GPS unit is connected, the camera clock will be set to the time and
date provided by the GPS unit (0 218).
28
Insert a Memory Card
Pictures are stored on memory cards (available separately; 0 434).
The camera is equipped with two card slots, one for SD and the
other for Type I CompactFlash cards. Type II cards and microdrives
can not be used.
1
Turn the camera off.
Power switch
s
D
Inserting and Removing Memory Cards
Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing memory
cards.
2
Open the card slot cover.
Slide the card slot cover out (q) and
open the card slot (w).
29
SD memory cards: Holding the card as
shown, slide it into the SD card slot until it
clicks into place. The green access lamp
will light briefly.
16GB
Insert the memory card.
Access lamp
CompactFlash memory cards: Insert the card
into the CompactFlash card slot with the
front label toward the monitor (q).
When the memory card is fully inserted,
the eject button will pop up (w) and the
green access lamp will light briefly.
s
16GB
3
Eject button
D
Inserting Memory Cards
Insert the memory card terminals first. Inserting the card upside
down or backwards could damage the camera or the card. Check
to be sure that the card is in the correct orientation.
CompactFlash card
Direction of
insertion for
right (CompactFlash)
card slot
16GB
Direction of
insertion for
left (SD)
card slot
16GB
SD memory card
Front label
Front label
4
Close the card slot cover.
If this is the first time the memory card
will be used after being used or
formatted in another device, format the
card as described on page 32.
30
D
Memory Card Icons
The memory cards currently inserted in the
camera are indicated as shown (the example at
right shows the icons displayed when both an
SD and a CompactFlash card are inserted). If
the memory card is full or an error has occurred,
the icon for the affected card will blink (0 419).
Control panel
A
Using Two Memory Cards
See page 89 for information on choosing the
roles played by each card when two cards are
inserted in the camera.
Information display
Removing Memory Cards
After confirming that the access lamp is off, turn the camera off and
open the memory card slot cover.
A
s
CompactFlash memory cards: Press the eject button
(q) to partially eject the card (w). The memory
card can then be removed by hand. Do not push
on the memory card while pressing the eject
button. Failure to observe this precaution could
damage the camera or memory card.
16GB
16GB
SD memory cards: Press the card in to eject it (q).
The memory card can then be removed by hand.
31
Format the Memory Card
Memory cards must be formatted before first use or after being
used or formatted in other devices.
D
Formatting Memory Cards
Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may contain.
Be sure to copy any photographs and other data you wish to keep to a
computer before proceeding (0 239).
s
1
Turn the camera on.
2
Press the I (Q) and O
(Q) buttons.
Hold the I (Q) and O (Q)
buttons down simultaneously
until a blinking C (format)
appears in the shutter-speed O (Q) button I (Q)
button
displays in the control panel
and viewfinder. If two
memory cards are inserted,
the card to be formatted is
shown by a flashing icon. By
default, the primary card slot
(0 89) will be selected; you
can choose the secondary slot
by rotating the main
command dial. To exit without formatting the memory card,
wait until C stops blinking (about six seconds) or press any
button other than the I (Q) and O (Q) buttons.
32
3
Press the I (Q) and O (Q) buttons again.
Press the I (Q) and O (Q) buttons together a second time
while C is blinking to format the memory card. Do not
remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power
source during formatting.
When formatting is complete, the control panel and
viewfinder will show the number of photographs that can be
recorded at current settings.
s
33
D
s
Memory Cards
• Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when
removing memory cards from the camera.
• Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do
not remove memory cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or
remove or disconnect the power source during formatting or while
data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer. Failure to
observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to
the camera or card.
• Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.
• Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.
• Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this
precaution could damage the card.
• Do not expose to water, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight.
• Do not format memory cards in a computer.
A
B
16G
The Write Protect Switch
SD memory cards are equipped with a
write protect switch to prevent
accidental loss of data. When this switch
is in the “lock” position, the memory
Write-protect switch
card can not be formatted and photos
can not be deleted or recorded (a warning will be displayed in the
monitor if you attempt to release the shutter). To unlock the memory
card, slide the switch to the “write” position.
A
No Memory Card
If no memory card is inserted, the control
panel and viewfinder will show S. If the
camera is turned off with a charged EN-EL15
battery and no memory card inserted, S
will be displayed in the control panel.
A
See Also
See page 326 for information on formatting memory cards using the
Format memory card option in the setup menu.
34
Adjust Viewfinder Focus
The camera is equipped with diopter adjustment to accommodate
individual differences in vision. Check that the display in the
viewfinder is in focus before shooting.
1
Turn the camera on.
Remove the lens cap and turn the camera on.
2
Lift the diopter adjustment control
(q).
s
3
Focus the viewfinder.
Rotate the diopter adjustment control
(w) until the viewfinder display, focus
points, and AF area brackets are in sharp
focus. When operating the control with
your eye to the viewfinder, be careful
not to put your fingers or fingernails in
your eye.
AF area brackets
Focus point
4
Replace the diopter adjustment
control.
Push the diopter adjustment control
back in (e).
35
A
Adjusting Viewfinder Focus
If you are unable to focus the viewfinder as described above, select
single-servo autofocus (AF-S; 0 91), single-point AF (0 93), and the
center focus point (0 96), and then frame a high-contrast subject in the
center focus point and press the shutter-release button halfway to focus
the camera. With the camera in focus, use the diopter adjustment
control to bring the subject into clear focus in the viewfinder. If
necessary, viewfinder focus can be further adjusted using optional
corrective lenses (0 388).
A
s
36
Diopter-Adjustment Viewfinder Lenses
Corrective lenses (available separately; 0 388)
can be used to further adjust viewfinder
diopter. Before attaching a diopter-adjustment
viewfinder lens, remove the DK-17 viewfinder
eyepiece by closing the viewfinder shutter to
release the eyepiece lock (q) and then
unscrewing the eyepiece as shown at right (w).
Basic Photography and Playback
Turn the Camera On
Before taking photographs, turn the camera on and check the
battery level and number of exposures remaining as described
below.
1
Turn the camera on.
Power switch
Turn the camera on. The
control panel will turn on and
the display in the viewfinder
will light.
2
s
Check the battery level.
Check the battery level in the control
panel or viewfinder.
Icon *
Control panel
Viewfinder
Description
L
—
Battery fully charged.
K
—
J
—
Battery partially discharged.
I
—
Low battery. Charge battery or ready
H
d
spare battery.
H
d
Shutter release disabled. Charge or
(blinks)
(blinks) exchange battery.
* No icon displayed when camera is powered by optional EP-5B power
connector and EH-5b AC adapter.
37
3
s
38
Check the number of exposures remaining.
The control panel and viewfinder
show the number of photographs
that can be taken at current settings
(values over 1,000 are rounded down
to the nearest hundred; e.g., values
between 1,400 and 1,499 are shown
as 1.4 K). If two memory cards are
inserted, the displays show the space
available on the card in the primary
slot (0 89). When the number of
exposures remaining reaches A, the
number will flash, n or j will
blink in the shutter-speed displays,
and the icon for the affected card will
blink. Insert another memory card or
delete some photos (0 234).
Ready the Camera
When framing photographs in the
viewfinder, hold the handgrip in your right
hand and cradle the camera body or lens
with your left. Keep your elbows propped
lightly against your torso for support and
place one foot half a pace ahead of the
other to keep your upper body stable. When
framing photographs in portrait (tall)
orientation, hold the camera as shown in
the bottom of the three illustrations at right.
s
39
Focus and Shoot
1
Press the shutterrelease button
halfway (0 41).
Focus point
At default settings, the
camera will focus on the
subject in the center
focus point. Frame a
photo in the viewfinder
Focus
Buffer
with the main subject
indicator
capacity
positioned in the center
focus point and press
the shutter-release button halfway. If the subject is poorly lit,
the AF-assist illuminator may light.
s
2
Check indicators in the viewfinder.
When the focus operation is complete, the in-focus indicator
(I) will appear in the viewfinder.
Viewfinder display
I
2
4
2 4
(blinks)
Description
Subject in focus.
Focus point is between camera and subject.
Focus point is behind subject.
Camera unable to focus on subject in focus
point using autofocus.
While the shutter-release button is pressed halfway,
focus will lock and the number of exposures that
can be stored in the memory buffer (“t”; 0 105)
will be shown in the viewfinder display.
For information on what to do if the camera is unable to focus
using autofocus, see “Getting Good Results with Autofocus”
(0 100).
40
3
Shoot.
Smoothly press the shutterrelease-button the rest of the
way down to release the shutter
and record the photograph.
Access lamp
While the photograph is being
recorded to the memory card,
the access lamp will light. Do not eject the memory card or
remove or disconnect the power source until the lamp has gone
out and recording is complete.
s
A
The Shutter-Release Button
The camera has a two-stage shutter-release button. The camera
focuses when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. To take the
photograph, press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down.
Focus
Take photograph
41
A
Auto Meter Off
The shutter speed and aperture displays in the control panel and
viewfinder will turn off if no operations are performed for about six
seconds, reducing the drain on the battery. Press the shutter-release
button halfway to reactivate the display in the viewfinder (0 41).
6s
Exposure meters on Exposure meters off
s
Exposure meters on
The length of time before the exposure meters turn off automatically
can be adjusted using Custom Setting c2 (Auto meter-off delay,
0 291).
A
The Multi Selector
The multi selector can be used to select the
focus point while the exposure meters are on
(0 96).
Multi selector
A
Camera Off Display
If the camera is turned off with a battery and
memory card inserted, the memory card icon
and number of exposures remaining will be
displayed (some memory cards may in rare
cases only display this information when the
camera is on).
42
Control panel
Viewing Photographs
1
Press the K button.
A photograph will be
displayed in the monitor.
The memory card
containing the picture
currently displayed is
shown by an icon.
2
K button
View additional pictures.
s
Additional pictures can be
displayed by pressing 4 or 2.
To view additional information
on the current photograph,
press 1 and 3 (0 222).
1/ 12
1/ 125
F5. 6
NIKON D800
100
85mm
0, 0
100ND800 DSC_0001. JPG
10/ 01/ 2012 10: 06: 22
N OR
ORMAL
AL
7360x4912
To end playback and return to shooting mode, press the
shutter-release button halfway.
A
Image Review
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu (0 265),
photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor after shooting.
A
See Also
See page 221 for information on choosing a memory card slot.
43
Deleting Unwanted Photographs
Unwanted photographs can be deleted by pressing the O (Q)
button. Note that photographs can not be recovered once
deleted.
1
s
Display the photograph.
Display the photograph you wish to
delete as described in “Viewing
Photographs” on the previous page. The
location of the current image is shown by
an icon at the bottom left corner of the display.
2
Delete the photograph.
Press the O (Q) button. A
confirmation dialog will be
displayed; press the O (Q)
button again to delete the
O (Q) button
image and return to
playback. To exit without
deleting the picture, press K.
A
Delete
To delete multiple images or to select the memory card from which
images will be deleted, use the Delete option in the playback menu
(0 236).
44
xLive View Photography
Follow the steps below to take photographs in live view.
1
Rotate the live view selector to C
(live view photography).
Live view selector
2
The mirror will be raised and the view
through the lens will be displayed in the
camera monitor. The subject will no
longer be visible in the viewfinder.
3
x
Press the a button.
a button
Position the focus point.
Position the focus point over your subject as described on
page 48.
45
4
Focus.
B button
Press the shutter-release button
halfway or press the B
button to focus.
x
The focus point will blink green while the A AE-L/AF-L button
camera focuses. If the camera is able to
focus, the focus point will be displayed in
green; if the camera is unable to focus,
the focus point will blink red (note that
pictures can be taken even when the
focus point blinks red; check focus in the
monitor before shooting). Exposure can be locked by pressing
the A AE-L/AF-L button (0 128); focus locks while the shutterrelease button is pressed halfway.
A
Exposure Preview
During live view photography, you can
press J to preview the effects of shutter
speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity on
exposure. Exposure can be adjusted by
±5 EV (0 130), although only values
between –3 and +3 EV are reflected in the
preview display. Note that the preview may
not accurately reflect the final results when flash lighting is used,
Active D-Lighting (0 174), High Dynamic Range (HDR; 0 176), or
bracketing is in effect, A (auto) is selected for the Picture Control
Contrast parameter (0 166), or p is selected for shutter speed.
If the subject is very bright or very dark, the exposure indicators will
flash to warn that the preview may not accurately reflect exposure.
Exposure preview is not available when A is selected for
shutter speed.
46
5
Take the picture.
Press the shutter-release button the rest
of the way down to shoot. The monitor
will turn off.
6
Exit live view mode.
Press the a button to exit live view
mode.
D
Using Autofocus in Live View
Use an AF-S lens. The desired results may not be achieved with
other lenses or teleconverters. Note that in live view, autofocus is
slower and the monitor may brighten or darken while the camera
focuses. The focus point may sometimes be displayed in green
when the camera is unable to focus. The camera may be unable to
focus in the following situations:
• The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame
• The subject lacks contrast
• The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply
contrasting brightness, or includes spot lighting or a neon sign or
other light source that changes in brightness
• Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor,
sodium-vapor, or similar lighting
• A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used
• The subject appears smaller than the focus point
• The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g.,
blinds or a row of windows in a skyscraper)
• The subject is moving
x
47
Focusing in Live View
To focus using autofocus, rotate the focusmode selector to AF and follow the steps
below to choose autofocus and AF-area
modes. For information on focusing manually,
see page 55.
Focus-mode
selector
❚❚ Choosing a Focus Mode
The following autofocus modes are available in live view:
Mode
x
Description
Single-servo AF: For stationary subjects. Focus locks when shutterAF-S
release button is pressed halfway.
Full-time servo AF: For moving subjects. Camera focuses
AF-F continuously until shutter-release button is pressed. Focus locks
when shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
To choose an autofocus mode, press the AF-mode button and
rotate the main command dial until the desired mode is displayed
in the monitor.
AF-mode
button
48
Main command
dial
Monitor
Choosing an AF-Area Mode
The following AF-area modes can be selected in live view:
Mode
Description
Face-priority AF: Use for portraits. The camera automatically detects
and focuses on portrait subjects; the selected subject is indicated
by a double yellow border (if multiple faces, up to a maximum of
35, are detected, the camera will focus on the closest subject; to
!
choose a different subject, use the multi selector). If the camera
can no longer detect the subject (because, for example, the
subject has turned to face away from the camera), the border will
no longer be displayed.
Wide-area AF: Use for hand-held shots of landscapes and other nonportrait subjects. Use the multi selector to move the focus point
5
anywhere in the frame, or press the center of the multi selector to
position the focus point in the center of the frame.
Normal-area AF: Use for pin-point focus on a selected spot in the
frame. Use the multi selector to move the focus point anywhere in
6
the frame, or press the center of the multi selector to position the
focus point in the center of the frame. A tripod is recommended.
Subject-tracking AF: Position the focus point over your subject and
press the center of the multi selector. The focus point will track the
&
selected subject as it moves through the frame. To end tracking,
press the center of the multi selector again.
x
49
To choose an AF-area mode, press the AF-mode button and rotate
the sub-command dial until the desired mode is displayed in the
monitor.
AF-mode
button
Sub-command
dial
Monitor
x
D
Subject Tracking
The camera may be unable to track subjects if they move quickly, leave
the frame or are obscured by other objects, change visibly in size, color,
or brightness, or are too small, too large, too bright, too dark, or similar
in color or brightness to the background.
50
The Live View Display: Live View
Photography
e r
q
w
t
y
u
Item
q Time remaining
Monitor hue
w indicator
e Autofocus mode
r AF-area mode
t Focus point
Description
0
The amount of time remaining before live
56, 57
view ends automatically. Displayed if
shooting will end in 30 s or less.
Displayed if monitor hue differs from the hue
produced by the current white balance
52
setting.
The current autofocus mode.
48
The current AF-area mode.
The current focus point. The display varies
with the option selected for AF-area mode.
Monitor brightness
A monitor brightness indicator.
y indicator
u Guide
A guide to the options available during live
view photography.
x
49
49
53
52, 53
51
Adjusting Monitor Hue
If flash lighting is used with Flash or Preset manual white balance
(0 145), the colors in the monitor may differ from those in the final
photograph. Monitor hue can be adjusted to reduce the effects of
ambient lighting on the display in the monitor during live view
photography, for example when using a flash.
1
Highlight the monitor hue
indicator.
Press and hold W and press 4 or 2
to highlight the monitor hue indicator
at the left side of the display.
x
2
W button
Adjust monitor hue.
Keeping the W button pressed, rotate
the main command dial to adjust
monitor hue (select -- to preview the hue of the final
photograph in the monitor; if another option is selected, the
hue seen in the monitor during live view photography will
differ from that seen in the final image). Monitor hue is reset
when the camera is turned off.
A
Recalling Monitor Hue
To restore the most recently selected hue when starting live view, hold
the U button while pressing a.
A
Choosing a Picture Control
Pressing L (Z/Q) during live
view displays a list of Picture
Controls. Highlight the desired
Picture Control and press 2 to
adjust Picture Control settings
(0 163).
52
L (Z/Q) button
Adjusting Monitor Brightness
Monitor brightness can be adjusted as described below. Note that
brightness adjustment is not available during exposure preview.
1
Highlight the monitor brightness
indicator.
Press and hold W and press 4 or 2
to highlight the monitor brightness
indicator at the right side of the
display.
2
W button
Adjust monitor brightness.
Keeping the W button pressed, press
1 or 3 to adjust monitor brightness
(note that monitor brightness has no effect on photographs
taken with the camera). If A (auto) is selected and the monitor
is on, the camera will automatically adjust brightness in
response to ambient lighting conditions as measured by the
ambient brightness sensor (0 5).
x
53
The Information Display: Live View
Photography
To hide or display indicators in the monitor during live view
photography, press the R button.
Virtual horizon
(0 337)
x
54
Histogram
(exposure
preview only;
0 46)
Information on
Information off
Framing
guides
Manual Focus
To focus in manual focus mode (0 101),
rotate the lens focus ring until the subject is
in focus.
To magnify the view in the monitor up to
about 23 × for precise focus, press the X
button. While the view through the lens is
zoomed in, a navigation window will appear
in a gray frame at the bottom right corner of
the display. Use the multi selector to scroll
X button
to areas of the frame not visible in the
monitor (available only if wide- or normalarea AF is selected for AF-area mode), or
press W to zoom out.
x
Navigation window
A
Non-CPU Lenses
When using non-CPU lenses, be sure to enter the focal length and
maximum aperture using the Non-CPU lens data option in the setup
menu (0 212). Non-CPU lenses can be used only in exposure modes g
and h (0 117); aperture can be adjusted using the lens aperture ring.
A
Exposure
Depending on the scene, exposure may differ from that which would be
obtained when live view is not used. Metering in live view is adjusted to
suit the live view display, producing photographs with exposure close to
what is seen in the monitor.
55
D
Shooting in Live View Mode
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with
exposure, close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter (0 106).
Although they will not appear in the final picture, flicker, banding, or
distortion may be visible in the monitor under fluorescent, mercury
vapor, or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned horizontally or an
object moves at high speed through frame (flicker and banding can be
reduced using Flicker reduction; 0 329). Bright light sources may
leave after-images in the monitor when the camera is panned. Bright
spots may also appear. When shooting in live view mode, avoid
pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources. Failure to
observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal
circuitry.
x
Live view ends automatically if the lens is removed.
Live view may end automatically to prevent damage to the camera’s
internal circuits; exit live view when the camera is not in use. Note that
the temperature of the camera’s internal circuits may rise and noise
(bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be displayed
in the following instances (the camera may also become noticeably
warm, but this does not indicate a malfunction):
• The ambient temperature is high
• The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to
record movies
• The camera has been used in continuous release mode for extended
periods
If live view does not start when you press the a button, wait for the
internal circuits to cool and then try again.
Movie recording is not available during live view photography. Select
movie live view (0 59) to shoot movies.
56
D
The Count Down Display
A count down will be displayed 30 s before live view ends automatically
(0 51; the timer turns red if live view is about to end to protect the
internal circuits or, if an option other than No limit is selected for
Custom Setting c4—Monitor off delay; 0 292—5 s before the monitor
is due to turn off automatically). Depending on shooting conditions,
the timer may appear immediately when live view is selected. Note that
although the count down does not appear during playback, live view
will still end automatically when the timer expires.
A
HDMI
If the camera is attached to an HDMI
video device during live view
photography, the camera monitor will
remain on and the video device will
display the view through the lens as
shown at right. Press the R button to
turn the histogram display on and off
during exposure preview (0 46).
x
A
See Also
For information on choosing the role played by the center of the multi
selector, see Custom Setting f2 (Multi selector center button, 0 309).
57
x
58
yMovie Live View
Movies can be recorded in live view.
1
Rotate the live view selector to 1
(movie live view).
Live view selector
2
Press the a button.
The mirror will be raised and the view
through the lens will be displayed in the
camera monitor, modified for the effects
of exposure. The subject will no longer
be visible in the viewfinder.
y
a button
D The 0 Icon
A 0 icon (0 64) indicates that movies can not be recorded.
A
Before Recording
Before recording, choose a color space (0 274) and Picture Control
(0 163). White balance can be set at any time by pressing the U
button and rotating the main command dial (0 145).
3
Choose a focus mode.
Choose a focus mode as described in
“Choosing a Focus Mode“ (0 48).
59
4
Choose an AF-area mode.
Choose an AF-Area mode as described in
“Choosing an AF-Area Mode“ (0 49).
5
y
Focus.
B button
Frame the opening shot and focus as
described in Steps 3 and 4 on pages 45–
46 (for more information on focusing in
movie live view, see page 47). Note that
the number of subjects that can be
detected in face-priority AF drops in
movie live view.
A
Exposure Mode
The following settings can be adjusted in movie live view:
Aperture
e, f
g
h
—
✔
✔
Shutter speed ISO sensitivity Exposure compensation
—
—
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
—
In exposure mode h, ISO sensitivity can be set to values between
100 and Hi 2.0 and shutter speed to values between 1/25 s and
1/8,000 s (the slowest available shutter speed varies with the frame
rate; 0 70). In other exposure modes, shutter speed and ISO
sensitivity are adjusted automatically. If the subject is over- or
under-exposed in mode e or f, end live view and start movie live
view again or select exposure g and adjust aperture.
60
6
Start recording.
Press the movie-record button to start
recording. A recording indicator and the
time available are displayed in the
monitor. Exposure is set using matrix
metering and can be locked by pressing
the A AE-L/AF-L button (0 128) or altered
by up to ±3 EV using exposure
compensation (0 130). In autofocus
mode, the camera can be refocused by
pressing the B button.
Movie-record button
Recording indicator
Time remaining
A
y
Audio
The camera can record both video and sound; do not cover the
microphone on the front of the camera during movie recording.
Note that the built-in microphone may record sounds made by the
lens during autofocus, vibration reduction, or changes to aperture.
A
See Also
Frame size, microphone sensitivity, and card slot options are
available in the Movie settings menu (0 70). Focus can be
adjusted manually as described on page 55. The roles played by
the center of the multi selector, the Fn, depth-of-field preview, and
A AE-L/AF-L buttons can be chosen using Custom Settings f2 (Multi
selector center button; 0 309), g1 (Assign Fn button; 0 321), g2
(Assign preview button; 0 322), and g3 (Assign AE-L/AF-L
button, 0 323; this option also allows exposure to be locked
without keeping the A AE-L/AF-L button pressed), respectively.
Custom Setting g4 (Assign shutter button; 0 324) controls
whether the shutter-release button can be used to start movie live
view or to start and end movie recording.
61
7
End recording.
Press the movie-record button again to
end recording. Recording will end
automatically when the maximum length
is reached, or the memory card is full.
A
Maximum Length
The maximum length for individual movie files is 4 GB (for
maximum recording times, see page 70); note that depending on
memory card write speed, shooting may end before this length is
reached (0 434).
A
y
Taking Photographs
To take a photograph while recording is in progress, press the
shutter-release button all the way down. Movie recording will end
(the footage recorded to that point will be saved) and the camera
will return to live view. The photograph will be recorded at the
current image area setting using a crop with an aspect ratio of
16 : 9. Note that the exposure for photographs can not be
previewed during movie live view; mode e, f, or g is recommended
but accurate results can be achieved in mode h by adjusting
exposure during live view photography (0 45) and then rotating
the live view selector to 1 and checking the image area. Exposure
compensation for the photograph can be set to values between –5
and +5 EV, but only values between –3 and +3 can be previewed in
the monitor (0 130).
D
The Count-Down Display
A count down will be displayed 30 s before movie recording ends
automatically (0 51). Depending on shooting conditions, the
timer may appear immediately when movie recording begins.
Note that regardless of the amount of recording time available, live
view will still end automatically when the timer expires. Wait for
the internal circuits to cool before resuming movie recording.
62
8
Exit live view mode.
Press the a button to exit live view
mode.
Indices
If Index marking is selected for Custom
Setting g2 (Assign preview button, 0 322),
you can press the depth-of-field preview
button during recording to add indices that
can be used to locate frames during editing
and playback (0 73). Up to 20 indices can be
added to each movie.
Depth-of-field
preview button
y
Index
63
The Live View Display: Movie Live View
t y
q
w
e
r
u
i
Item
q “No movie” icon
y
64
Description
Indicates that movies can not be recorded.
w Headphone volume Volume of audio output to headphones.
Microphone
Microphone sensitivity for movie recording.
e sensitivity
Sound level for audio recording. Displayed
in red if level is too high; adjust microphone
sensitivity accordingly. Left (L) and right (R)
r Sound level
channel indicators appear when optional
ME-1 or other stereo microphone is used.
Time remaining
t (movie live view) The recording time available for movies.
y Movie frame size The frame size for movie recording.
Monitor brightness
A monitor brightness indicator.
u indicator
A guide to the options available during
i Guide
movie live view.
0
59
65
65
65
61
70
65
65
❚❚ Adjusting Settings in the Live View Display
Microphone sensitivity, headphone volume, and monitor
brightness can be adjusted as described below. Note that
microphone sensitivity and headphone volume can not be
adjusted during recording, and that brightness affects the monitor
only (0 53); movies recorded with the camera are unaffected.
1
Highlight a setting.
Press and hold W and press 4 or 2
to highlight the indicator for the
desired setting.
W button
2
Adjust the highlighted setting.
y
Keeping the W button pressed, press
1 or 3 to adjust the highlighted
setting.
A
Using an External Microphone
The optional ME-1 stereo microphone can be used to record sound in
stereo or to avoid recording lens noise caused by autofocus.
A
Headphones
Third-party headphones can be used. Note that high sound levels may
result in high volume; particular care should be taken when
headphones are used.
65
The Information Display: Movie Live View
To hide or display indicators in the monitor during movie live view,
press the R button.
Virtual horizon
(0 337)
Information on
Information off
Histogram
Framing
guides
y
D
Photo Shooting Info
If View photo shooting info is selected for Custom Setting g1 (Assign Fn
button, 0 321), g2 (Assign preview button, 0 322), or g3 (Assign AEL/AF-L button, 0 323), pressing the selected button displays
information on shutter speed, aperture, and other photo settings in
place of movie recording information. Press the button again to return
to the movie recording display.
Movie recording
display
66
Photo shooting
information
Image Area
Regardless of the option selected for Image area in the shooting
menu (0 79), all movies and photographs recorded in movie live
view (0 59) have an aspect ratio of 16 : 9. Images recorded with
On selected for Image area > Auto DX crop and a DX lens
attached use a DX-based movie format, as do images recorded
with DX (24×16) 1.5× selected for Image area > Choose image
area. Other images use an FX-based movie format. A a icon is
displayed when the DX-based movie format is selected.
FX format (35.9 × 24)
display (0 80)
DX format (23.4 × 15.6)
display (0 80)
y
FX-based (movie)
format (32.8 × 18.4) display
DX-based (movie)
format (23.4 × 13.2) display
A
HDMI
If the camera is connected to an HDMI
device (0 57), the view through the lens
will appear both in the camera monitor
and on the HDMI device. The indicators
that appear in the HDMI device during
movie recording are shown at right. The
camera monitor does not show the sound
level, virtual horizon, or histogram; indicators in the monitor and on the
HDMI device can not be hidden or displayed using the R button.
67
A
Movie Live View Photographs
The following table shows the size of photographs taken in movie live
view:
Image area
FX-based format
DX-based format
Option
L
M
S
L
M
S
Size (pixels)
6,720 × 3,776
5,040 × 2,832
3,360 × 1,888
4,800 × 2,704
3,600 × 2,024
2,400 × 1,352
Print size (cm/in.) *
56.9 × 32.0/22.4 × 12.6
42.7 × 24.0/16.8 × 9.4
28.4 × 16.0/ 11.2 × 6.3
40.6 × 22.9/16.0 × 9.0
30.5 × 17.1/12.0 × 6.7
20.3 × 11.4/ 8.0 × 4.5
* Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi. Print size in inches equals
image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch
(dpi; 1 inch = approximately 2.54 cm).
y
68
Image quality is determined by the option selected for Image quality
in the shooting menu (0 84).
A
Remote Cords
If Record movies is selected for Custom Setting g4 (Assign shutter
button, 0 324), the shutter-release buttons on optional remote cords
(0 390) can be used to start movie live view and to start and end movie
recording.
D
Recording Movies
Flicker, banding, or distortion may be visible in the monitor and in the
final movie under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or if the
camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at high speed
through frame (flicker and banding can be reduced using Flicker
reduction 0 329). Bright light sources may leave after-images when
the camera is panned. Jagged edges, false colors, moiré, and bright
spots may also appear. Bright bands may appear at the top or bottom
of the frame if the subject is briefly illuminated by a strobe or other
bright, momentary light source. When recording movies, avoid
pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources. Failure to
observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal
circuitry.
y
Flash lighting can not be used during movie live view.
Recording ends automatically if the lens is removed.
Live view may end automatically to prevent damage to the camera’s
internal circuits; exit live view when the camera is not in use. Note that
the temperature of the camera’s internal circuits may rise and noise
(bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be displayed
in the following instances (the camera may also become noticeably
warm, but this does not indicate a malfunction):
• The ambient temperature is high
• The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to
record movies
• The camera has been used in continuous release mode for extended
periods
If live view does not start when you press the a button, wait for the
internal circuits to cool and then try again.
69
Movie Settings
Use the Movie settings option in the shooting menu to adjust the
following settings.
• Frame size/frame rate, Movie quality: Choose from the following
options:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
y
Option 1
1920 × 1080; 30 fps 2
1920 × 1080; 25 fps 2
1920 × 1080; 24 fps 2
1280 × 720; 60 fps 2
1280 × 720; 50 fps 2
1280 × 720; 30 fps
1280 × 720; 25 fps
Maximum bit rate (Mbps)
★ high quality
Normal
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
12
8
12
8
29 min. 59 s
1 Actual frame rate is 29.97 fps for values listed as 30 fps, 23.976 fps for values
listed as 24 fps, and 59.94 fps for values listed as 60 fps.
2 Maximum length for ★ High quality movies is 20 minutes.
• Microphone: Turn the built-in or optional ME-1
stereo microphones on or off or adjust
microphone sensitivity. Choose Auto
sensitivity to adjust sensitivity
automatically, Microphone off to turn
sound recording off; to select microphone
sensitivity manually, select Manual
sensitivity, then highlight an option and
press J.
• Destination: Choose the slot to which movies
are recorded. The menu shows the time
available on each card; recording ends
automatically when no time remains. Note
that regardless of the option selected,
photographs are recorded to the card in the
primary slot (0 89).
70
Maximum length
1
Select Movie settings.
Press the G button to
display the menus.
Highlight Movie settings in
the shooting menu and
G button
press 2.
2
Choose movie options.
Highlight the desired item
and press 2, then highlight
an option and press J.
y
71
Viewing Movies
Movies are indicated by a 1 icon in full-frame playback (0 219).
Press the center of the multi selector to start playback.
1 icon
Length
Current position/total length
Movie progress Volume
bar
y
The following operations can be performed:
To
Pause
Play
Rewind/
advance
72
Guide
Use
Description
Pause playback.
Resume playback when movie is paused or
during rewind/advance.
Speed increases with
each press, from 2× to
4× to 8× to 16×; keep pressed to skip to
beginning or end of movie (first frame is
indicated by h in top right corner of monitor,
last frame by i). If playback is paused, movie
rewinds or advances one frame at a time;
keep pressed for continuous rewind or
advance.
To
Use
Skip ahead/
back
Adjust volume
Trim movie
Exit
Return to
shooting
mode
Display menus
X/W
J
Description
Use main command dial to skip to next or
previous index, or to skip to the last or first
frame if the movie contains no indices (if the
movie is more than 30 s long, rotating the
main command dial when the last frame is
displayed skips back 30 s.).
Press X to increase volume, W to decrease.
See page 74 for more information.
/K Exit to full-frame playback.
Press the shutter-release button halfway to
exit to shooting mode.
G
See page 259 for more information.
y
A
The p Icon
Movies with indices (0 63) are indicated by a
p icon in full-frame playback.
A
The 2 Icon
2 is displayed in full-frame and movie playback if
the movie was recorded without sound.
73
Editing Movies
Trim footage to create edited copies of movies or save selected
frames as JPEG stills.
Option
Description
Create a copy from which the opening or closing
9 Choose start/end point
footage has been removed.
Save a selected frame as a JPEG still.
4 Save selected frame
Trimming Movies
To create trimmed copies of movies:
1
y
Display a movie full
frame.
Press the K button to
display pictures full frame
in the monitor and press 4
K button
and 2 to scroll through
pictures until the movie you
wish to edit is displayed.
2
Choose a starting or end
point.
Play the movie back as
described on page 72,
pressing the center of the
Movie progress bar
multi selector to start and
resume playback and 3 to pause, or rotating the main
command dial to skip to an index. Your approximate position
in the movie can be ascertained from the movie progress bar.
74
3
Display movie edit
options.
Press J to display movie
edit options.
J button
4
Select Choose start/end
point.
Highlight Choose start/
end point and press J.
The dialog shown at right
will be displayed; choose
whether the current frame
will be the starting or end
point of the copy and press
J.
5
y
Delete frames.
If the desired frame is not
currently displayed, press 4
or 2 to advance or rewind
(to skip to an index, rotate
L (Z/Q) button
the main command dial).
To switch the current selection from start point (w) to end
point (x) or vice versa, press L (Z/Q).
Once you have selected the
start point and/or end
point, press 1. All frames
before the selected start
point and after the selected end point will be removed from
the copy.
75
6
Save the copy.
Highlight one of the
following and press J:
• Save as new file: Save the
copy to a new file.
• Overwrite existing file: Replace the original movie file with the
edited copy.
• Cancel: Return to Step 5.
• Preview: Preview the copy.
Edited copies are indicated by a 9 icon in full-frame playback.
y
D
Trimming Movies
Movies must be at least two seconds long. If a copy can not be created
at the current playback position, the current position will be displayed
in red in Step 5 and no copy will be created. The copy will not be saved
if there is insufficient space available on the memory card.
Copies have the same time and date of creation as the original.
A
The Retouch Menu
Movies can also be edited using the Edit movie
option in the retouch menu (0 341).
76
Saving Selected Frames
To save a copy of a selected frame as a JPEG still:
1
View the movie and
choose a frame.
Play the movie back as
described on page 72; your
approximate position in the
movie can be ascertained from the movie progress bar. Pause
the movie at the frame you intend to copy.
2
Display movie edit options.
Press J to display movie
edit options.
y
J button
3
Choose Save selected
frame.
Highlight Save selected
frame and press J.
4
Create a still copy.
Press 1 to create a still copy
of the current frame.
77
5
Save the copy.
Highlight Yes and press J
to create a fine-quality
(0 84) JPEG copy of the
selected frame. Movie stills
are indicated by a 9 icon in full-frame playback.
y
A
Save Selected Frame
JPEG movie stills created with the Save selected frame option can not
be retouched. JPEG movie stills lack some categories of photo
information (0 222).
78
dImage Recording Options
Image Area
Choose the aspect ratio and angle of view (image area). Thanks to
the camera’s FX format (35.9 × 24 mm) image sensor, you can
choose from angles of view as wide as those supported by 35 mm
(135) format film cameras, while automatically cropping pictures
to the DX angle of view when using DX format lenses. See page
437 for information on the number of pictures that can be stored
at different image area settings.
❚❚ Auto DX Crop
Choose whether to automatically select a DX
crop when a DX lens is attached.
Option
On
Off
d
Description
Camera automatically selects DX crop when DX lens is
attached. If another lens is attached, the crop selected for
Choose image area will be used.
Crop selected for Choose image area is used.
79
Choose Image Area
Choose the image area used when a non-DX
lens is attached or a DX-lens is attached with
Off selected for Auto DX crop (0 82).
Option
d
Description
Images are recorded in FX format using the full area
FX (36×24)
of the image sensor (35.9 × 24.0 mm), producing an
c 1.0×
angle of view equivalent to a NIKKOR lens on a
(FX format)
35mm format camera.
A 30.0 × 19.9 mm area at the center of the image
1.2× (30×20) sensor is used to record photographs. To calculate
Z 1.2×
the approximate focal length of the lens in 35mm
format, multiply by 1.2.
An area at the center of the image sensor
DX (24×16)
23.4 × 15.6 mm is used to record pictures in DX
a 1.5×
format. To calculate the approximate focal length of
(DX format)
the lens in 35mm format, multiply by 1.5.
Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 5 : 4
b 5 : 4 (30×24) (30.0 × 24.0 mm).
FX format
DX format (24×16)
image circle
DX format
5:4
1.2×
80
FX format (36×24)
image circle
A
Image Area
The selected option is shown in the information
display.
A
DX Lenses
DX lenses are designed for use with DX format cameras and have a
smaller angle of view than lenses for 35mm format cameras. If Auto DX
crop is off and an option other than DX (24×16) (DX format) is selected
for Image area when a DX lens is attached, the edges of the image may
be eclipsed. This may not be apparent in the viewfinder, but when the
images are played back you may notice a drop in resolution or that the
edges of the picture are blacked out.
A
The Viewfinder Display
The 1.2 ×, DX format, and 5 : 4 crops are shown below; the area outside
the crop can be viewed in gray when Off is selected for Custom Setting
a5 (AF point illumination, 0 284).
1.2×
A
DX format
d
5:4
See Also
See page 67 for information on the crops available in movie live view.
81
Image area can be set using the Image area option in the
shooting menu or by pressing a control and rotating a command
dial.
The Image Area Menu
1
Select Image area in
the shooting menu.
Press G to display the
menus. Highlight Image
area in the shooting
menu (0 268) and press
2.
2
G button
Choose an option.
Highlight Auto DX crop or
Choose image area and
press 2.
d
3
Adjust settings.
Choose an option and
press J. The selected crop
is displayed in the
viewfinder (0 81).
J button
D
Auto DX Crop
The Fn button can not be used to select image area when a DX lens is
attached and Auto DX crop is on.
A
Image Size
Image size varies with the option selected for image area.
82
Camera Controls
1
Assign image area selection to a camera control.
Select Choose image area as the “button + command dials”
option for a camera control in the Custom Settings menu
(0 278). Image area selection can be assigned to the Fn button
(Custom Setting f4, Assign Fn button, 0 311), the depth of
field preview button (Custom Setting f5, Assign preview
button, 0 315), or the A AE-L/AF-L button (Custom Setting f6,
Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 315).
2
Use the selected control to choose an image area.
The image area can be
selected by pressing the
selected button and rotating
the main or sub-command dial
until the desired crop is
displayed in the viewfinder
(0 81).
d
Fn button
Main
command dial
The option currently selected for image
area can be viewed by pressing the
button to display the image area in the
control panel, viewfinder, or information
display. FX format is displayed as “36 –
24”, 1.2 × as “30 – 20”, DX format as “24 –
16”, and 5 : 4 as “30 – 24”.
83
Image Quality
The D800 supports the following image quality options. See page
436 for information on the number of pictures that can be stored
at different image quality and size settings.
d
Option
File type
NEF (RAW)
NEF
TIFF (RGB)
TIFF
(RGB)
JPEG fine
JPEG normal
JPEG
JPEG basic
NEF (RAW)+
JPEG fine
NEF (RAW)+
JPEG normal
NEF (RAW)+
JPEG basic
NEF/
JPEG
Description
RAW data from the image sensor are saved
directly to the memory card in Nikon Electronic
Format (NEF). Settings such as white balance
and contrast can be adjusted on a computer
after shooting.
Record uncompressed TIFF-RGB images at a bit
depth of 8 bits per channel (24-bit color). TIFF is
supported by a wide variety of imaging
applications.
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1:4 (fine image quality). *
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1:8 (normal image quality). *
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1:16 (basic image quality). *
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image
and one fine-quality JPEG image.
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image
and one normal-quality JPEG image.
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image
and one basic-quality JPEG image.
* Size priority selected for JPEG compression.
84
Image quality is set by pressing
the T button and rotating the
main command dial until the
desired setting is displayed in the
control panel.
T button
Main
command dial
Control panel
A
NEF (RAW) Images
NEF (RAW) images can be viewed on the camera or using software such
as Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0 389) or ViewNX 2 (available on
the supplied ViewNX 2 installer CD). JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) images
can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch
menu (0 353).
d
A
NEF+JPEG
When photographs taken at settings of NEF (RAW) + JPEG are viewed on
the camera with only one memory card inserted, only the JPEG image
will be displayed. If both copies are recorded to the same memory card,
both copies will be erased when the photo is deleted. If the JPEG copy is
recorded to a separate memory card using the Secondary slot
function > RAW primary, JPEG secondary option, deleting the JPEG
copy will not delete the NEF (RAW) image.
A
The Image Quality Menu
Image quality can also be adjusted using the
Image quality option in the shooting menu
(0 268).
85
The following options can be
accessed from the shooting
menu. Press the G button to
display the menus, highlight
the desired option and press 2.
G button
JPEG Compression
Choose the type of compression for JPEG images.
Option
Description
Images are compressed to produce relatively
O Size priority uniform file size.
Optimal
Optimal image quality. File size varies with scene
P
quality
recorded.
NEF (RAW) Recording > Type
d
Choose the type of compression for NEF (RAW) images.
Option
Description
NEF images are compressed using a reversible
Lossless
N
algorithm, reducing file size by about 20–40%
compressed
with no effect on image quality.
NEF images are compressed using a nonO Compressed
reversible algorithm, reducing file size by about
35–55% with almost no effect on image quality.
Uncompressed NEF images are not compressed.
NEF (RAW) Recording > NEF (RAW) Bit Depth
Choose a bit depth for NEF (RAW) images.
Option
q 12-bit
r 14-bit
86
Description
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of 12 bits.
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits,
producing files larger than those with a bit depth of 12
bits but increasing the color data recorded.
Image Size
Image size is measured in pixels. Choose from Large, Medium, or
Small (note that image size varies depending on the option
selected for Image area, 0 79):
Image area
FX (36×24) 1.0×
(FX format)
1.2× (30×20)
1.2×
DX (24×16) 1.5×
(DX format)
5 : 4 (30×24)
Option
L
M
S
L
M
S
L
M
S
L
M
S
Size (pixels)
7,360 × 4,912
5,520 × 3,680
3,680 × 2,456
6,144 × 4,080
4,608 × 3,056
3,072 × 2,040
4,800 × 3,200
3,600 × 2,400
2,400 × 1,600
6,144 × 4,912
4,608 × 3,680
3,072 × 2,456
Print size (cm/in.) *
62.3 × 41.6/24.5 × 16.4
46.7 × 31.2/18.4 × 12.3
31.2 × 20.8/12.3 × 8.2
52.0 × 34.5/20.5 × 13.6
39.0 × 25.9/15.4 × 10.2
26.0 × 17.3/10.2 × 6.8
40.6 × 27.1/16.0 × 10.7
30.5 × 20.3/12.0 × 8.0
20.3 × 13.5/ 8.0 × 5.3
52.0 × 41.6/20.5 × 16.4
39.0 × 31.2/15.4 × 12.3
26.0 × 20.8/10.2 × 8.2
d
* Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi. Print size in inches equals image
size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch
(dpi; 1 inch = approximately 2.54 cm).
Image size can be set by pressing
the T button and rotating the
sub-command dial until the
desired option is displayed in the
control panel.
T button
Sub-command
dial
Control panel
87
A
NEF (RAW) Images
Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of
NEF (RAW) images. When opened in software such as ViewNX 2
(supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately), NEF (RAW) images
have the dimensions given for large (L-size) images in the table on the
previous page.
A
The Image Size Menu
Image size can also be adjusted using the Image
size option in the shooting menu (0 268).
d
88
Using Two Memory Cards
When two memory cards are inserted in the camera, you can
choose one as the primary card using the Primary slot selection
item in the shooting menu. Select SD card slot to designate the
card in the SD card slot as the primary card, CF card slot to choose
the CompactFlash card. The roles played by the primary and
secondary cards can be chosen using the Secondary slot
function option in the shooting menu. Choose from Overflow
(the secondary card is used only when the primary card is full),
Backup (each picture is recorded to both the primary and
secondary card), and RAW primary, JPEG secondary (as for
Backup, except that the NEF/RAW copies of photos recorded at
settings of NEF/RAW + JPEG are recorded only to the primary card
and the JPEG copies only to the secondary card).
d
D
“Backup” and “RAW Primary, JPEG Secondary”
The camera shows the number of exposures remaining on the card with
the least amount of memory. Shutter release will be disabled when
either card is full.
A
Recording Movies
When two memory cards are inserted in the camera, the slot used to
record movies can be selected using the Movie settings > Destination
option in the shooting menu (0 70).
89
d
90
NFocus
This section describes the options that control how your camera
focuses when photographs are framed in the viewfinder. Focus
can be adjusted automatically (see below) or manually (0 101).
The user can also select the focus point for automatic or manual
focus (0 96) or use focus lock to focus to recompose photographs
after focusing (0 98).
Autofocus
To use autofocus, rotate the focus-mode
selector to AF.
N
Focus-mode
selector
Autofocus Mode
Choose from the following autofocus modes:
Mode
Description
Single-servo AF: For stationary subjects. Focus locks when shutterrelease button is pressed halfway. At default settings, shutter can
AF-S only be released when in-focus indicator (I) is displayed (focus
priority; 0 282).
Continuous-servo AF: For moving subjects. Camera focuses
continuously while shutter-release button is pressed halfway; if
subject moves, camera will engage predictive focus tracking (0 92)
AF-C to predict final distance to subject and adjust focus as necessary.
At default settings, shutter can be released whether or not subject
is in focus (release priority; 0 281).
91
Autofocus mode can
be selected by
pressing the AF-mode
button and rotating
the main command
dial until the desired
setting is displayed in
the viewfinder and
control panel.
AF-mode button
Control panel
A The B Button
For the purpose of focusing the camera,
pressing the B button has the same effect
as pressing the shutter-release button
halfway.
Main command dial
Viewfinder
B button
N A Predictive Focus Tracking
In AF-C mode, the camera will initiate
predictive focus tracking if the subject moves
toward or away from the camera while the
shutter-release button is pressed halfway or the B button is pressed.
This allows the camera to track focus while attempting to predict where
the subject will be when the shutter is released.
A
See Also
For information on using focus priority in continuous-servo AF, see
Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority selection, 0 281). For information
on using release priority in single-servo AF, see Custom Setting a2 (AF-S
priority selection, 0 282). For information on preventing the camera
from focusing when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, see
Custom Setting a4 (AF activation, 0 283). See page 48 for information
on the autofocus options available in live view or during movie
recording.
92
AF-Area Mode
Choose how the focus point for autofocus is selected.
• Single-point AF: Select the focus point as described on page 96; the
camera will focus on the subject in the selected focus point only.
Use with stationary subjects.
• Dynamic-area AF: Select the focus point as described on page 96. In
AF-C focus mode, the camera will focus based on information
from surrounding focus points if the subject briefly leaves the
selected point. The number of focus points varies with the mode
selected:
- 9-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when there is time to compose
the photograph or when photographing subjects that are
moving predictably (e.g., runners or race cars on a track).
- 21-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when photographing subjects
that are moving unpredictably (e.g., players at a football game).
- 51-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when photographing subjects
that are moving quickly and can not be easily framed in the
viewfinder (e.g., birds).
• 3D-tracking: Select the focus point as described on page 96. In AF-C
focus mode, the camera will track subjects that leave the
selected focus point and select new focus points as required.
Use to quickly compose pictures with subjects that are moving
erratically from side to side (e.g., tennis players). If the subject
leaves viewfinder, remove your finger from the shutter-release
button and recompose the photograph with the subject in the
selected focus point.
N
93
• Auto-area AF: The camera automatically
detects the subject and selects the focus
point; if a face is detected, the camera will
give priority to the portrait subject. The
active focus points are highlighted briefly
after the camera focuses; in AF-C mode, the
main focus point remains highlighted after
the other focus points have turned off.
AF-area mode can be
selected by pressing the
AF-mode button and
rotating the subcommand dial until the
desired setting is
displayed in the
viewfinder and control
panel.
AF-mode button
Sub-command dial
N
Control panel
A
Viewfinder
3D-tracking
When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the colors in the
area surrounding the focus point are stored in the camera.
Consequently 3D-tracking may not produce the desired results with
subjects that are the same color as the background or that occupy a
very small area of the frame.
94
A
AF-Area Mode
AF-area mode is shown in the control panel and viewfinder.
AF-area mode
Single-point
AF
9-point
dynamic-area
AF *
21-point
dynamic-area
AF *
Control
panel
Viewfinder
AF-area mode
Control
Viewfinder
panel
51-point
dynamic-area
AF *
3D-tracking
Auto-area AF
*Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder. Remaining focus
points provide information to assist focus operation.
A
Manual Focus
Single-point AF is automatically selected when manual focus is used.
A
See Also
For information on adjusting how long the camera waits before
refocusing when an object moves in front of the camera, see Custom
Setting a3 (Focus tracking with lock-on, 0 283). See page 49 for
information on the autofocus options available in live view or during
movie recording.
N
95
Focus Point Selection
The camera offers a choice of 51 focus points that can be used to
compose photographs with the main subject positioned almost
anywhere in the frame.
1
Rotate the focus selector lock to ●.
This allows the multi selector to be used
to select the focus point.
Focus selector lock
2
N
Select the focus point.
Use the multi selector to select
the focus point in the
viewfinder while the exposure
meters are on. The center
focus point can be selected by
pressing the center of the multi
selector.
The focus selector lock can be
rotated to the locked (L)
position following selection to
prevent the selected focus
point from changing when the
multi selector is pressed.
96
A
Auto-area AF
The focus point for auto-area AF is selected automatically; manual
focus-point selection is not available.
A
See Also
For information on choosing when the focus point is illuminated, see
Custom Setting a5 (AF point illumination, 0 284). For information on
setting focus-point selection to “wrap around,” see Custom Setting a6
(Focus point wrap-around, 0 284). For information on choosing the
number of focus points that can be selected using the multi selector,
see Custom Setting a7 (Number of focus points, 0 285). For
information on changing the role of the multi selector center button,
see Custom Setting f2 (Multi selector center button, 0 309).
N
97
Focus Lock
Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing,
making it possible to focus on a subject that will not be in a focus
point in the final composition. If the camera is unable to focus
using autofocus (0 91), you can also focus on another subject at
the same distance and then use focus lock to recompose the
photograph. Focus lock is most effective when an option other
than auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode (0 93).
1
Focus.
Position the subject in the
selected focus point and press
the shutter-release button
halfway to initiate focus. Check
that the in-focus indicator (I) appears in the viewfinder.
N
2
Lock focus.
AF-C focus mode (0 91): With the
shutter-release button pressed
halfway (q), press the A AE-L/
AF-L button (w) to lock both
focus and exposure (an AE-L
icon will be displayed in the
viewfinder). Focus will remain
locked while the A AE-L/AF-L
button is pressed, even if you
later remove your finger from
the shutter-release button.
Shutter-release button
A AE-L/AF-L button
AF-S focus mode: Focus locks
automatically when the in-focus indicator appears, and
remain locked until you remove your finger from the shutterrelease button. Focus can also be locked by pressing the A AEL/AF-L button (see above).
98
3
Recompose the photograph
and shoot.
Focus will remain locked
between shots if you keep the
shutter-release button pressed
halfway (AF-S) or keep the A AE-L/AF-L button pressed, allowing
several photographs in succession to be taken at the same
focus setting.
Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject
while focus lock is in effect. If the subject moves, focus again at the
new distance.
N
A
See Also
See Custom Setting c1 (Shutter-release button AE-L, 0 290) for
information on using the shutter-release button to lock exposure,
Custom Setting f6 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 315) for information
on choosing the role played by A AE-L/AF-L button.
99
A
Getting Good Results with Autofocus
Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below.
The shutter release may be disabled if the camera is unable to focus
under these conditions, or the in-focus indicator (●) may be displayed
and the camera may sound a beep, allowing the shutter to be released
even when the subject is not in focus. In these cases, use manual focus
(0 101) or use focus lock (0 98) to focus on another subject at the
same distance and then recompose the photograph.
There is little or no contrast between the subject and
the background.
Example: Subject is the same color as the
background.
The focus point contains objects at different distances
from the camera.
Example: Subject is inside a cage.
N
The subject is dominated by regular geometric
patterns.
Example: Blinds or a row of windows in a skyscraper.
The focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting
brightness.
Example: Subject is half in the shade.
Background objects appear larger than the subject.
Example: A building is in the frame behind the
subject.
The subject contains many fine details.
Example: A field of flowers or other subjects that are
small or lack variation in brightness.
100
Manual Focus
Manual focus is available for lenses that do not support autofocus
(non-AF NIKKOR lenses) or when the autofocus does not produce
the desired results (0 100).
• AF-S lenses: Set the lens focus mode switch to M.
• AF lenses: Set the lens focus mode switch (if
present) and camera focus-mode selector to
M.
D
AF Lenses
Do not use AF lenses with the lens
focus mode switch set to M and
the camera focus-mode selector
set to AF. Failure to observe this
precaution could damage the
camera or lens.
Focus-mode
selector
• Manual focus lenses: Set the camera focus-mode selector to M.
To focus manually, adjust the lens focus ring
until the image displayed on the clear matte
field in the viewfinder is in focus.
Photographs can be taken at any time, even
when the image is not in focus.
N
101
The Electronic Rangefinder
If the lens has a maximum aperture of f/5.6
or faster, the viewfinder focus indicator can
be used to confirm whether the subject in
the selected focus point is in focus (the
focus point can be selected from any of the
51 focus points). After positioning the
subject in the selected focus point, press
the shutter-release button halfway and
rotate the lens focus ring until the in-focus
indicator (I) is displayed. Note that with
the subjects listed on page 100, the infocus indicator may sometimes be
displayed when the subject is not in focus;
confirm focus in the viewfinder before
shooting.
N
A
Focal Plane Position
To determine the distance between
your subject and the camera, measure
from the focal plane mark (E) on the
camera body (0 2). The distance
between the lens mounting flange and
the focal plane is 46.5 mm (1.83 in.).
46.5 mm
Focal plane mark
102
kRelease Mode
Choosing a Release Mode
To choose a release mode, press the release
mode dial lock release and turn the release
mode dial to the desired setting.
Mode
Description
S
Camera takes one photograph each time shutter-release
Single frame button is pressed.
While shutter-release button is held down, camera takes
photographs at frame rate selected for Custom Setting d2
CL
Continuous (CL mode shooting speed, 0 293). Lower built-in flash
low speed (0 182); continuous release is not available while flash is
raised.
While shutter-release button is held down, camera records
CH
photographs at frame rate given on page 104. Use for
Continuous
moving subjects. Lower built-in flash (0 182); continuous
high speed
release is not available while flash is raised.
As for single frame except that noise is reduced by
disabling beeps and minimizing sound produced when
mirror drops back into place. Beep does not sound when
J
camera focuses regardless of setting selected for Custom
Quiet
Setting d1 (Beep; 0 292) and mirror does not drop back
shutterinto place until shutter-release button is returned to
release
halfway position after shooting, allowing you to delay
noise made by mirror. Mirror is quieter than in single-frame
mode.
E
Use self-timer for self-portraits or to reduce blurring caused
Self-timer by camera shake (0 106).
k
103
Mode
MUP
Mirror up
Description
Choose this mode to minimize camera shake in telephoto
or close-up photography or in other situations in which the
slightest camera movement can result in blurred
photographs (0 108).
Power Source and Frame Rate
The maximum frame advance rate varies with the power source
used. The figures below are the average maximum frame rates
available with continuous-servo AF, manual or shutter-priority
auto exposure, a shutter speed of 1/250 s or faster, settings other
than Custom Setting d2 at default values, and memory remaining
in the memory buffer.
k
Power source
Battery (EN-EL15)
EH-5b AC adapter and EP-5B power connector 2
MB-D12 battery pack with EN-EL15 battery
MB-D12 battery pack with EN-EL18 battery 2
MB-D12 battery pack with AA-size batteries 2, 3
Maximum frame rate 1
5 fps
6 fps
5 fps
6 fps
6 fps
1 Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d2 (CL mode
shooting speed), the maximum frame rate when FX (36×24) 1.0× or 5 : 4
(30×24) is selected for image area (0 79) is 4 fps.
2 The maximum frame advance rate for CH is 5 fps when 1.2× (30×20) 1.2× is
selected for image area.
3 Frame rates may drop at low temperatures or when the battery is low.
Frame rate drops at slow shutter speeds or when vibration
reduction (available with VR lenses) or auto ISO sensitivity control
is on (0 111), or when the battery is low.
104
A
Buffer Size
The approximate number of images that can
be stored in the memory buffer at current
settings is shown in the exposure-count
displays in the viewfinder and control panel
while the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway. The illustration at right shows the
display when space remains in the buffer for
about 37 pictures.
A
The Memory Buffer
The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage,
allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to
the memory card. Up to 100 photographs can be taken in succession;
note, however, that frame rate will drop when the buffer is full (t00).
While photographs are being recorded to the memory card, the access
lamp will light. Depending on shooting conditions and memory card
performance, recording may take from a few seconds to a few minutes.
Do not remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source
until the access lamp has gone out. If the camera is switched off while
data remain in the buffer, the power will not turn off until all images in
the buffer have been recorded. If the battery is exhausted while images
remain in the buffer, the shutter release will be disabled and the images
transferred to the memory card.
k
A
See Also
For information on choosing the maximum number of photographs
that can be taken in a single burst, see Custom Setting d3 (Max.
continuous release, 0 293). For information on the number of
pictures that can be taken in a single burst, see page 436.
105
Self-Timer Mode
The self-timer can be used to reduce camera shake or for selfportraits.
1
Mount the camera on a tripod.
Mount the camera on a tripod or place the camera on a stable,
level surface.
2
Select self-timer mode.
Press the release mode dial
lock release and turn the
release mode dial to E.
Release mode
dial
k
3
Frame the photograph and focus.
In single-servo autofocus (0 91),
photographs can only be taken if the
in-focus (I) indicator appears in the viewfinder.
A
Close the Viewfinder Eyepiece Shutter
When taking photos without your eye to
the viewfinder, close the viewfinder
eyepiece shutter to prevent light entering
via the viewfinder from appearing in
photographs or interfering with exposure.
106
4
Start the timer.
Press the shutter-release
button all the way down to
start the timer. The self-timer
lamp will start to blink. Two seconds before the photograph is
taken, the self-timer lamp will stop blinking. The shutter will
be released about ten seconds after the timer starts.
To turn the self-timer off before a photograph is taken, turn the
release mode dial to another setting.
A
A
Time (bulb) exposures can not be recorded using the self-timer. A fixed
shutter speed will be used if a speed of A is selected in exposure
mode h.
k
A
Using the Built-in Flash
Before taking a photograph with the flash, press the flash pop-up
button to raise the flash and wait for the M indicator to be displayed in
the viewfinder (0 181). Shooting will be interrupted if the flash is raised
after the self-timer has started. Note that only one photograph will be
taken when the flash fires, regardless of the number of exposures
selected for Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer; 0 291).
A
See Also
For information on choosing the duration of the self-timer, the number
of shots taken, and the interval between shots, see Custom Setting c3
(Self-timer, 0 291). For information on setting a beep to sound during
the timer count-down, see Custom Setting d1 (Beep, 0 292).
107
Mirror up Mode
Choose this mode to minimize blurring caused by camera
movement when the mirror is raised. Use of a tripod is
recommended.
1
Select mirror up mode.
Press the release mode dial
lock release and turn the
release mode dial to MUP.
Release mode dial
2
Raise the mirror.
Frame the picture, focus, and then press
the shutter-release button the rest of the
way down to raise the mirror.
k
D
Mirror Up
While the mirror is raised, photos can not be framed in the
viewfinder and autofocus and metering will not be performed.
3
Take a picture.
Press the shutter-release button all the
way down again to take a picture. To
prevent blurring caused by camera
movement, press the shutter-release button smoothly, or use
an optional remote cord (0 390). The mirror lowers when
shooting ends.
A
Mirror up Mode
A picture will be taken automatically if no operations are performed for
about 30 s after the mirror is raised.
108
SISO Sensitivity
Manual Adjustment
“ISO sensitivity” is the digital equivalent of film speed. Choose
from settings that range from ISO 100 to ISO 6400 in steps
equivalent to 1/3 EV. Settings of from about 0.3 to 1 EV below ISO
100 and 0.3 to 2 EV above ISO 6400 are also available for special
situations. The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to
make an exposure, allowing higher shutter speeds or smaller
apertures.
ISO sensitivity can be adjusted by
pressing the S button and
rotating the main command dial
until the desired setting is
displayed in the control panel or
viewfinder.
Control panel
S button
Main command
dial
S
Viewfinder
109
A
The ISO Sensitivity Menu
ISO sensitivity can also be adjusted using the ISO
sensitivity option in the shooting menu
(0 268).
Note that ISO sensitivity can not be adjusted from the shooting menu in
movie live view. In exposure mode h, ISO sensitivity can however be
adjusted using the S button and main command dial (0 109).
A
Hi 0.3–Hi 2
The settings Hi 0.3 through Hi 2 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0.3–2 EV
over ISO 6400 (ISO 8000–25600 equivalent). Pictures taken at these
settings are more likely to be subject to noise (randomly-spaced bright
pixels, fog, or lines).
A
Lo 0.3–Lo 1
The settings Lo 0.3 through Lo 1 correspond to ISO sensitivities
0.3–1 EV below ISO 100 (ISO 80–50 equivalent). Use for larger apertures
when lighting is bright. Contrast is slightly higher than normal; in most
cases, ISO sensitivities of ISO 100 or above are recommended.
A
S
110
See Also
For information on Custom Setting b1 (ISO sensitivity step value), see
page 287. For information on displaying ISO sensitivity in the control
panel or adjusting ISO sensitivity without using the S button, see
Custom Setting d7 (ISO display and adjustment; 0 295). For
information on using the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to
reduce noise at high ISO sensitivities, see page 277.
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO
sensitivity control in the shooting menu, ISO sensitivity will
automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be achieved
at the value selected by the user (ISO sensitivity is adjusted
appropriately when the flash is used).
1
Select Auto ISO
sensitivity control for
ISO sensitivity settings
in the shooting menu.
To display the menus, press G button
the G button. Select ISO
sensitivity settings in the shooting menu, highlight Auto ISO
sensitivity control, and press 2.
2
Select On.
Highlight On and press J
(if Off is selected, ISO
sensitivity will remain fixed
at the value selected by the
J button
user).
S
A
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) is more likely at
higher sensitivities. Use the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu
to reduce noise (see page 277). When a flash is used, the value selected
for Minimum shutter speed is ignored in favor of the option selected
for Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed, 0 299). Note that ISO
sensitivity may be raised automatically when auto ISO sensitivity
control is used in combination with slow sync flash modes (available
with the built-in flash and the optional flash units listed on page 381),
possibly preventing the camera from selecting slow shutter speeds.
111
3
S
Adjust settings.
The maximum value for auto
ISO sensitivity can be selected
using Maximum sensitivity
(the minimum value for auto
ISO sensitivity is automatically set to ISO 100; note that if the
value selected for Maximum sensitivity is lower than the
value currently selected for ISO sensitivity, the value selected
for Maximum sensitivity will be used). In exposure modes e
and g, sensitivity will only be adjusted if underexposure would
result at the shutter speed selected for Minimum shutter
speed (1/4000–1 s, or Auto; in modes f and h, ISO sensitivity
will be adjusted for optimal exposure at the shutter speed
selected by the user). If Auto (available only with CPU lenses;
equivalent to 1/30 s when a non-CPU lens is used) is selected,
the camera will choose the minimum shutter speed based on
the focal length of the lens (auto shutter-speed selection can
be fine-tuned by highlighting Auto and pressing 2; for
example, faster values can be used with telephoto lenses to
reduce blur). Shutter speeds slower than the minimum value
may be used if optimum exposure can not be achieved at the
ISO sensitivity value selected for Maximum sensitivity. Press
J to exit when settings are complete.
When On is selected, the viewfinder and
control panel show ISO-AUTO. When
sensitivity is altered from the value
selected by the user, these indicators blink
and the altered value is shown in the
viewfinder.
112
A
Turning Auto ISO Sensitivity Control on or Off
You can turn auto ISO sensitivity control on or
off by pressing the S button and rotating the
sub-command dial. ISO-AUTO is displayed when
auto ISO sensitivity control is on.
S
113
S
114
VExposure
Metering
Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. The
following options are available:
Option
L
M
N
Description
Matrix: Produces natural results in most situations. Camera meters
a wide area of the frame and set exposure according to tone
distribution, color, composition, and, with type G or D lenses
(0 373), distance information (3D color matrix metering III; with
other CPU lenses, camera uses color matrix metering III, which
does not include 3D distance information). With non-CPU lenses,
camera uses color matrix metering if focal length and maximum
aperture are specified using Non-CPU lens data option in setup
menu (0 213); otherwise camera uses center-weighted metering.
Center-weighted: Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest
weight to center area (if CPU lens is attached, size of area can be
selected using Custom Setting b5, Center-weighted area, 0 289;
if non-CPU lens is attached, area is 12 mm in diameter). Classic
meter for portraits; recommended when using filters with an
exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×. *
Spot: Camera meters circle 4 mm (0.16 in.) in diameter
(approximately 1.5% of frame). Circle is centered on current focus
point, making it possible to meter off-center subjects (if non-CPU
lens is used or if auto-area AF is in effect, camera will meter center
focus point). Ensures that subject will be correctly exposed, even
when background is much brighter or darker. *
Z
* For improved precision with non-CPU lenses, specify lens focal length and
maximum aperture in Non-CPU lens data menu (0 213).
115
To choose a metering method,
rotate the metering selector until
the desired setting is displayed in
the viewfinder.
Metering selector
Viewfinder
Z
A
See Also
For information on making separate adjustments to optimal exposure
for each metering method, see Custom Setting b6 (Fine-tune optimal
exposure, 0 290).
116
Exposure Mode
To determine how the
I (Q) button
camera sets shutter
speed and aperture
when adjusting
exposure, press the I
(Q) button and rotate
the main command dial
until the desired option Main command dial
appears in the control
panel.
A
Lens Types
When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring (0 373), lock
the aperture ring at the minimum aperture (highest f-number). Type G
lenses are not equipped with an aperture ring.
Non-CPU lenses can only be used in exposure mode g (aperture-priority
auto) and h (manual). In other modes, exposure mode g is
automatically selected when a non-CPU lens is attached (0 371, 374).
The exposure mode indicator (e or f ) will blink in the control panel and
A will be displayed in the viewfinder.
A
Depth-of-Field Preview
To preview the effects of aperture, press and
hold the depth-of-field preview button. The lens
will be stopped down to the aperture value
selected by the camera (modes e and f ) or the
value chosen by the user (modes g and h),
allowing depth of field to be previewed in the
viewfinder.
A
Z
Depth-of-field
preview button
Custom Setting e4—Modeling Flash
This setting controls whether the built-in flash and optional flash units
such as the SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, and SB-600 (0 381) will
emit a modeling flash when the depth-of-field preview button is
pressed. See page 307 for more information.
117
e: Programmed Auto
In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and
aperture according to a built-in program to ensure optimal
exposure in most situations. This mode is recommended for
snapshots and other situations in which you want to leave the
camera in charge of shutter speed and aperture.
A
Z
Flexible Program
In exposure mode e, different combinations of
shutter speed and aperture can be selected by
rotating the main command dial while the
exposure meters are on (“flexible program”).
Rotate the dial to the right for large apertures
(small f-numbers) that blur background details
or fast shutter speeds that “freeze” motion.
Main command dial
Rotate the dial to the left for small apertures
(large f-numbers) that increase depth of field or
slow shutter speeds that blur motion. All
combinations produce the same exposure.
While flexible program is in effect, an asterisk
(“U”) appears in the control panel. To restore
default shutter speed and aperture settings, rotate the dial until the
asterisk is no longer displayed, choose another mode, or turn the
camera off.
A
See Also
See page 411 for information on the built-in exposure program. For
information on activating the exposure meters, see “Auto Meter Off” on
page 42.
118
f: Shutter-Priority Auto
In shutter-priority auto, you choose the shutter speed while the
camera automatically selects the aperture that will produce the
optimal exposure. Use slow shutter speeds to suggest motion by
blurring moving objects, fast shutter speeds to “freeze” motion.
Fast shutter speed (1/1,600 s)
Slow shutter speed (1/6 s)
To choose a shutter
speed, rotate the main
command dial while
the exposure meters
are on. Shutter speed
can be set to “p” or
Main command dial
to values between 30 s
and 1/8,000 s. Shutter speed can be locked at the selected setting
(0 126).
Z
119
g: Aperture-Priority Auto
In aperture-priority auto, you choose the aperture while the camera
automatically selects the shutter speed that will produce the
optimal exposure. Large apertures (low f-numbers) increase flash
range (0 187) and reduce depth of field, blurring objects behind
and in front of the main subject. Small apertures (high f-numbers)
increase depth of field, bringing out details in the background and
foreground. Short field depths are generally used in portraits to
blur background details, long field depths in landscape
photographs to bring the foreground and background into focus.
Small aperture (f/36)
Z
120
Large aperture (f/2.8)
To choose an aperture
between the minimum
and maximum values
for the lens, rotate the
sub-command dial
while the exposure
Sub-command dial
meters are on. Aperture
can be locked at the selected setting (0 126).
A
Non-CPU Lenses (0 371, 374)
Use the lens aperture ring to adjust aperture.
If the maximum aperture of the lens has been
specified using the Non-CPU lens data item
in setup menu (0 213) when a non-CPU lens is
attached, the current f-number will be
displayed in the viewfinder and control panel,
rounded to the nearest full stop. Otherwise
the aperture displays will show only the
number of stops (F, with maximum aperture displayed as FA) and the
f-number must be read from the lens aperture ring.
Z
121
h: Manual
In manual exposure mode, you control both shutter speed and
aperture. While the exposure meters are on, rotate the main
command dial to choose a shutter speed, and the sub-command
dial to set aperture. Shutter speed can be set to “p” or to
values between 30 s and 1/8,000 s, or the shutter can be held open
indefinitely for a long time-exposure (A, 0 124). Aperture
can be set to values between the minimum and maximum values
for the lens. Use the exposure indicators to check exposure.
Sub-command dial
Aperture
Shutter
speed
Z
Main command dial
Shutter speed and aperture can be locked at the selected
setting (0 126).
122
A
AF Micro NIKKOR Lenses
Provided that an external exposure meter is used, the exposure ratio need
only be taken into account when the lens aperture ring is used to set
aperture.
A
Exposure Indicators
The exposure indicators in the viewfinder and control panel show
whether the photograph would be under- or over-exposed at current
settings. Depending on the option chosen for Custom Setting b2 (EV
steps for exposure cntrl, 0 287), the amount of under- or overexposure is shown in increments of 1/3 EV, 1/2 EV, or 1 EV. If the limits of
the exposure metering system are exceeded, the exposure indicators
and the shutter speed (modes e and g) and/or aperture (modes e and
f ) displays will flash.
Optimal exposure
Custom Setting b2 set to 1/3 step
Underexposed by 1/3 EV Overexposed by over 3 EV
Control panel
Viewfinder
A
See Also
For information reversing the exposure indicators so that negative
values are displayed on the right and positive values on the left, see
Custom Setting f12 (Reverse indicators, 0 319).
Z
123
Long Time-Exposures
At a shutter speed of A, the shutter will remain open while the
shutter-release button is held down. Use for long time-exposure
photographs of moving lights, the stars, night scenery, or
fireworks. A tripod and optional remote cord (0 390) are
recommended to prevent blur.
Shutter speed: 35 s; aperture: f/25
1
Ready the camera.
Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level
surface. If you are using an optional remote cord, attach it to
the camera.
A
Z
124
Long Time-Exposures
Close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter to prevent light entering via
the viewfinder from appearing in the photograph or interfering
with exposure. Nikon recommends using a fully charged EN-EL15
battery or an optional EH-5b AC adapter and EP-5B power
connector to prevent loss of power while the shutter is open. Note
that noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels or fog) may
be present in long exposures; before shooting, choose On for the
Long exposure NR option in the shooting menu (0 277).
2
Select exposure
mode h.
Press the I (Q)
button and rotate
the main command
dial until h is
displayed in the
control panel.
3
I (Q) button
Main command dial
Choose a shutter speed.
While the exposure meters are on, rotate
the main command dial until “A”
appears in the shutter-speed displays.
The exposure indicators do not appear
when “A“ is selected.
4
Press the shutter-release button all the way down.
Press the shutter-release button on the camera or remote cord
all the way down. The shutter will remain open while the
shutter-release button is pressed.
5
Z
Release the shutter-release button.
Remove your finger from the shutter-release button to record
the photograph.
125
Shutter-Speed and Aperture Lock
Shutter speed lock is available in shutter-priority auto and manual
exposure modes, aperture lock in aperture-priority auto and
manual exposure modes. Shutter speed and aperture lock are not
available in programmed auto exposure mode.
1
Assign shutter speed and aperture lock to a camera
control.
Select Shutter spd & aperture lock as the “button +
command dials” option in the Custom Settings menu (0 314).
Shutter speed and aperture lock can be assigned to the Fn
button (Custom Setting f4, Assign Fn button, 0 311), the
depth-of-field preview button (Custom Setting f5, Assign
preview button, 0 315), or the A AE-L/AF-L button (Custom
Setting f6, Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 315).
2
Z
Lock shutter speed and/or aperture.
Shutter speed (exposure modes f and h): Press the selected button
and rotate the main command dial until F icons appear in the
viewfinder and control panel.
Fn button
Main command dial
To unlock shutter speed, press the button and rotate the main
command dial until the F icons disappear from the displays.
126
Aperture (exposure modes g and h): Press the selected button and
rotate the sub-command dial until F icons appear in the
viewfinder and the control panel.
Fn button
Sub-command dial
To unlock aperture, press the button and rotate the subcommand dial until the F icons disappear from the displays.
Z
A
See Also
Use Custom Setting f7 (Shutter spd & aperture lock; 0 316) to keep
shutter speed and/or aperture locked at the selected values.
127
Autoexposure (AE) Lock
Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after using
center-weighted metering and spot metering to meter exposure.
Note that matrix metering will not produce the desired results.
1
Lock exposure.
Position the subject in the selected
focus point and press the shutterrelease button halfway. With the
shutter-release button pressed halfway
and the subject positioned in the focus
point, press the A AE-L/AF-L button to
lock exposure (if you are using
autofocus, confirm that the I in-focus
indicator appears in the viewfinder).
While exposure lock is in effect, an AE-L
indicator will appear in the viewfinder.
Z
2
Recompose the
photograph.
Keeping the A AE-L/AF-L button
pressed, recompose the
photograph and shoot.
128
Shutter-release
button
A AE-L/AF-L button
A
Metered Area
In spot metering, exposure will be locked at the value metered in a
4-mm (0.16 in.) circle centered on the selected focus point. In centerweighted metering, exposure will be locked at the value metered in a
12-mm circle in the center of the viewfinder.
A
Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture
While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be changed
without altering the metered value for exposure:
Exposure mode
e
f
g
Setting
Shutter speed and aperture (flexible program; 0 118)
Shutter speed
Aperture
The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and control panel.
Note that the metering method can not be changed while exposure
lock is in effect (changes to metering take effect when the lock is
released).
A
See Also
If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 (Shutter-release button AE-L,
0 290), exposure will lock when the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway. For information on changing the role of the A AE-L/AF-L button,
see Custom Setting f6 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 315).
Z
129
Exposure Compensation
Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value
suggested by the camera, making pictures brighter or darker. It is
most effective when used with center-weighted or spot metering
(0 115). Choose from values between –5 EV (underexposure) and
+5 EV (overexposure) in increments of 1/3 EV. In general, positive
values make the subject brighter while negative values make it
darker.
–1 EV
No exposure
compensation
+1 EV
To choose a value for exposure compensation, press the E button
and rotate the main command dial until the desired value is
displayed in the viewfinder or control panel.
Z
E button
±0 EV
(E button pressed)
130
Main command
dial
–0.3 EV
+2.0 EV
At values other than ±0.0, the 0 at the
center of the exposure indicators will flash
(exposure modes e, f, and g only) and a E
icon will be displayed in the viewfinder and
control panel after you release the E
button. The current value for exposure
compensation can be confirmed in the
exposure indicator by pressing the E button.
Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure
compensation to ±0.0. Exposure compensation is not reset when
the camera is turned off.
A
Exposure Mode h
In exposure mode h, exposure compensation affects only the exposure
indicator; shutter speed and aperture do not change.
Z
A
Using a Flash
When a flash is used, exposure compensation affects both background
exposure and flash level.
A
See Also
For information on choosing the size of the increments available for
exposure compensation, see Custom Setting b3 (Exp./flash comp. step
value, 0 287). For information on making adjustments to exposure
compensation without pressing the E button, see Custom Setting b4
(Easy exposure compensation, 0 288). For information on
automatically varying exposure, flash level, white balance, or Active
D-Lighting, see page 132.
131
Bracketing
Bracketing automatically varies exposure, flash level, Active
D-Lighting (ADL), or white balance slightly with each shot,
“bracketing” the current value. Choose in situations in which it is
difficult to set exposure, flash level (i-TTL and, where supported,
auto aperture flash control modes only; see pages 185, 301, and
382), Active D-Lighting, or white balance and there is not time to
check results and adjust settings with each shot, or to experiment
with different settings for the same subject.
❚❚ Exposure and Flash Bracketing
To vary exposure and/or flash level over a series of photographs:
Exposure modified by: Exposure modified by: Exposure modified by:
0 EV
–1 EV
+1 EV
Z
132
1
Select flash or exposure
bracketing for Custom
Setting e5 (Auto
bracketing set) in the
Custom Settings menu.
G button
To display the menus, press
the G button. Select
Custom Setting e5 (Auto
bracketing set) in the
Custom Settings menu,
highlight an option, and
J button
press J. Choose AE &
flash to vary both exposure and flash level, AE only to vary
only exposure, or Flash only to vary only flash level.
2
Choose the number of shots.
Pressing the D button, rotate the main command dial to
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. The
number of shots is shown in the control panel.
Number of shots
D button
Main command
dial
Z
Control panel
Exposure and flash
bracketing indicator
At settings other than zero, a M icon
and exposure and flash bracketing
indicators will appear in the control
panel and D will be displayed in the
viewfinder.
133
3
Select an exposure increment.
Pressing the D button, rotate the sub-command dial to
choose the exposure increment.
Exposure increment
D button
Sub-command
dial
Control panel
At default settings, the size of the increment can be chosen
from 1/3, 2/3, and 1 EV. The bracketing programs with an
increment of 1/3 EV are listed below.
Control panel display
Z
No. of shots
0
3
3
2
2
3
5
7
9
A
Bracketing order (EVs)
0
0/+0.3/+0.7
0/–0.7/–0.3
0/+0.3
0/–0.3
0/–0.3/+0.3
0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/+0.7
0/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/
+0.7/+1.0
0/–1.3/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/
+0.3/+0.7/+1.0/+1.3
See Also
For information on choosing the size of the exposure increment, see
Custom Setting b2 (EV steps for exposure cntrl, 0 287). For
information on choosing the order in which bracketing is performed,
see Custom Setting e7 (Bracketing order, 0 308). For information on
choosing the role of the D button, see Custom Setting f8 (Assign BKT
button, 0 316).
134
4
Frame a photograph, focus, and
shoot.
The camera will vary exposure and/or flash level shot-by-shot
according to the bracketing program selected. Modifications
to exposure are added to those made with exposure
compensation (see page 130), making it possible to achieve
exposure compensation values of more than 5 EV.
While bracketing is in effect, a bracketing progress indicator
will be displayed in the control panel. A segment will
disappear from the indicator after each shot.
No. shots: 3; increment: 0.7
Display after first shot
Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing
sequence is zero ( ) and M is no longer displayed. The program
last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated.
Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two-button reset
(0 193), although in this case the bracketing program will not be
restored the next time bracketing is activated.
Z
135
A
Exposure and Flash Bracketing
In continuous low speed and continuous high speed modes, shooting
will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing
program have been taken. Shooting will resume the next time the
shutter-release button is pressed. In self-timer mode, the camera will
take the number of shots selected in Step 2 on page 133 each time the
shutter-release button is pressed, regardless of the option selected for
Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Number of shots (0 291); the interval
between shots is however controlled by Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer)
> Interval between shots. In other modes, one shot will be taken each
time the shutter-release button is pressed.
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been
taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence
after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to
make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before all
shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the
next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.
A
Z
136
Exposure Bracketing
The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture
(programmed auto), aperture (shutter-priority auto), or shutter speed
(aperture-priority auto, manual exposure mode). If On is selected for
ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO sensitivity control (0 111) in
modes e, f, and g, the camera will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for
optimum exposure when the limits of the camera exposure system are
exceeded. Custom Setting e6 (Auto bracketing (mode M), 0 308) can
be used to change how the camera performs exposure and flash
bracketing in manual exposure mode. Bracketing can be performed by
varying flash level together with shutter speed and/or aperture, or by
varying flash level alone.
White Balance Bracketing
The camera creates multiple copies of each photograph, each with
a different white balance. For more information on white balance,
see page 145.
1
Select white balance bracketing.
Choose WB bracketing for Custom
Setting e5 Auto bracketing set.
2
Choose the number of shots.
Pressing the D button, rotate the main command dial to
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. The
number of shots is shown in the control panel.
Number of shots
D button
Main command
dial
Control panel
Z
WB bracketing
indicator
At settings other than zero, a W icon
and WB bracketing indicator will appear
in the control panel and D will be
displayed in the viewfinder.
137
3
Select a white balance increment.
Pressing the D button, rotate the sub-command dial to
choose the white balance adjustment. Each increment is
roughly equivalent to 5 mired.
White balance
increment
D button
Sub-command
dial
Control panel
Choose from increments of 1 (5 mired), 2 (10 mired), or 3
(15 mired). Higher B values correspond to increased amounts
of blue, higher A values to increased amounts of amber
(0 149). The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are
listed below.
Control panel display
Z
A
No. of White balance
Bracketing order
shots increment
0
1
0
3
1B
1B/0/2B
3
1A
1A/2A/0
2
1B
0/1B
2
1A
0/1A
3
1 A, 1 B
0/1A/1B
5
1 A, 1 B
0/2A/1A/1B/2B
0/3A/2A/1A/
7
1 A, 1 B
1B/2B/3B
0/4 A/3 A/2 A/1 A/
9
1 A, 1 B
1B/2B/3B/4B
See Also
See page 150 for a definition of “mired.”
138
4
Frame a photograph, focus, and
shoot.
Each shot will be processed to create the number of copies
specified in the bracketing program, and each copy will have a
different white balance. Modifications to white balance are
added to the white balance adjustment made with white
balance fine-tuning.
If the number of shots in the
bracketing program is greater than
the number of exposures remaining,
n and the icon for the affected
card will flash in the control panel, a
flashing j icon will appear in the
viewfinder as shown at right, and the
shutter release will be disabled.
Shooting can begin when a new memory card is inserted.
Z
139
Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing
sequence is zero (r) and W is no longer displayed. The
program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is
activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a twobutton reset (0 193), although in this case the bracketing
program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated.
Z
A
White Balance Bracketing
White balance bracketing is not available at an image quality of NEF
(RAW). Selecting NEF (RAW), NEF (RAW)+JPEG fine, NEF (RAW)+JPEG
normal, or NEF (RAW)+JPEG basic cancels white balance bracketing.
White balance bracketing affects only color temperature (the amberblue axis in the white balance fine-tuning display, 0 149). No
adjustments are made on the green-magenta axis.
In self-timer mode, the number of copies specified in the white-balance
program will be created each time the shutter is released, regardless of
the option selected for Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Number of
shots (0 291).
If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit, the
camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have
been recorded.
140
ADL Bracketing
The camera varies Active D-Lighting over a series of exposures.
For more information on Active D-Lighting, see page 174.
1
Select ADL bracketing.
Choose ADL bracketing for Custom
Setting e5 Auto bracketing set.
2
Choose the number of shots.
Pressing the D button, rotate the main command dial to
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. The
number of shots is shown in the control panel.
Number of shots
D button
Main command
dial
Control panel
ADL bracketing
indicator
Z
At settings other than zero, a d icon
and an ADL bracketing indicator will
appear in the control panel and D will
be displayed in the viewfinder. Choose two shots to take one
photograph with Active D-Lighting off and another at a
selected value. Choose three to five shots to take a series of
photographs with Active D-Lighting set to Off, Low, and
Normal (three shots), Off, Low, Normal, and High (four shots),
or Off, Low, Normal, High, and Extra high (five shots). If you
choose more than two shots, proceed to Step 4.
141
3
Select Active D-Lighting.
Pressing the D button, rotate the sub-command dial to
choose Active D-Lighting.
D button
Sub-command
dial
Active D-Lighting is shown in the control panel.
Control panel display
Active D-Lighting
Y
Auto
R
Low
Q
Normal
P
High
Z
Extra high
Z
142
4
Frame a photograph, focus, and
shoot.
The camera will vary Active D-Lighting shot-by-shot according
to the bracketing program selected. While bracketing is in
effect, a bracketing progress indicator will be displayed in the
control panel. A segment will disappear from the indicator
after each shot.
Z
143
Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing
sequence is zero (r) and d is no longer displayed. The
program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is
activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a twobutton reset (0 193), although in this case the bracketing
program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated.
A
Z
ADL Bracketing
In continuous low speed and continuous high speed modes, shooting
will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing
program have been taken. Shooting will resume the next time the
shutter-release button is pressed. In self-timer mode, the camera will
take the number of shots selected in Step 2 on page 141 each time the
shutter-release button is pressed, regardless of the option selected for
Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Number of shots (0 291); the interval
between shots is however controlled by Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer)
> Interval between shots. In other modes, one shot will be taken each
time the shutter-release button is pressed.
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been
taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence
after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to
make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before all
shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the
next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.
144
rWhite Balance
White Balance Options
White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of
the light source. Auto white balance is recommended with most
light sources. If the desired results can not be achieved with auto
white balance, choose an option from the list below or use preset
white balance.
Option
Color temp. *
v Auto
Normal
3,500–
Keep warm lighting 8,000 K
colors
J Incandescent
3,000 K
I Fluorescent
Sodium-vapor lamps
H
N
G
M
Warm-white
fluorescent
White fluorescent
Cool-white
fluorescent
Day white
fluorescent
Daylight fluorescent
High temp.
mercury-vapor
Direct sunlight
Flash
Cloudy
Shade
2,700 K
Description
White balance is adjusted
automatically. For best results, use type
G or D lens. If built-in or optional flash
fires, results are adjusted appropriately.
Use under incandescent lighting.
Use with:
• Sodium-vapor lighting (found in
sports venues).
3,000 K
• Warm-white fluorescent lights.
3,700 K
• White fluorescent lights.
4,200 K
• Cool-white fluorescent lights.
5,000 K
• Daylight white fluorescent lights.
6,500 K
• Daylight fluorescent lights.
• High color temperature light sources
(e.g. mercury-vapor lamps).
Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight.
Use with built-in or optional flash units.
Use in daylight under overcast skies.
Use in daylight with subjects in the shade.
7,200 K
5,200 K
5,400 K
6,000 K
8,000 K
r
145
Option
K Choose color temp.
L Preset manual
Color temp. *
Description
2,500– Choose color temperature from list of
10,000 K values (0 152).
Use subject, light source, or existing
—
photograph as reference for white
balance (0 154).
* All values are approximate and do not reflect fine-tuning (if applicable).
White balance can be selected by pressing the U button and
rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is
displayed in the control panel.
U button
Main command dial
Control panel
A
r
The Shooting Menu
White balance can also be adjusted using the
White balance option in the shooting menu
(0 268), which also can be used to fine-tune
white balance (0 148) or measure a value for
preset white balance (0 154). The Auto option
in the White balance menu offers a choice of
Normal and Keep warm lighting colors, which
preserves the warm colors produced by incandescent lighting, while
the I Fluorescent option can be used to select the light source from
the bulb types.
A
Studio Flash Lighting
Auto white balance may not produce the desired results with large
studio flash units. Use preset white balance or set white balance to
Flash and use fine-tuning to adjust white balance.
146
A
See Also
When WB bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e5 (Auto
bracketing set, 0 307), the camera will create several images each
time the shutter is released. White balance will be varied with each
image, “bracketing” the value currently selected for white balance. See
page 137 for more information.
A
Color Temperature
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other
conditions. Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a
light source, defined with reference to the temperature to which an
object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same
wavelengths. While light sources with a color temperature in the
neighborhood of 5,000–5,500 K appear white, light sources with a lower
color temperature, such as incandescent light bulbs, appear slightly
yellow or red. Light sources with a higher color temperature appear
tinged with blue. The camera white balance options are adapted to the
following color temperatures:
• I (sodium-vapor lamps): 2,700 K
• J (incandescent)/
I (warm-white fluorescent):
3,000 K
• I (white fluorescent): 3,700 K
• I (cool-white fluorescent):
4,200 K
• I (day white fluorescent):
5,000 K
H (direct sunlight): 5,200 K
N (flash): 5,400 K
G (cloudy): 6,000 K
I (daylight fluorescent): 6,500 K
I (high temp. mercury-vapor):
7,200 K
• M (shade): 8,000 K
•
•
•
•
•
r
147
Fine-Tuning White Balance
White balance can be “fine-tuned” to compensate for variations in
the color of the light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast
into an image. White balance is fine-tuned using the White
balance option in the shooting menu or by pressing the U
button and rotating the sub-command dial.
The White Balance Menu
1
Select a white balance
option in the shooting
menu.
To display the menus, press
the G button. Select
G button
White balance in the
shooting menu, then highlight a white balance option and
press 2. If an option other than Auto, Fluorescent, Choose
color temp., or Preset manual is selected, proceed to Step 2.
If Auto or Fluorescent is selected, highlight a lighting type
and press 2. For information on fine-tuning preset white
balance, see page 159.
r
148
2
Fine-tune white balance.
Use the multi selector to finetune white balance. White
balance can be fine-tuned on
the amber (A)–blue (B) axis and
the green (G)–magenta (M)
Coordinates Adjustment
axis. The horizontal (amberblue) axis corresponds to color temperature, with each
increment equivalent to about 5 mired. The vertical (greenmagenta) axis has the similar effects to the corresponding
color compensation (CC) filters.
Green (G)
Increase green
Blue (B)
Increase magenta
Amber (A)
Magenta (M)
Increase blue
3
Increase amber
r
Press J.
Press J to save settings and return to
the shooting menu. If white balance
has been fine-tuned, an asterisk (“U”)
will be displayed in the control panel.
J button
149
A
White Balance Fine-Tuning
The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. For
example, moving the cursor to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as
J (Incandescent) is selected for white balance will make photographs
slightly “colder” but will not actually make them blue.
A
“Mired”
Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in
color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color
temperatures. For example, a change of 1000 K produces a much
greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K. Mired, calculated by
multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 10 6, is a measure of
color temperature that takes such variation into account, and as such is
the unit used in color-temperature compensation filters. E.g.:
• 4000 K–3000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=83 mired
• 7000 K–6000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=24 mired
r
150
The U Button
At settings other than K (Choose color temp.) and L (Preset
manual), the U button can be used to fine-tune white balance
on the amber (A)–blue (B) axis (0 149; to fine-tune white balance
when L is selected, use the shooting menu as described on
page 148). Six settings in both directions are available; each
increment is equivalent to about 5 mired (0 150). Press the U
button and rotate the sub-command dial until the desired value is
displayed in the control panel. Rotating the sub-command dial to
the left increases the amount of amber (A). Rotating the subcommand dial to the right increases the amount of blue (B). At
settings other than 0, an asterisk (“U”) appears in the control panel.
U button
Sub-command dial
Control panel
r
151
Choosing a Color Temperature
When K (Choose color temp.) is selected for white balance, color
temperature can be selected using the White balance option in
the shooting menu or by using the U button, multi selector, and
sub-command dial.
The White Balance Menu
Enter values for the amber-blue and green-magenta axes (0 149).
1
Select Choose color
temp.
Press the G button and
select White balance in
the shooting menu.
Highlight Choose color
temp. and press 2.
2
G button
Select a value for amberblue.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits
and press 1 or 3 to change.
r
Value for amber (A)-blue
(B) axis
3
Select a value for greenmagenta.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight the G
(green) or M (magenta) axis
and press 1 or 3 to select a
value.
152
Value for green (G)magenta (M) axis
4
Press J.
Press J to save changes and return to
the shooting menu. If a value other
than 0 is selected for the green (G)–
magenta (M) axis, an asterisk (“U”) will
be displayed in the control panel.
J button
The U Button
The U button can be used to select the color temperature for the
amber (A)–blue (B) axis only. Press the U button and rotate the
sub-command dial until the desired value is displayed in the
control panel (adjustments are made in mireds; 0 150). To enter a
color temperature directly in increments of 10 K., press the U
button and press 4 or 2 to highlight a digit and press 1 or 3 to
change.
r
U button
Sub-command dial
Control panel
D
Choose Color Temperature
Note that the desired results will not be obtained with flash or
fluorescent lighting. Choose N (Flash) or I (Fluorescent) for these
sources. With other light sources, take a test shot to determine if the
selected value is appropriate.
153
Preset Manual
Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance
settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for
light sources with a strong color cast. The camera can store up to
four values for preset white balance in presets d-1 through d-4.
Two methods are available for setting preset white balance:
Method
Direct measurement
Copy from existing
photograph
Description
Neutral gray or white object is placed under
lighting that will be used in final photograph and
white balance is measured by camera (0 155).
White balance is copied from photo on memory
card (0 158).
r
A
White Balance Presets
Changes to white balance presets apply to all shooting menu banks
(0 269). A confirmation dialog will be displayed if the user attempts to
change a white balance preset created in another shooting menu bank.
A
Measuring Preset White Balance
Preset manual white balance can not be measured during live view
(0 45, 59), while you are shooting an HDR photograph (0 176) or
multiple exposure (0 195), or when Record movies is selected for
Custom Setting g4 (Assign shutter button, 0 324).
154
Measuring a Value for White Balance
1
Light a reference object.
Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will
be used in the final photograph. In studio settings, a standard
gray panel can be used as a reference object. Note that
exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when measuring
white balance; in exposure mode h, adjust exposure so that
the exposure indicator shows ±0 (0 123).
2
Set white balance to L (Preset manual).
Press the U button and rotate the main command dial until
L is displayed in the control panel.
U button
3
Main command dial
Control panel
Select a preset.
Press the U button and rotate the sub-command dial until
the desired white balance preset (d-1 to d-4) is displayed in
the control panel.
U button
Sub-command dial
r
Control panel
155
4
Select direct measurement mode.
Release the U button briefly and then
press the button until the L icon in
the control panel starts to flash. A
flashing D will also appear in the
viewfinder. The displays will flash for
about six seconds.
Control panel
Viewfinder
5
Measure white balance.
Before the indicators stop flashing, frame the
reference object so that it fills the viewfinder and
press the shutter-release button all the way down. The camera
will measure a value for white balance and store it in the
preset selected in Step 3. No photograph will be recorded;
white balance can be measured accurately even when the
camera is not in focus.
r
A
Protected Presets
If the current preset is protected (0 161), 3 will flash in the control
panel and viewfinder if you attempt to measure a new value.
156
6
Check the results.
If the camera was able to measure a
value for white balance, C will flash
in the control panel for about six
seconds, while the viewfinder will show
a flashing a.
Control panel
Viewfinder
If lighting is too dark or too bright, the
camera may be unable to measure
white balance. A flashing b a will
appear in the control panel and
viewfinder for about six seconds. Press
the shutter-release button halfway to
return to Step 5 and measure white
balance again.
Control panel
Viewfinder
r
D
Direct Measurement Mode
IIf no operations are performed while the displays are flashing, direct
measurement mode will end in the time selected for Custom Setting c2
(Auto meter-off delay, 0 291).
A
Selecting a Preset
Selecting Preset manual for the White balance
option in the shooting menu displays the dialog
shown at right; highlight a preset and press J.
If no value currently exists for the selected
preset, white balance will be set to 5,200 K, the
same as Direct sunlight.
157
Copying White Balance from a Photograph
Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from an
existing photograph to a selected preset.
1
Select L (Preset
manual) for White
balance in the
shooting menu.
Press the G button and
select White balance in
the shooting menu.
Highlight Preset manual
and press 2.
2
G button
Select a destination.
Highlight the destination
preset (d-1 to d-4) and press
the center of the multi selector.
3
r
158
Choose Select image.
Highlight Select image and
press 2.
4
Highlight a source image.
Highlight the source image. To
view the highlighted image full
frame, press the X button.
To view images in other
locations, press W and select the
desired card and folder (0 221).
5
Copy white balance.
Press J to copy the white balance value
for the highlighted photograph to the
selected preset. If the highlighted
photograph has a comment (0 333), the
comment will be copied to the comment
for the selected preset.
J button
A
Choosing a White Balance Preset
Press 1 to highlight the current white balance
preset (d-1– d-4) and press 2 to select another
preset.
r
A
Fine-Tuning Preset White Balance
The selected preset can be fine-tuned by
selecting Fine-tune and adjusting white
balance as described on page 149.
159
Entering a Comment
Follow the steps below to enter a descriptive comment of up to
thirty-six characters for a selected white balance preset.
1
Select L (Preset manual).
Highlight Preset manual in the
white balance menu (0 158)
and press 2.
2
Select a preset.
Highlight the desired preset
and press the center of the
multi selector.
3
Select Edit comment.
Highlight Edit comment and
press 2.
r
4
Edit the comment.
Edit the comment as described on page
170.
160
Protecting a White Balance Preset
Follow the steps below to protect the selected white balance
preset. Protected presets can not be modified and the Fine-tune
and Edit comment options can not be used.
1
Select L (Preset manual).
Highlight Preset manual in the
white balance menu (0 158)
and press 2.
2
Select a preset.
Highlight the desired preset
and press the center of the
multi selector.
3
Select Protect.
Highlight Protect and press 2.
4
r
Select On.
Highlight On and press
J to protect the
selected white balance
preset. To remove
protection, select Off.
J button
161
r
162
JImage Enhancement
Picture Controls
Nikon’s unique Picture Control system makes it possible to share
image processing settings, including sharpening, contrast,
brightness, saturation, and hue, among compatible devices and
software.
Selecting a Picture Control
The camera offers a choice of preset Picture Controls. Choose a
Picture Control according to the subject or type of scene.
Option
Description
Standard processing for balanced results.
Q Standard
Recommended for most situations.
Minimal processing for natural results. Choose for
R Neutral
photographs that will later be extensively
processed or retouched.
Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect.
S Vivid
Choose for photographs that emphasize primary
colors.
T Monochrome Take monochrome photographs.
Process portraits for skin with natural texture and a
o Portrait
rounded feel.
p Landscape
Produces vibrant landscapes and cityscapes.
1
J
Press L (Z/Q).
A list of Picture Controls
will be displayed.
L (Z/Q) button
163
2
Select a Picture Control.
Highlight the desired
Picture Control and press
J.
J button
A
Preset Picture Controls Versus Custom Picture Controls
The Picture Controls supplied with the camera are referred to as preset
Picture Controls. Custom Picture Controls are created through
modifications to existing Picture Controls using the Manage Picture
Control option in the shooting menu (0 169). Custom Picture Controls
can be saved to a memory card for sharing among other D800 cameras
and compatible software (0 172).
A
The Picture Control Indicator
The current Picture Control is shown in the
information display when the R button is
pressed.
J
Picture Control
indicator
A
The Shooting Menu
Picture Controls can also be selected using
the Set Picture Control option in the
shooting menu (0 268).
164
Modifying Existing Picture Controls
Existing preset or custom Picture Controls
(0 169) can be modified to suit the scene or
the user’s creative intent. Choose a balanced
combination of settings using Quick adjust,
or make manual adjustments to individual
settings.
1
Select a Picture Control.
Highlight the desired Picture
Control in the Picture Control
list (0 163) and press 2.
2
Adjust settings.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the
desired setting and press 4 or
2 to choose a value (0 166).
Repeat this step until all
settings have been adjusted, or
select Quick adjust to choose a preset combination of
settings. Default settings can be restored by pressing the O
(Q) button.
3
Press J.
J
A
Modifications to Original Picture Controls
Picture Controls that have been modified from
default settings are indicated by an asterisk
(“U”) in the Set Picture Control menu.
165
❚❚ Picture Control Settings
Option
Manual adjustments
(all Picture Controls)
Description
Choose from options between –2 and +2 to reduce or
exaggerate the effect of the selected Picture Control
(note that this resets all manual adjustments). For
Quick adjust
example, choosing positive values for Vivid makes
pictures more vivid. Not available with Neutral,
Monochrome, or custom Picture Controls.
Control the sharpness of outlines. Select A to adjust
sharpening automatically according to the type of
Sharpening scene, or choose from values between 0 (no
sharpening) and 9 (the higher the value, the greater the
sharpening).
Select A to adjust contrast automatically according to
the type of scene, or choose from values between –3
and +3 (choose lower values to prevent highlights in
Contrast
portrait subjects from being “washed out” in direct
sunlight, higher values to preserve detail in misty
landscapes and other low-contrast subjects).
Choose –1 for reduced brightness, +1 for enhanced
Brightness
brightness. Does not affect exposure.
Control the vividness of colors. Select A to adjust
saturation automatically according to the type of scene,
Saturation
or choose from values between –3 and +3 (lower values
reduce saturation and higher values increase it).
Choose negative values (to a minimum of –3) to make
reds more purple, blues more green, and greens more
Hue
yellow, positive values (up to +3) to make reds more
orange, greens more blue, and blues more purple.
Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome
Filter
photographs. Choose from OFF, yellow, orange, red,
effects
and green (0 167).
Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs from
B&W (black-and-white), Sepia, Cyanotype (blue-tinted
Toning
monochrome), Red, Yellow, Green, Blue Green, Blue,
Purple Blue, Red Purple (0 168).
Manual adjustments
(non-monochrome only)
J
Manual adjustments
(monochrome only)
166
D
“A” (Auto)
Results for auto sharpening, contrast, and
saturation vary with exposure and the position
of the subject in the frame. Use a type G or D
lens for best results. The icons for Picture
Controls that use auto contrast and saturation
are displayed in green in the Picture Control
grid, and lines appear parallel to the axes of the
grid.
A
The Picture Control Grid
Pressing the W button in Step 2 on page 165
displays a Picture Control grid showing the
contrast and saturation for the selected Picture
Control in relation to the other Picture Controls
(only contrast is displayed when Monochrome
is selected). Release the W button to return to
the Picture Control menu.
A
Previous Settings
The line under the value display in the Picture
Control setting menu indicates the previous
value for the setting. Use this as a reference
when adjusting settings.
A
Filter Effects (Monochrome Only)
The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on
monochrome photographs. The following filter effects are available:
Y
O
R
G
Option
Yellow
Orange
Red
Green
Description
J
Enhances contrast. Can be used to tone down the brightness of
the sky in landscape photographs. Orange produces more
contrast than yellow, red more contrast than orange.
Softens skin tones. Can be used for portraits.
Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more pronounced
than those produced by physical glass filters.
167
A
Toning (Monochrome Only)
Pressing 3 when Toning is selected displays
saturation options. Press 4 or 2 to adjust
saturation. Saturation control is not available
when B&W (black-and-white) is selected.
A
Custom Picture Controls
The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as
those on which the custom Picture Control was based.
J
168
Creating Custom Picture Controls
The preset Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be
modified and saved as custom Picture Controls.
1
Select Manage Picture
Control in the shooting
menu.
To display the menus,
press the G button.
G button
Highlight Manage
Picture Control in the shooting menu and press 2.
2
Select Save/edit.
Highlight Save/edit and press
2.
3
Select a Picture Control.
Highlight an existing Picture
Control and press 2, or press J
to proceed to Step 5 to save a
copy of the highlighted Picture
Control without further
modification.
J
169
4
Edit the selected Picture
Control.
See page 166 for more
information. To abandon any
changes and start over from
default settings, press the O
(Q) button. Press J when settings are complete.
5
Select a destination.
Choose a destination for the
custom Picture Control (C-1
through C-9) and press 2.
6
J
Name the Picture
Control.
Keyboard
area
Name area
The text-entry dialog shown
at right will be displayed. By
default, new Picture
Controls are named by adding a two-digit number (assigned
automatically) to the name of the existing Picture Control; to
use the default name, proceed to Step 7. To move the cursor
in the name area, hold the W button and press 4 or 2. To
enter a new letter at the current cursor position, use the multi
selector to highlight the desired character in the keyboard
area and press the center of the multi selector. To delete the
character at the current cursor position, press the O (Q)
button.
Custom Picture Control names can be up to nineteen
characters long. Any characters after the nineteenth will be
deleted.
170
7
Save changes and exit.
Press J to save changes and exit. The
new Picture Control will appear in the
Picture Control list.
J button
A
Manage Picture Control > Rename
Custom Picture Controls can be renamed at any
time using the Rename option in the Manage
Picture Control menu.
A
Manage Picture Control > Delete
The Delete option in the Manage Picture
Control menu can be used to delete selected
custom Picture Controls when they are no
longer needed.
A
J
The Original Picture Control Icon
The original preset Picture Control on which the
custom Picture Control is based is indicated by
an icon in the top right corner of the edit
display.
Original Picture
Control icon
171
Sharing Custom Picture Controls
Custom Picture Controls created using the Picture Control Utility
available with ViewNX 2 or optional software such as Capture NX 2
can be copied to a memory card and loaded into the camera, or
custom Picture Controls created with the camera can be copied to
the memory card to be used in other D800 cameras and
compatible software and then deleted when no longer needed (if
two memory cards are inserted, the card in the primary slot will be
used; 0 89).
J
172
To copy custom Picture
Controls to or from the
memory card, or to delete
custom Picture Controls from
the memory card, highlight
Load/Save in the Manage
Picture Control menu and press 2. The following options will be
displayed:
• Copy to camera: Copy custom Picture Controls from the memory
card to custom Picture Controls C-1 through C-9 on the camera
and name them as desired.
• Delete from card: Delete
selected custom Picture
Controls from the memory
card. The confirmation
dialog shown at right will be
displayed before a Picture
J button
Control is deleted; to delete
the selected Picture Control, highlight Yes and press J.
• Copy to card: Copy a custom Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) from
the camera to a selected destination (1 through 99) on the
memory card.
A
Saving Custom Picture Controls
Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at
any one time. The memory card can only be used to store user-created
custom Picture Controls. The preset Picture Controls supplied with the
camera (0 163) can not be copied to the memory card, renamed, or
deleted.
J
173
Preserving Detail in Highlights
and Shadows
Active D-Lighting
Active D-Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows,
creating photographs with natural contrast. Use for high contrast
scenes, for example when photographing brightly lit outdoor
scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of shaded
subjects on a sunny day. It is most effective when used with matrix
metering (0 115).
Active D-Lighting off
Active D-Lighting: Y Auto
J
D
“Active D-Lighting” versus “D-Lighting”
The Active D-Lighting option in the shooting menu adjusts exposure
before shooting to optimize the dynamic range, while the D-Lighting
option in the retouch menu optimizes dynamic range in images after
shooting.
174
To use Active D-Lighting:
1
Select Active
D-Lighting in the
shooting menu.
To display the menus, press
the G button. Highlight
G button
Active D-Lighting in the
shooting menu and press
2.
2
Choose an option.
Highlight the desired
option and press J. If
Y Auto is selected, the
camera will automatically
J button
adjust Active D-Lighting
according to shooting
conditions (in exposure mode h, however, Y Auto is
equivalent to Q Normal).
D
Active D-Lighting
Active D-Lighting can not be used with movies. Noise (randomlyspaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may appear in photographs taken
with Active D-Lighting. Uneven shading may be visible with some
subjects. Active D-Lighting can not be used at ISO sensitivities of Hi 0.3
or above.
J
A
See Also
When ADL bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e5 (Auto
bracketing set, 0 307), the camera varies Active D-Lighting over a
series of shots. See page 141 for more information.
175
High Dynamic Range (HDR)
High Dynamic Range (HDR) combines two exposures to form a
single image that captures a wide range of tones from shadows to
highlights, even with high-contrast subjects. HDR is most effective
when used with matrix metering (0 115; with other metering
methods, an exposure differential of Auto is equivalent to about
2 EV). It can not be used to record NEF (RAW) images. Movie
recording (0 59), flash lighting, bracketing (0 132), multiple
exposure (0 195), and time-lapse photography (0 207) can not
be used while HDR is in effect and a shutter speed of A is not
available.
+
First exposure
(darker)
1
J
176
Second exposure
(brighter)
Select HDR (high
dynamic range).
Press the G button to
display the menus.
Highlight HDR (high
dynamic range) in the
shooting menu and
press 2.
G button
Combined HDR
image
2
Select a mode.
Highlight HDR mode and
press 2.
Highlight one of the
following and press J.
• To take a series of HDR
photographs, select 0 On
(series). HDR shooting
J button
will continue until you
select Off for HDR mode.
• To take one HDR photograph, select On (single photo). Normal
shooting will resume automatically after you have created a
single HDR photograph.
• To exit without creating additional HDR photographs, select Off.
If On (series) or On (single photo) is
selected, a y icon will be displayed in
the control panel.
J
177
3
Choose the exposure
differential.
To choose the difference in
exposure between the two
shots, highlight Exposure
differential and press 2.
The options shown at right
will be displayed.
Highlight an option and
press J. Choose higher
values for high-contrast
subjects, but note that
choosing a value higher than required may not produce the
desired results; if Auto is selected, the camera will
automatically adjust exposure to suit the scene.
4
J
Choose the amount of
smoothing.
To choose how much the
boundaries between the
two images are smoothed,
highlight Smoothing and
press 2.
The options shown at right
will be displayed.
Highlight an option and
press J. Higher values
produce a smoother
composite image. Uneven
shading may be visible
with some subjects.
178
5
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
The camera takes two exposures when
the shutter-release button is pressed all
the way down. l y will be displayed
in the control panel and l u in the
viewfinder while the images are
combined; no photographs can be taken
until recording is complete. Regardless of
the option currently selected for release
mode, only one photograph will be taken
each time the shutter-release button is
pressed.
Control panel
Viewfinder
If On (series) is selected, HDR will only turn off when Off is
selected for HDR mode; if On (single photo) is selected, HDR
turns off automatically after the photograph is taken. The y
icon clears from the display when HDR shooting ends.
J
179
D
Framing HDR Photographs
The edges of the image may be cropped out. The desired results may
not be achieved if the camera or subject moves during shooting. Use of
a tripod is recommended. Depending on the scene, shadows may
appear around bright objects or halos may appear around dark objects;
this effect can be reduced by adjusting the amount of smoothing.
A The D Button
If HDR (high dynamic range) is selected for
Custom Setting f8 (Assign BKT button; 0 316),
you can select the HDR mode by pressing the
D button and rotating the main command
dial and the exposure differential by pressing
the D button and rotating the sub-command
dial. The mode and exposure differential are
shown in the control panel: y and F appear
when On (series) is selected and y when On
(single photo) is selected; no icon appears
when HDR is off.
A
Interval Timer Photography
If On (series) is selected for HDR mode before interval timer shooting
begins, the camera will continue to shoot HDR photographs at the
selected interval (if On (single photo) is selected, interval timer
shooting will end after a single shot). Ending HDR photography ends
interval timer shooting.
A
J
180
Shooting Menu Banks
HDR settings can be adjusted separately for each bank (0 269), but
switching to a bank in which HDR is active during multiple exposure
(0 195) or interval timer shooting (0 201) disables HDR. HDR is also
disabled if you switch to a bank in which an NEF (RAW) option is
selected for image quality.
lFlash Photography
Using the Built-in Flash
The built-in flash has a Guide Number (GN) 12/39 (m/ft, ISO 100,
20 °C/68 °F) and provides coverage for the angle of view of 24 mm
lens, or a 16 mm lens in DX format. It can be used not only when
natural lighting is inadequate but to fill in shadows and backlit
subjects or to add a catch light to the subject’s eyes.
1
Choose a metering method
(0 115).
Metering selector
Select matrix or center-weighted
metering to activate i-TTL balanced fillflash for digital SLR. Standard i-TTL flash
for digital SLR is activated automatically
when spot metering is selected.
2
Press the flash pop-up button.
The built-in flash will pop up and begin
charging. When the flash is fully
charged, the flash-ready indicator (c)
will light.
l
Flash pop-up button
181
3
Choose a flash mode.
Press the M (Y) button and
rotate the main command
dial until the desired flash
mode icon is displayed in the
control panel (0 183).
M (Y) button
Main command
dial
Control panel
4
Check exposure (shutter speed and aperture).
Press the shutter-release button halfway and check shutter
speed and aperture. The settings available when the built-in
flash is raised are listed in “Shutter Speeds and Apertures
Available with the Built-in Flash” (0 184).
The effects of the flash can be previewed by pressing the
depth-of-field preview button to emit a modeling flash
(0 307).
5
l
Take the picture.
Compose the photograph, focus, and shoot.
A
Lowering the Built-in Flash
To save power when the flash is not in use, press
it gently downward until the latch clicks into
place.
182
Flash Modes
The D800 supports the following flash modes:
Flash mode
Description
This mode is recommended for most situations. In
programmed auto and aperture-priority auto modes,
shutter speed will automatically be set to values
Front-curtain between 1/250 and 1/60 s (1/8,000 to 1/60 s when an optional
sync
flash unit is used with Auto FP High-Speed Sync; 0 299).
Red-eye reduction lamp lights for approximately one
second before main flash. Pupils in subject’s eyes
contract, reducing “red-eye” effect sometimes caused by
flash. Owing to one-second shutter-release delay, this
mode is not recommended with moving subjects or in
Red-eye
reduction other situations in which quick shutter response is
required. Avoid moving camera while red-eye reduction
lamp is lit.
Combines red-eye reduction with slow sync. Use for
portraits taken against a backdrop of night scenery.
Available only in programmed auto and apertureRed-eye
priority auto exposure modes. Use of a tripod is
reduction with recommended to prevent blurring caused by camera
slow sync
shake.
Flash is combined with shutter speeds as slow as 30 s to
capture both subject and background at night or under
dim light. This mode is only available in programmed
auto and aperture-priority auto exposure modes. Use of
Slow sync tripod is recommended to prevent blurring caused by
camera shake.
In shutter-priority auto or manual exposure
mode, flash fires just before the shutter
closes. Use to create effect of a stream of
light behind moving objects. In programmed
Rear-curtain auto and aperture-priority auto, slow rear-curtain sync is
used to capture both subject and background. Use of
sync
tripod is recommended to prevent blurring caused by
camera shake.
l
183
A
Shutter Speeds and Apertures Available with the Built-in Flash
Mode
e
f
g
h
Shutter speed
Set automatically by camera
(1/250 s–1/60 s) 1, 2
Value selected by user
(1/250 s–30 s) 2
Set automatically by camera
(1/250 s–1/60 s) 1, 2
Value selected by user
(1/250 s–30 s, A) 2
Aperture
Set automatically
by camera
Value selected
by user 3
See page
118
119
120
122
1 Shutter speed may be set as slow as 30s in slow sync, slow rear-curtain
sync, and slow sync with red-eye reduction flash modes.
2 Speeds as fast as 1/8,000 s are available with optional flash units (0 382)
when 1/320 s (Auto FP) or 1/250 s (Auto FP) is selected for Custom
Setting e1 (Flash sync speed, 0 299).
3 Flash range varies with aperture and ISO sensitivity. Consult table of flash
ranges (0 187) when setting aperture in g and h modes.
l
184
A
Flash Control Mode
The camera supports the following i-TTL flash control modes:
• i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR: Flash emits series of nearly invisible
preflashes (monitor preflashes) immediately before main flash.
Preflashes reflected from objects in all areas of frame are picked up by
RGB sensor with approximately 91K (91,000) pixels and are analyzed in
combination with range information from matrix metering system to
adjust flash output for natural balance between main subject and
ambient background lighting. If type G or D lens is used, distance
information is included when calculating flash output. Precision of
calculation can be increased for non-CPU lenses by providing lens
data (focal length and maximum aperture; see 0 212). Not available
when spot metering is used.
• Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR: Flash output adjusted to bring lighting
in frame to standard level; brightness of background is not taken into
account. Recommended for shots in which main subject is
emphasized at expense of background details, or when exposure
compensation is used. Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is activated
automatically when spot metering is selected.
The flash control mode for the built-in flash can be selected using
Custom Setting e3 (Flash cntrl for built-in flash, 0 301). The
information display shows the flash control mode for the built-in flash as
follows:
Flash sync
Auto FP (0 299, 300)
i-TTL
—
Manual
—
Repeating flash
—
l
Commander mode
185
D
The Built-in Flash
Use with lenses with focal lengths of 24–300 mm in FX format (0 375).
Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows. The flash has a minimum
range of 0.6 m (2 ft) and can not be used in the macro range of macro
zoom lenses.
i-TTL flash control is available at ISO sensitivities between 100 and 6400;
at other sensitivities, the desired results may not be achieved at some
ranges or aperture values.
If the flash fires in continuous release mode (0 103), only one
photograph will be taken each time the shutter-release button is
pressed.
The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after it
has been used for several consecutive shots. The flash can be used
again after a short pause.
A
See Also
See page 190 for information on locking flash value (FV) for a metered
subject before recomposing a photograph.
For information on auto FP high-speed sync and choosing a flash sync
speed, see Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed, 0 299). For
information on choosing the slowest shutter speed available when
using the flash, see Custom Setting e2 (Flash shutter speed, 0 300).
For information on flash control and using the built-in flash in
commander mode, see Custom Setting e3 (Flash cntrl for built-in
flash, 0 301).
See page 380 for information on using optional flash units.
l
186
A
Aperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range
The range of the built-in flash varies with sensitivity (ISO equivalency)
and aperture.
100
1.4
2
2.8
4
5.6
8
11
16
Aperture at ISO equivalent of
200
400
800 1600 3200
2
2.8
4
5.6
8
2.8
4
5.6
8
11
4
5.6
8
11
16
5.6
8
11
16
22
8
11
16
22
32
11
16
22
32
—
16
22
32
—
—
22
32
—
—
—
Range
6400
11
16
22
32
—
—
—
—
m
0.7–8.5
0.6–6.0
0.6–4.2
0.6–3.0
0.6–2.1
0.6–1.5
0.6–1.1
0.6–0.8
ft
2ft 4in.–27ft 11in.
2ft 0in.–19ft 8in.
2ft 0in.–13ft 9in.
2ft 0in.– 9ft 10in.
2ft 0in.– 6ft 11in.
2ft 0in.– 4ft 11in.
2ft 0in.– 3ft 7in.
2ft 0in.– 2ft 7in.
The built-in flash has a minimum range of 0.6 m (2 ft).
In exposure mode e, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is
limited according to ISO sensitivity, as shown below:
100
2.8
200
3.5
Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of:
400
800
1600
4
5
5.6
3200
7.1
6400
8
If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the
maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens.
l
187
Flash Compensation
Flash compensation is used to alter flash output by from –3 EV to
+1 EV in increments of 1/3 EV, changing the brightness of the main
subject relative to the background. Flash output can be increased
to make the main subject appear brighter, or reduced to prevent
unwanted highlights or reflections. If flash compensation is
combined with exposure compensation (0 130), the exposure
values will be added together.
To choose a value for flash compensation, press the M (Y) button
and rotate the sub-command dial until the desired value is
displayed in the control panel.
M (Y) button
±0 EV
(M (Y) button
pressed)
l
188
Sub-command dial
–0.3 EV
+1.0 EV
At values other than ±0.0, a Y icon will be displayed in the control
panel and viewfinder after you release the M (Y) button. The
current value for flash compensation can be confirmed by
pressing the M (Y) button.
Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash
compensation to ±0.0. Flash compensation is not reset when the
camera is turned off.
A
Optional Flash Units
The SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, and SB-600 also allow flash
compensation to be set using the controls on the flash unit; the value
selected with the flash unit is added to the value selected with the
camera.
l
A
See Also
For information on choosing the size of the increments available for
flash compensation, see Custom Setting b3 (Exp./flash comp. step
value, 0 287). For information on automatically varying flash level over
a series of shots, see page 132.
189
FV Lock
This feature is used to lock flash output, allowing photographs to
be recomposed without changing the flash level and ensuring that
flash output is appropriate to the subject even when the subject is
not positioned in the center of the frame. Flash output is adjusted
automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and aperture.
To use FV lock:
1
Assign FV lock to the Fn button.
Select FV lock for Custom Setting f4
(Assign Fn button > Fn button press,
0 311).
2
Press the flash pop-up button.
The built-in flash will pop up and begin
charging.
Flash pop-up button
3
l
190
Focus.
Position the subject in the
center of the frame and press
the shutter-release button
halfway to focus.
4
Lock flash level.
After confirming that the flash ready
indicator (M) is displayed in the
viewfinder, press the Fn button. The
flash will emit a monitor preflash to
determine the appropriate flash level.
Flash output will be locked at this level
and FV lock icon (e) will appear in the
viewfinder.
5
Recompose the photograph.
6
Take the photograph.
Fn button
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to
shoot. If desired, additional pictures can be taken without
releasing FV lock.
7
Release FV lock.
Press the Fn button to release FV lock. Confirm that the FV lock
icon (e) is no longer displayed in the viewfinder.
l
191
A
Using FV Lock with the Built-in Flash
FV lock is only available with the built-in flash when TTL is selected for
Custom Setting e3 (Flash cntrl for built-in flash, 0 301).
A
Using FV Lock with Optional Flash Units
FV lock is also available with optional flash units in TTL and (where
supported) monitor pre-flash AA and monitor pre-flash A flash control
modes. Note that when commander mode is selected for Custom
Setting e3 (Flash cntrl for built-in flash, 0 301), you will need to set
the flash control mode for the master or at least one remote group to
TTL or AA.
A
Metering
The metering areas for FV lock when using optional flash unit are as
follows:
Flash unit
Stand-alone flash unit
Used with other flash
units (Advanced
Wireless Lighting)
A
Flash mode
i-TTL
AA
i-TTL
AA
A (master
flash)
Metered area
6-mm circle in center of frame
Area metered by flash exposure
meter
Entire frame
Area metered by flash exposure
meter
See Also
For information on using the depth-of-field preview button or A AE-L/
AF-L button for FV lock, see Custom Setting f5 (Assign preview button,
0 315) or Custom Setting f6 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 315).
l
192
tOther Shooting Options
Two-Button Reset: Restoring
Default Settings
The camera settings listed below
can be restored to default values
by holding the T and E
buttons down together for more
than two seconds (these buttons
are marked by a green dot). The
control panel turns off briefly
while settings are reset.
E button
T button
❚❚ Settings Accessible from the Shooting Menu 1
Option
Image quality
Image size
Default
Option
Default
JPEG normal
Large
Auto >
Normal
A-B: 0, G-M: 0
HDR (high dynamic
Off 3
range)
ISO sensitivity
100
White balance
Auto ISO sensitivity
Off
control
Fine-tuning
Multiple exposure
Off 4
Picture Control
Unmodified
2
Interval timer shooting
Off 5
settings
1 With the exception of multiple exposure and interval timer settings, only
settings in the bank currently selected using the Shooting menu bank option
will be reset (0 269). Settings in the remaining banks are unaffected.
2 Current Picture Control only.
3 Exposure differential and smoothing are not reset.
4 If multiple exposure is currently in progress, shooting will end and multiple
exposure will be created from exposures recorded to that point. Gain and
number of shots are not reset.
5 If interval timer shooting is currently in progress, shooting will end. Starting
time, shooting interval, and number of intervals and shots are not reset.
t
193
Other Settings
Option
Focus point 1
Exposure mode
Flexible program
Exposure
compensation
AE lock hold
Aperture lock
Shutter-speed
lock
Autofocus mode
Default
Center
Programmed
auto
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
AF-S
Option
AF-area mode
Viewfinder
Live view/movie
Bracketing
Flash mode
Flash
compensation
FV lock
Exposure delay
mode 3
+ NEF (RAW)
Default
Single-point
AF
Normal-area
AF
Off 2
Front-curtain
sync
Off
Off
Off
Off
1 Focus point not displayed if auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode.
2 Number of shots is reset to zero. Bracketing increment is reset to 1EV
(exposure/flash bracketing) or 1 (white balance bracketing). Y Auto is
selected for the second shot of two-shot ADL bracketing programs.
3 Only settings in the bank currently selected using the Custom settings
bank option will be reset (0 280). Settings in the remaining banks are
unaffected.
t
A
See Also
See page 405 for a list of default settings.
194
Multiple Exposure
Follow the steps below to record a series of two to ten exposures
in a single photograph. Multiple exposures can make use of RAW
data from the camera image sensor to produce colors noticeably
superior to those in software-generated photographic overlays.
Creating a Multiple Exposure
Multiple exposures can not be recorded in live view. Exit live view
before proceeding. Note that at default settings, shooting will end
and a multiple exposure will be recorded automatically if no
operations are performed for 30 s.
A
Extended Recording Times
For an interval between exposures of more than 30 s, extend the meteroff delay using Custom Setting c2 (Auto meter-off delay, 0 291). The
maximum interval between exposures is 30 s longer than the option
selected for Custom Setting c2. If no operations are performed for 30 s
after the monitor has turned off during playback or menu operations,
shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be created from the
exposures that have been recorded to that point.
1
Select Multiple
exposure in the
shooting menu.
Press the G button to
display the menus.
G button
Highlight Multiple
exposure in the shooting menu and press 2.
t
195
2
Select a mode.
Highlight Multiple
exposure mode and press
2.
Highlight one of the
following and press J:
• To take a series of multiple
exposures, select 0 On
(series). Multiple
exposure shooting will
J button
continue until you select
Off for Multiple exposure mode.
• To take one multiple exposure, select On (single photo). Normal
shooting will resume automatically after you have created a
single multiple exposure.
• To exit without creating additional multiple exposures, select Off.
If On (series) or On (single photo) is
selected, a n icon will be displayed in the
control panel.
t
196
3
Choose the number of
shots.
Highlight Number of
shots and press 2.
Press 1 or 3 to choose the
number of exposures that
will be combined to form a
single photograph and
press J.
A The D Button
If Multiple exposure is selected for
Custom Setting f8 (Assign BKT button;
0 316), you can select the multiple
exposure mode by pressing the D button
and rotating the main command dial and
the number of shots by pressing the D
button and rotating the sub-command
dial. The mode and number of shots are
shown in the control panel: n and
F appear when On (series) is selected and
n when On (single photo) is selected; no
icon appears when multiple exposure is off.
t
197
4
Choose the amount of
gain.
Highlight Auto gain and
press 2.
The following options will
be displayed. Highlight an
option and press J.
• On: Gain is adjusted
according to number of
exposures actually recorded (gain for each exposure is set to
1/2 for 2 exposures, 1/3 for 3 exposures, etc.).
• Off: Gain is not adjusted when recording multiple exposure.
Recommended if background is dark.
5
t
198
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
In continuous high-speed and continuous lowspeed release modes (0 103), the camera records all
exposures in a single burst. If On (series) is selected, the
camera will continue to record multiple exposures while the
shutter-release button is pressed; if On (single photo) is
selected, multiple exposure shooting will end after the first
photograph. In self-timer mode, the camera will automatically
record the number of exposures selected in Step 3 on page
197, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3
(Self-timer) > Number of shots (0 291); the interval between
shots is however controlled by Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer)
> Interval between shots. In other release modes, one
photograph will be taken each time the shutter-release button
is pressed; continue shooting until all exposures have been
recorded (for information on interrupting a multiple exposure
before all photographs are recorded, see page 199).
The n icon will blink until shooting ends.
If On (series) is selected, multiple
exposure shooting will only end when
Off is selected for multiple exposure
mode; if On (single photo) is selected,
multiple exposure shooting ends automatically when the
multiple exposure is complete. The n icon clears from the
display when multiple exposure shooting ends.
❚❚ Interrupting Multiple Exposures
To interrupt a multiple exposure before the
specified number of exposures have been
taken, select Off for multiple exposure mode.
If shooting ends before the specified number
of exposures have been taken, a multiple
exposure will be created from the exposures
that have been recorded to that point. If Auto gain is on, gain will
be adjusted to reflect the number of exposures actually recorded.
Note that shooting will end automatically if:
• A two-button reset is performed (0 193)
• The camera is turned off
• The battery is exhausted
• Pictures are deleted
t
199
D
Multiple Exposure
Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple
exposure.
Multiple exposures can not be recorded in live view. Taking
photographs in live view resets Multiple exposure mode to Off.
The information listed in the playback photo information display
(including date of recording and camera orientation) is for the first shot
in the multiple exposure.
A
Interval Timer Photography
If interval timer photography is activated before the first exposure is
taken, the camera will record exposures at the selected interval until the
number of exposures specified in the multiple exposure menu have
been taken (the number of shots listed in the interval timer shooting
menu is ignored). These exposures will then be recorded as a single
photograph and interval timer shooting will end (if On (single photo) is
selected for multiple exposure mode, multiple exposure shooting will
also end automatically). Cancelling multiple exposure cancels interval
timer shooting.
A
Other Settings
While a multiple exposure is being shot, memory cards can not be
formatted and some menu items are grayed out and can not be
changed.
t
200
Interval Timer Photography
The camera is equipped to take photographs automatically at
preset intervals.
1
Select Interval timer
shooting in the
shooting menu.
Press the G button to
display the menus.
Highlight Interval timer
shooting in the shooting
menu and press 2.
2
G button
Choose a starting time.
Chose from the following
starting triggers.
• To start shooting immediately,
highlight Now and press 2.
Shooting begins about 3 s
after settings are completed;
proceed to Step 3.
• To choose a starting time,
highlight Start time and
press 2 to display the start
time options shown at right.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight
hours or minutes and press 1
or 3 to change. Press 2 to
continue.
t
201
3
Choose the interval.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight
hours, minutes, or seconds;
press 1 or 3 to change.
Choose an interval longer than
the slowest anticipated shutter
speed. Press 2 to continue.
4
Choose the number of
intervals and number of
shots per interval.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight
number of intervals or number
of shots; press 1 or 3 to
change. Press 2 to continue.
Number of Number Total
intervals
of shots/ number of
interval shots
D
Before Shooting
Select a release mode other than self-timer (E) or MUP when using the
interval timer. Before beginning interval timer photography, take a test
shot at current settings and view the results in the monitor.
t
Before choosing a starting time, select Time zone and date in the setup
menu and make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and
date (0 27).
Use of a tripod is recommended. Mount the camera on a tripod before
shooting begins. To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure the
camera EN-EL15 battery is fully charged. If in doubt, charge the battery
before use or use an EH-5b AC adapter and EP-5B power connector
(available separately).
202
5
Start shooting.
Highlight On and press J
(to return to the shooting
menu without starting the
interval timer, highlight
Off and press J). The first J button
series of shots will be taken
at the specified starting time, or after about 3 s if Now was
selected for Choose start time in Step 2. Shooting will
continue at the selected interval until all shots have been
taken. Note that because shutter speed and the time needed
to record the image to the memory card may vary from shot to
shot, the interval between a shot being recorded and the start
of the next shot may vary. If shooting can not proceed at
current settings (for example, if a shutter speed of A is
currently selected in manual exposure mode or the start time
is in less than a minute), a warning will be displayed in the
monitor.
A
Cover the Viewfinder
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with exposure,
close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter (0 106).
D
Out of Memory
If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no
pictures will be taken. Resume shooting (0 205) after deleting some
pictures or turning the camera off and inserting another memory card.
t
A
Interval Timer Photography
Interval timer photography can not be combined with long timeexposures (bulb photography, 0 124) or time-lapse photography
(0 207) and is not available when Record movies is selected for
Custom Setting g4 (Assign shutter button, 0 324).
203
A
Bracketing
Adjust bracketing settings before starting interval timer photography.
If exposure, flash, or ADL bracketing is active while interval timer
photography is in effect, the camera will take the number of shots in the
bracketing program at each interval, regardless of the number of shots
specified in the interval timer menu. If white balance bracketing is
active while interval timer photography is in effect, the camera will take
one shot at each interval and process it to create the number of copies
specified in the bracketing program.
A
During Shooting
During interval timer photography, the Q icon
will blink in the control panel. Immediately
before the next shooting interval begins, the
shutter speed display will show the number of
intervals remaining, and the aperture display will
show the number of shots remaining in the current interval. At other
times, the number of intervals remaining and the number of shots in
each interval can be viewed by pressing the shutter-release button
halfway (once the button is released, the shutter speed and aperture
will be displayed until the exposure meters turn off ).
To view current interval timer settings, select
Interval timer shooting between shots. While
interval timer photography is in progress, the
interval timer menu will show the starting time,
the shooting interval, and the number of
intervals and shots remaining. None of these
items can be changed while interval timer
photography is in progress.
t
204
Pictures can be played back and shooting and menu settings can be
adjusted freely while interval timer photography is in progress. The monitor
will turn off automatically about four seconds before each interval.
❚❚ Pausing Interval Timer Photography
Interval timer photography can be paused by:
• Pressing the J button between intervals
• Highlighting Start > Pause in the interval timer menu and
pressing J
• Turning the camera off and then on again (if desired, the
memory card can be replaced while the camera is off )
• Selecting self-timer (E) or MUP release mode
To resume shooting:
1
Choose a new starting
time.
Choose a new starting time as
described on page 201.
2
Resume shooting.
Highlight Restart and
press J. Note that if
interval timer photography
was paused during
J button
shooting, any shots
remaining in the current
interval will be canceled.
t
205
❚❚ Interrupting Interval Timer Photography
Interval timer shooting will end automatically if the battery is
exhausted. Interval timer photography can also be ended by:
• Selecting Start > Off in the interval timer menu
• Performing a two button reset (0 193)
• Resetting settings for the current shooting menu bank using the
Shooting menu bank item in the shooting menu (0 270)
• Changing bracketing settings (0 132)
• Terminating HDR (0 176) or multiple exposure shooting (0 195)
Normal shooting will resume when interval timer photography ends.
❚❚ No Photograph
The camera will skip the current interval if any of the following
situations persist for eight seconds or more after the interval was
due to start: the photograph or photographs for the previous
interval have yet to be taken, the memory buffer is full, or the
camera is unable to focus in AF-S (note that the camera focuses again
before each shot). Shooting will resume with the next interval.
A
Release Mode
Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera will take the
specified number of shots at each interval. In CH (continuous high
speed) mode, photographs will be taken at the rate given on page 104.
In S (single frame) and CL (continuous low-speed) modes, photographs
will be taken at the rate chosen for Custom Setting d2 (CL mode
shooting speed, 0 293) in mode J, camera noise will be reduced.
t A Shooting Menu Banks
Changes to interval timer settings apply to all shooting menu banks
(0 269). If shooting menu settings are reset using the Shooting menu
bank item in the shooting menu (0 270), interval timer settings will be
reset as follows:
• Choose start time: Now
• Number of shots: 1
• Interval: 00:01':00"
• Start shooting: Off
• Number of intervals: 1
206
Time-Lapse Photography
The camera automatically takes photos at selected intervals to
create a silent time-lapse movie using the options currently
selected for Movie settings in the shooting menu (0 70).
A
Before Shooting
Before beginning time-lapse photography, take a test shot at current
settings (framing the photo in the viewfinder for an accurate exposure
preview) and view the results in the monitor. To record changes in
brightness, choose manual exposure (0 122); for consistent coloration,
choose a white balance setting other than auto (0 145). We
recommend that you briefly switch to movie live view and check the
current image area crop in the monitor (0 59); note, however, that
time-lapse photography is not available in live view.
Use of a tripod is recommended. Mount the camera on a tripod before
shooting begins. To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, use an
optional EH-5b AC adapter and EP-5B power connector or a fullycharged EN-EL15 battery.
1
Select Time-lapse
photography in the
shooting menu.
Press the G button to
display the menus.
Highlight Time-lapse
photography in the
shooting menu and
press 2.
G button
t
207
2
Press 2.
Press 2 to proceed to Step
3 and choose an interval
and shooting time. To
record a time-lapse movie
using the default interval of
5 seconds and shooting
time of 25 minutes, proceed
to step 5.
3
Choose the interval.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight
minutes or seconds; press 1 or
3 to change. Choose an
interval longer than the
slowest anticipated shutter
speed. Press 2 to continue.
4
Select the shooting time.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight hours
or minutes; press 1 or 3 to
change. The maximum
shooting time is 7 hours and 59
minutes. Press 2 to continue.
t
208
5
Start shooting.
Highlight On and press J
(to return to the shooting
menu without starting
time-lapse photography,
highlight Off and press J). J button
Time-lapse photography starts after 3 s. The camera takes
photographs at the interval selected in Step 3 for the time
selected in Step 4. The memory card access lamp lights while
each shot is recorded; note that because shutter speed and
the time needed to record the image to the memory card may
vary from shot to shot, the interval between a shot being
recorded and the start of the next shot may vary. Shooting
will not begin if a time-lapse movie can not be recorded at
current settings (for example, if the memory card is full, the
interval or shooting time is zero, or the interval is longer than
the shooting time).
When complete, time-lapse movies are recorded to the
memory card selected for Movie settings > Destination
(0 70).
D
Time-Lapse Photography
Time-lapse is not available in live view (0 45, 59), at a shutter speed of
A (0 124), when bracketing (0 132), High Dynamic Range (HDR,
0 176), multiple exposure (0 195), or interval timer photography
(0 201) is active.
t
A
Release Mode
Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera will take one shot
at each interval. The self-timer can not be used.
209
A
Calculating the Length of the Final Movie
The total number of frames in the final movie
Length recorded/
can be calculated by dividing the shooting time maximum length
by the interval and rounding up. The length of
the final movie can then be calculated by diving
the number of shots by the frame rate selected
for Movie settings > Frame size/frame rate. A
48 frame movie recorded at 1920 × 1080; 24
fps, for example, will be about two seconds long.
The maximum length for movies recorded using Memory card
indicator
time-lapse photography is 20 minutes.
A
Frame size/
Cover the Viewfinder
frame rate
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder
interfering with exposure, close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter
(0 106).
A
During Shooting
During time-lapse photography, a Q icon will
blink and the time-lapse recording indicator will
be displayed in the control panel. The time
remaining (in hours and minutes) appears in the
shutter-speed display immediately before each
frame is recorded. At other times, the time remaining can be viewed by
pressing the shutter-release button halfway. Regardless of the option
selected for Custom Setting c2 (Auto meter-off delay, 0 291), the
exposure meters will not turn off during shooting.
t
210
To view current time-lapse photography
settings, press the G button between shots.
While time-lapse photography is in progress, the
time-lapse photography menu will show the
interval and the time remaining. These settings
can not be changed while time-lapse
photography is in progress, nor can pictures be
played back or other menu settings adjusted.
❚❚ Interrupting Time-Lapse Photography
Time-lapse photography will end automatically if the battery is
exhausted. The following will also end time-lapse photography:
• Selecting Start > Off in the Time-lapse photography menu
• Pressing the J button between frames or immediately after a
frame is recorded
• Turning the camera off
• Removing the lens
• Connecting a USB or HDMI cable
• Inserting a memory card into an empty slot
• Pressing the shutter-release button all the way down to take a
photograph
A movie will be created from the frames shot to the point where
time-lapse photography ended. Note that time-lapse
photography will end and no movie will be recorded if the power
source is removed or disconnected or the destination memory
card is ejected.
❚❚ No Photograph
The camera will skip the current frame if the camera is unable to
focus in AF-S (note that the camera focuses again before each shot).
Shooting will resume with the next frame.
A
Image Review
The K button can not be used to view pictures while time-lapse
photography is in progress, but the current frame will be displayed for a
few seconds after each shot if On is selected for Image review in the
playback menu (0 265). Other playback operations can not be
performed while the frame is displayed.
t
A
See Also
For information on setting a beep to sound when time-lapse
photography is complete, see Custom Setting d1 (Beep, 0 292).
211
Non-CPU Lenses
By specifying lens data (lens focal length and maximum aperture),
the user can gain access to a variety of CPU lens functions when
using a non-CPU lens.
If the focal length of the lens is known:
• Power zoom can be used with optional flash units (0 382)
• Lens focal length is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo
info display
If the maximum aperture of the lens is known:
• The aperture value is displayed in the control panel and
viewfinder
• Flash level is adjusted for changes in aperture
• Aperture is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo info
display
Specifying both the focal length and maximum aperture of the lens:
• Enables color matrix metering (note that it may be necessary to
use center-weighted or spot metering to achieve accurate results
with some lenses, including Reflex-NIKKOR lenses)
• Improves the precision of center-weighted and spot metering
and i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR
A
t
Focal Length Not Listed
If the correct focal length is not listed, choose the closest value greater
than the actual focal length of the lens.
A
Teleconverters and Zoom Lenses
The maximum aperture for teleconverters is the combined maximum
aperture of the teleconverter and the lens. Note that lens data are not
adjusted when non-CPU lenses are zoomed in or out. The data for
different focal lengths can be entered as separate lens numbers, or the
data for the lens can be edited to reflect the new values for lens focal
length and maximum aperture each time zoom is adjusted.
212
The camera can store data for up to nine non-CPU lenses. To enter
or edit data for a non-CPU lens:
1
Select Non-CPU lens
data in the setup
menu.
Press the G button to
display the menus.
G button
Highlight Non-CPU lens
data in the setup menu and press 2.
2
Select a lens number.
Highlight Lens number and
press 4 or 2 to choose a lens
number between 1 and 9.
3
Enter the focal length and
aperture.
Highlight Focal length (mm)
or Maximum aperture and
press 4 or 2 to edit the
highlighted item. Focal length can be selected from values
between 6 and 4,000 mm, maximum aperture from values
between f/1.2 and f/22.
t
213
4
Select Done.
Highlight Done and press
J. The specified focal
length and aperture will be
stored under the chosen
J button
lens number.
To recall lens data when using a non-CPU lens:
1
Assign non-CPU lens number selection to a camera
control.
Select Choose non-CPU lens number as the “button +
command dials” option for a camera control in the Custom
Settings menu (0 314). Non-CPU lens number selection can
be assigned to the Fn button (Custom Setting f4, Assign Fn
button, 0 311), the depth-of-field preview button (Custom
Setting f5, Assign preview button, 0 315), or the A AE-L/AF-L
button (Custom Setting f6, Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 315).
2
Use the selected control to choose a lens number.
Press the selected button and rotate the main or subcommand dial until the desired lens number is displayed in
the control panel.
Focal
length
Maximum
aperture
t
Main command dial
214
Lens number
Using a GPS Unit
A GPS unit can be connected to the ten-pin remote terminal,
allowing the current latitude, longitude, altitude, Coordinated
Universal Time (UTC), and heading to be recorded with each
photograph taken. The camera can be used with an optional GP-1
GPS unit (see below; note that the GP-1 does not provide the
compass heading), or with third-party units connected via an
optional MC-35 GPS adapter cord (0 216).
❚❚ The GP-1 GPS Unit
The GP-1 is an optional GPS unit designed for use with Nikon
digital cameras. For information on connecting the unit, see the
manual provided with the GP-1.
t
215
❚❚ Other GPS Units
Garmin GPS units that conform to version 2.01 or 3.01 of the
National Marine Electronics Association NMEA0183 data format
can be connected to the camera’s ten-pin remote terminal using
an MC-35 GPS adapter cord (available separately; 0 390).
Operation has been confirmed with Garmin eTrex and Garmin
geko series devices equipped with a PC interface cable connector.
These devices connect to the MC-35 using a cable with a D-sub
9-pin connector provided by the manufacturer of the GPS device.
See the MC-35 instruction manual for details. Before turning the
camera on, set the GPS device to NMEA mode (4800 baud); see the
documentation provided with the GPS device for more
information.
MC-35
t
216
A
The k Icon
Connection status is shown by the k icon:
• k (static): Camera has established
communication with a GPS device. Photo
information for pictures taken while this icon is
displayed include an additional page of GPS
data (0 229).
• k (flashing): The GPS device is searching for a signal. Pictures taken
while the icon is flashing do not include GPS data.
• No icon: No new GPS data have been received from the GPS device for
at least two seconds.
Pictures taken when the k icon is not displayed do not include GPS
data.
A
Heading
The heading is only recorded if the GPS device is
equipped with a digital compass (note that the
GP-1 is not equipped with a compass). Keep the
GPS device pointing in the same direction as the
lens and at least 20cm (8 in.) from the camera.
A
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)
UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the
camera clock.
t
217
❚❚ Setup Menu Options
The GPS item in the setup menu contains the options listed below.
• Auto meter-off: Choose whether or not the exposure meters
will turn off automatically when a GPS unit is attached.
Option
Enable
Disable
Description
Exposure meters will turn off automatically if no operations
are performed for the period specified in Custom Setting c2
(Auto meter-off delay, 0 291; to allow the camera time to
acquire GPS data when a GP-1 is connected, the delay is
extended by up to one minute after exposure meters are
activated or the camera is turned on). This reduces the
drain on the battery.
Exposure meters will not turn off while a GPS unit is
connected; GPS data will always be recorded.
• Position: This item is only available if a GPS device is connected,
when it displays the current latitude, longitude, altitude,
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), and heading (if supported) as
reported by the GPS device.
• Use GPS to set camera clock: Select Yes to synchronize the
camera clock with the time reported by the GPS device.
t
218
IMore About Playback
Viewing Images
Full-frame
playback
W
W
W
X
X
X
Thumbnail playback
Full-Frame Playback
To play photographs back, press the K button. The
most recent photograph will be displayed in the
monitor. Additional pictures can be displayed by
pressing 4 or 2; to view additional information on
the current photograph, press 1 or 3 (0 222).
Thumbnail Playback
K button
To view multiple images, press the W button when
a picture is displayed full frame. The number of
images displayed increases from 4 to 9 to 72 each
time the W button is pressed, and decreases with
each press of the X button. Use the multi selector to
highlight images and press the center of the multi W button
selector to view the highlighted image full frame.
I
219
Playback Controls
O (Q): Delete the current picture (0 234)
G: View the menus (0 259)
L (Z/Q): Protect the current picture (0 233)
X: Zoom in (0 231)
W: View multiple images (0 219)
J: Display retouch options (for the
options available with
photographs, see page 341, or
see page 74 for the options
available with movies)
A
Rotate Tall
To display “tall” (portrait-orientation)
photographs in tall orientation, select On for
the Rotate tall option in the playback menu
(0 266).
I A Image Review
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu (0 265),
photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor after shooting
(because the camera is already in the correct orientation, images are not
rotated automatically during image review). In continuous release
mode, display begins when shooting ends, with the first photograph in
the current series displayed.
220
A
Two Memory Cards
If two memory cards are inserted, you can select
a memory card for playback by pressing the W
button when 72 thumbnails are displayed. The
dialog shown at right will be displayed; Highlight
the desired slot and press 2 to display a list of
folders, then highlight a folder and press J to
view the pictures in the selected folder. The
same method can be used to choose a slot when selecting images for
operations in the playback (0 259) or retouch menus (0 341) or when
choosing an image as the source for preset white balance (0 159).
A
Resuming Shooting
To turn the monitor off and return to shooting mode, press K or press
the shutter-release button halfway.
A
The Multi Selector
The multi selector can be used to
highlight pictures in the thumbnail
display and in displays like that shown
at right.
A
See Also
For information on choosing how long the monitor will remain on when
no operations are performed, see Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off
delay, 0 292). For information on choosing the role played by the
center of the multi selector, see Custom Setting f2 (Multi selector
center button, 0 309). For information on using the command dials for
image or menu navigation, see Custom Setting f9 (Custom command
dials) > Menus and playback (0 318).
I
221
Photo Information
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in fullframe playback. Press 1 or 3 to cycle through photo information
as shown below. Note that “image only”, shooting data, RGB
histograms, and highlights are only displayed if corresponding
option is selected for Playback display options (0 261). GPS
data are only displayed if a GPS device was used when the photo
was taken.
1/ 12
1/ 12
1/ 125
F5. 6
NIKON D800
100
85mm
0, 0
100ND800 DSC_0001. JPG
10/ 01/ 2012 10: 06: 22
N OR
ORMAL
AL
7360x4912
100ND800 DSC_0001. JPG
10/ 01/ 2012 10: 06: 22
File information
None (image only)
N OR
ORMAL
AL
7360x4912
Overview
L A T I T UD E
L ONG I T U D E
A L T I T UD E
T I M E (U T C )
:N
: 3 5º 3 5. 9 7 1‘
:E
: 1 3 9º 4 3. 6 9 6‘
: 3 5m
: 10 / 01 / 2012
: 01 : 15 : 00
: 1 0 5. 1 7
H E AD I NG
N I KON D800
100-1
GPS data
100-1
M T R , S P D, A P .
E X P . MO D E , I S O
I
Highlights
RGB Highlights
Select R, G, B
Highlights
222
RGB
F O C A L L E NG T H
L ENS
A F / VR
F L ASH T YP E
S Y N C MO D E
,
100-1
Select R, G, B
RGB histogram
: , 1 / 1 25 , F 5 . 6
: , 100
: 0. 0 , + 1 / 6
: 8 5 mm
: 85
/ 1. 4
:S
:
:
:
N I KON D800
Shooting data
100-1
❚❚ File Information
1 2
3
4
5
1/ 12
13
12
11
N OR
ORMAL
AL
7360x4912
100ND800 DSC_0001. JPG
10/ 01/ 2012 10: 06: 22
10
9
8
7
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Protect status..........................................233
Retouch indicator..................................341
Focus point 1, 2 ..........................................96
AF-area brackets 1 ...................................35
Frame number/total number of frames
Image quality ...........................................84
Image size .................................................87
Image area 3 ..............................................79
Time of recording....................................27
Date of recording ....................................27
Current card slot ......................................31
Folder name ...........................................271
File name.................................................273
1 Displayed only if Focus point is selected for Playback display options (0 261).
2 If photograph was taken using AF-S, display shows point where focus first locked. If
photograph was taken using AF-C, focus point is only displayed if option other than
auto-area AF was selected for AF-area mode and camera was able to focus.
3 Displayed in yellow if picture is in non-FX format (including DX-based movie format;
0 67, 79).
I
223
❚❚ Highlights
1
2
100-1
RGB Highlights
4
1
2
3
4
Image highlights 1
Folder number–frame number 2....... 271
Highlight display indicator
Current channel 1
Select R, G, B
3
1 Blinking areas indicate highlights (areas that may be
overexposed) for current channel. Hold W button
and press 4 or 2 to cycle through channels as
follows:
W button
RGB
(all channels)
R
(red)
G
(green)
B
(blue)
2 Displayed in yellow if picture is in non-FX format (including DX-based movie format;
0 67, 79).
I
224
❚❚ RGB Histogram
5
1
6
2
Highlights
3
4
7
100-1
8
RGB
Select R, G, B
1 Image highlights 1
2 Folder number–frame number 2 .......271
3 White balance ........................................145
Color temperature ................................152
White balance fine-tuning..................148
Preset manual ........................................154
4 Current channel 1
5 Histogram (RGB channel). In all
histograms, horizontal axis gives pixel
brightness, vertical axis number of
pixels.
6 Histogram (red channel)
7 Histogram (green channel)
8 Histogram (blue channel)
9
1 Blinking areas indicate highlights (areas that may be
overexposed) for current channel. Hold W button
and press 4 or 2 to cycle through channels as
follows:
W button
RGB
(all channels)
R
G
(red)
(green)
Highlight display off
B
(blue)
2 Displayed in yellow if picture is in non-FX format (including DX-based movie format;
0 67, 79).
I
225
A
Playback Zoom
To zoom in on the photograph when the
histogram is displayed, press X. Use the X and
W buttons to zoom in and out and scroll the
image with the multi selector. The histogram will
be updated to show only the data for the portion
of the image visible in the monitor.
A
Histograms
Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from
those displayed in imaging applications. Some sample histograms are
shown below:
If the image contains objects with a
wide range of brightnesses, the
distribution of tones will be relatively
even.
If the image is dark, tone distribution
will be shifted to the left.
If the image is bright, tone
distribution will be shifted to the
right.
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to
the right, while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the
distribution to the left. Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall
exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see
photographs in the monitor.
I
226
❚❚ Shooting Data
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
M T R , S P D, A P .
E X P . MO D E , I S O
: , 1 / 8 0 0 0 , F 2. 8
: , H i 0. 3,
: + 1. 3, + 5 / 6
F O C A L L E N G T H : 8 5 mm
: 85
L ENS
/ 1. 4
: S / VR -O n
A F / VR
: B u i l t - i n , C MD
F L ASH T YP E
: S L OW
S Y N C MO D E
, : M : T T L , +3. 0 A : T T L , +3. 0
C : --B : ---
N I KON D800
100-1
10
11 12
1 Metering method ................................. 115
Shutter speed .............................. 119, 122
Aperture......................................... 120, 122
2 Exposure mode ..................................... 117
ISO sensitivity 1 ...................................... 109
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
W H I T E B A L AN C E
CO L OR S P AC E
P I C T UR E C T R L
Q U I C K AD J U S T
S HA R P E N I NG
C ON T R A S T
B R I GH T N E S S
S A T U R A T I ON
HU E
N I KON D800
: AU T O 1 , 0 , 0
: s RGB
: S T ANDARD
:0
:3
:0
:0
:0
:0
100-1
13 White balance........................................ 145
Color temperature................................ 152
White balance fine-tuning ................. 148
Preset manual........................................ 154
3 Exposure compensation......................130
Optimal exposure tuning 2..................290
4 Focal length...................................212, 379
5 Lens data .................................................212
6 Focus mode ..............................................91
Lens VR (vibration reduction) 3
7 Flash type.......................................181, 380
Commander mode................................303
8 Flash mode .............................................183
9 Flash control ...........................................301
Flash compensation .............................188
10 Camera name
11 Image area 4 ..............................................79
12 Folder number–frame number 4 .......271
14 Color space .............................................274
15 Picture Control .......................................163
16 Quick adjust 5 .........................................166
Original Picture Control 6 .....................163
17 Sharpening .............................................166
18 Contrast ...................................................166
19 Brightness ...............................................166
20 Saturation 7 .............................................166
Filter effects 8 ..........................................166
21 Hue 7 .........................................................166
Toning 8 ....................................................166
I
227
22
23
24
25
26
NO I S E R E D U C .
A C T . D - L I GH T .
HD R
V I GN E T T E C T R L
R E T OU C H
: H I I S O, N O R M
: N O R MA L
: A U T O, H I G H
: N O R MA L
: D - L I GH T I NG
27
COMMENT
: SPR I NG HAS COME . SP
W ARM F I L T E R
C Y ANO T Y P E
TR I M
R I NG HAS COME . 3636
N I KON D800
28
29
100-1
AR T I S T
: N I KON TARO
CO P Y R I GHT
: N I K ON
N I KON D800
22 High ISO noise reduction.................... 277
Long exposure noise reduction ........ 277
23 Active D-Lighting ................................. 174
24 HDR exposure differential .................. 178
HDR smoothing .................................... 178
25 Vignette control.................................... 275
26 Retouch history..................................... 341
27 Image comment ................................... 333
28 Name of photographer....................... 334
29 Copyright holder .................................. 334
The fourth page of the shooting data is
only displayed if copyright information was
recorded with the photograph as described
on page 334.
100-1
1 Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on.
2 Displayed if Custom Setting b6 (Fine-tune optimal exposure, 0 290) has been set to
a value other than zero for any metering method.
3 Displayed only if VR lens is attached.
4 Displayed in yellow if picture is in non-FX format (including DX-based movie format;
0 67, 79).
5 Standard Vivid, Portrait, and Landscape Picture Controls only.
6 Neutral, Monochrome, and custom Picture Controls.
7 Not displayed with monochrome Picture Controls.
8 Monochrome Picture Controls only.
I
228
❚❚ GPS Data 1
1
L A T I T UD E
2
3
4
A L T I T UD E
T I M E (U T C )
5
H E AD I NG
L ONG I T U D E
:N
: 3 5º 3 5. 9 7 1‘
:E
: 1 3 9º 4 3. 6 9 6‘
: 3 5m
: 10 / 01 / 2012
: 01 : 15 : 00
: 1 0 5. 1 7
N I KON D800
6
100-1
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Latitude
Longitude
Altitude
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)
Heading 2
Camera name
Image area 3 ..............................................79
1 Data for movies are for start of recording.
2 Displayed only if GPS device is equipped with electronic compass.
3 Displayed in yellow if picture is in non-FX format (including DX-based movie format;
0 67, 79).
I
229
❚❚ Overview
1
2
1/ 12
3
NIKON D800
4
14 15
5
–1. 3
1/ 8000 F2. 8
Hi 0. 3
+ 1. 0
SLOW
28
27
85mm
13
100ND800 DSC_0001. JPG
10/ 01/ 2012 10: 06: 22
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
11 10 9
N OR
ORMAL
AL
7360x4912
8
6
17
18
85mm
0, 0
26
0, 0
16
Hi 0. 3
1/ 8000 F2. 8
+ 1. 0
–1. 3
SLOW
25
24
23
19
20
21
22
7
Frame number/total number of frames
Protect status.........................................233
Camera name
Retouch indicator .................................341
Histogram showing the distribution of
tones in the image (0 226).
Image quality........................................... 84
Image size................................................. 87
Image area 1 ............................................. 79
File name.................................................273
Time of recording.................................... 27
Folder name ...........................................271
Date of recording .................................... 27
Current card slot...................................... 31
Metering method .................................115
Exposure mode .....................................117
Shutter speed ............................... 119, 122
Aperture ........................................ 120, 122
ISO sensitivity 2 ...................................... 109
Focal length .................................. 212, 379
GPS data indicator................................ 215
Image comment indicator ................. 333
Active D-Lighting ................................ 174
Picture Control ...................................... 163
Color space............................................. 274
Flash mode............................................. 183
White balance ....................................... 145
Color temperature................................ 152
White balance fine-tuning ................. 148
Preset manual ....................................... 154
27 Flash compensation............................. 188
Commander mode............................... 303
28 Exposure compensation ..................... 130
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
1 Non-FX formats (including DX-based movie format) displayed in yellow (0 67, 79).
2 Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on.
I
230
Taking a Closer Look:
Playback Zoom
Press the X button to zoom in on the image
displayed in full-frame playback or on the
image currently highlighted in thumbnail
playback. The following operations can be
performed while zoom is in effect:
X button
To
Use
Zoom in
or out
X/W
View
other
areas of
image
Select
faces
Description
Press X to zoom in to
maximum of
approximately 46×
(large images in
36 × 24/3 : 2 format),
34× (medium images)
or 22× (small images). Press W to zoom
out. While photo is zoomed in, use multi
selector to view areas of image not visible in
monitor. Keep multi selector pressed to
scroll rapidly to other areas of frame.
Navigation window is displayed when zoom
ratio is altered; area currently visible in
monitor is indicated by yellow border.
Faces (up to 35)
detected during zoom
are indicated by white
borders in navigation
window. Rotate subcommand dial to view
other faces.
I
231
To
Use
View
other
images
Change
protect
status
Return to
shooting
mode
Display
menus
I
232
L (Z/Q)
/K
G
Description
Rotate main command dial to view same
location in other images at current zoom
ratio. Playback zoom is cancelled when a
movie is displayed.
See page 233 for more information.
Press the shutter-release button halfway or
press the K button to exit to shooting
mode.
See page 259 for more information.
Protecting Photographs from
Deletion
In full-frame, zoom, and thumbnail playback, the L (Z/Q) button
can be used to protect photographs from accidental deletion.
Protected files can not be deleted using the O (Q) button or the
Delete option in the playback menu. Note that protected images will
be deleted when the memory card is formatted (0 32, 326).
To protect a photograph:
1
Select an image.
Display the image in full-frame playback or playback zoom or
highlight it in the thumbnail list.
2
Press the L (Z/Q)
button.
The photograph will be
marked with a P icon. To
remove protection from
the photograph so that it
L (Z/Q) button
can be deleted, display the
photograph or highlight it in the thumbnail list and then press
the L (Z/Q) button.
I
A
Removing Protection from All Images
To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently
selected in the Playback folder menu, press the L (Z/Q) and O (Q)
buttons together for about two seconds during playback.
233
Deleting Photographs
To delete the photograph displayed in full-frame playback or
highlighted in the thumbnail list, press the O (Q) button. To
delete multiple selected photographs or all photographs in the
current playback folder, use the Delete option in the playback
menu. Once deleted, photographs can not be recovered. Note
that pictures that are protected or hidden can not be deleted.
Full-Frame and Thumbnail Playback
Press the O (Q) button to delete the current photograph.
1
Select an image.
Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list.
2
Press the O (Q) button.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.
O (Q)
button
I
234
Full-frame playback Thumbnail playback
3
Press the O (Q) button again.
To delete the photograph, press the O (Q)
button. To exit without deleting the
photograph, press the K button.
O (Q)
button
I
A
See Also
The After delete option in the playback menu determines whether the
next image or the previous image is displayed after an image is deleted
(0 266).
235
The Playback Menu
The Delete option in the playback menu contains the following
options. Note that depending on the number of images, some
time may be required for deletion.
Option
Description
Q Selected Delete selected pictures.
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for
R All
playback (0 260). If two cards are inserted, you can select
the card from which pictures will be deleted.
❚❚ Selected: Deleting Selected Photographs
1
Choose Selected for the
Delete option in the
playback menu.
Press the G button and
select Delete in the
playback menu. Highlight
Selected and press 2.
2
I
236
G button
Highlight a picture.
Use the multi selector to
highlight a picture (to view
the highlighted picture full
screen, press and hold the
X button; to view images
in other locations, press
X button
W and select the desired
card and folder as described on page 221).
3
Select the highlighted
picture.
Press the center of the multi
selector to select the
highlighted picture. Selected
pictures are marked by a O icon. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select
additional pictures; to deselect a picture, highlight it and press
the center of the multi selector.
4
Press J to complete the
operation.
A confirmation dialog will
be displayed; highlight Yes
and press J.
J button
I
237
I
238
QConnections
Connecting to a Computer
This section describes how to use the supplied UC-E14 USB cable
to connect the camera to a computer.
Before Connecting the Camera
Before connecting the camera, install the software on the supplied
ViewNX 2 installer CD. To ensure that data transfer is not
interrupted, be sure the camera EN-EL15 battery is fully charged. If
in doubt, charge the battery before use or use an EH-5b AC
adapter and EP-5B power connector (available separately).
❚❚ Supplied Software
ViewNX 2 includes a
Your Imaging Toolbox
“Nikon Transfer 2” function for
copying pictures from the
camera to the computer,
where ViewNX 2 can be used
to view and print selected
images or to edit photographs and movies. Before installing
ViewNX 2, confirm that your computer meets the system
requirements on page 242.
Q
239
1
Start the computer and insert the ViewNX 2 installer
CD.
Windows
Mac OS
Double-click icon on
desktop
Double-click Welcome
icon
2
Select a language.
If the desired language is not
q Select region (if required)
available, click Region Selection
to choose a different region and
then choose the desired
language (region selection is not
available in the European
release).
w Select
language
3
Start the installer.
Click Install and follow the onscreen instructions.
Q
240
e Click Next
D
Installation Guide
For help installing ViewNX 2,
click Installation Guide in Step 3.
Click Install
4
Exit the installer.
Click Yes (Windows) or OK (Mac OS) when installation is
complete.
Windows
Mac OS
Click Yes
Click OK
The following software is installed:
• ViewNX 2
• Apple QuickTime (Windows only)
5
Remove the installer CD from the CD-ROM drive.
D
Connecting Cables
Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface
cables. Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.
Close the connector cover when the connector is not in use.
A
Windows
To visit the Nikon website after installing ViewNX 2, select All
Programs > Link to Nikon from the Windows start menu (Internet
connection required).
Q
241
D
System Requirements
Windows
CPU
OS
RAM
Hard-disk
space
Monitor
• Photos/JPEG movies: Intel Celeron, Pentium 4, or Core series,
1.6 GHz or better
• H.264 movies (playback): 3.0 GHz or better Pentium D; Intel Core i5
or better recommended when viewing movies with a frame
size of 1,280 × 720 or more at a frame rate of 30 fps or above or
movies with a frame size of 1,920 × 1,080 or more
• H.264 movies (editing): 2.6 GHz or better Core 2 Duo
Pre-installed versions of Windows 7 Home Basic/Home Premium/
Professional/Enterprise/Ultimate (Service Pack 1), Windows Vista
Home Basic/Home Premium/Business/Enterprise/Ultimate (Service
Pack 2), or 32-bit editions of Windows XP Home Edition/
Professional (Service Pack 3). All installed programs run as 32-bit
applications in 64-bit editions of Windows 7 and Windows Vista.
• Windows 7/Windows Vista: 1 GB or more (2 GB or more recommended)
• Windows XP: 512 MB or more (2 GB or more recommended)
A minimum of 500 MB available on the startup disk (1 GB or more
recommended)
• Resolution: 1024 × 768 pixels (XGA) or more (1280 × 1024 pixels (SXGA)
or more recommended)
• Color: 24-bit color (True Color) or more
Mac OS
CPU
OS
RAM
Q
512 MB or more (2 GB or more recommended)
Hard-disk A minimum of 500 MB available on the startup disk (1 GB or more
recommended)
space
Monitor
242
• Photos/JPEG movies: PowerPC G4 (1 GHz or better), G5, Intel Core, or
Xeon series
• H.264 movies (playback): PowerPC G5 Dual or Core Duo, 2 GHz or
better; Intel Core i5 or better recommended when viewing
movies with a frame size of 1,280 × 720 or more at a frame rate
of 30 fps or above or movies with a frame size of 1,920 × 1,080
or more
• H.264 movies (editing): 2.6 GHz or better Core 2 Duo
• GPU that supports QuickTime H.264 hardware acceleration
recommended
Mac OS X version 10.5.8, 10.6.8, or 10.7.2
• Resolution: 1024 × 768 pixels (XGA) or more (1280 × 1024 pixels (SXGA) or
more recommended)
• Color: 24-bit color (millions of colors) or more
Direct USB Connection
Connect the camera using the supplied UC-E14 USB cable.
1
Turn the camera off.
2
Turn the computer on.
Turn the computer on and wait for it to start up.
3
Connect the USB cable.
Connect the USB cable as shown.
D
USB Hubs
Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the
cable via a USB hub or keyboard.
D
The USB Cable Clip
To prevent cable from being disconnected, attach the clip as
shown.
Q
4
Turn the camera on.
243
5
Start Nikon Transfer 2.
If a message is displayed prompting you to choose a program,
select Nikon Transfer 2.
A
Windows 7
If the following dialog is displayed, select Nikon Transfer 2 as
described below.
1 Under Import pictures and
videos, click Change program.
A program selection dialog will
be displayed; select Import file
using Nikon Transfer 2 and
click OK.
2 Double-click Import file.
6
Click Start Transfer.
At default settings, all the pictures on
the memory card will be copied to the
computer (for more information on
using Nikon Transfer 2, start ViewNX 2 or
Nikon Transfer 2 and select ViewNX 2
Help from the Help menu).
7
Start Transfer
Turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable
when transfer ends.
Nikon Transfer 2 will close automatically when transfer is
complete.
Q
244
D
During Transfer
Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while
transfer is in progress.
Ethernet and Wireless Networks
If the optional WT-4 wireless transmitter (0 387) is attached,
photographs can be transferred or printed over wireless or
Ethernet networks and the camera can also be controlled from
network computers running Camera Control Pro 2 (available
separately). The WT-4 can be used in any of the following modes:
Mode
Function
Upload new or existing photographs to computer or ftp
Transfer mode
server.
Thumbnail Preview photographs on computer monitor before
select mode upload.
Control camera from computer using
PC mode
Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately).
Print JPEG photographs on printer connected to network
Print mode
computer.
For more information, see the WT-4 user’s manual. Be sure to
update to the latest versions of the wireless transmitter firmware
and supplied software.
D
Transfer Mode
When Wireless transmitter > Mode > Transfer mode is selected in the
camera setup menu, the J button is used during playback to select
pictures for upload, preventing it from being used to select pictures for
other operations, such as side-by-side comparison (0 364). To restore
normal operation, select another option for Wireless transmitter >
Mode.
A
Recording and Viewing Movies During Transfer
Movies can not be recorded or played back in image transfer mode
when a WT-4 is connected to the camera (“image transfer mode” applies
when images are being transferred and when images remain to be
sent).
Q
245
A
Movies
The WT-4 can be used to upload movies in transfer mode if Auto send
or Send folder is not selected for Transfer settings. Movies can not be
uploaded in thumbnail select mode.
A
Thumbnail Select Mode
Camera settings can not be changed from the computer in thumbnail
select mode.
A
Camera Control Pro 2
Camera Control Pro 2 software (available separately; 0 389) can be
used to control the camera from a computer. When
Camera Control Pro 2 is used to capture photographs directly to the
computer, the PC connection indicator (c) will appear in the control
panel.
Q
246
Printing Photographs
Selected JPEG images can be printed on a PictBridge printer
(0 433) connected directly to the camera.
D
Selecting Photographs for Printing
Images created at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or TIFF (RGB)
(0 84) can not be selected for printing. JPEG copies of NEF (RAW)
images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the
retouch menu (0 353).
A
Printing Via Direct USB Connection
Be sure the battery is fully charged or use an optional EH-5b AC adapter
and EP-5B power connector. When taking photographs to be printed
via direct USB connection, set Color space to sRGB (0 274).
A
See Also
See page 422 for information on what to do if an error occurs during
printing.
Q
247
Connecting the Printer
Connect the camera using the supplied UC-E14 USB cable.
1
Turn the camera off.
2
Connect the USB cable.
Turn the printer on and connect the USB cable as shown. Do
not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.
D
USB Hubs
Connect the camera directly to the printer; do not connect the
cable via a USB hub.
3
Turn the camera on.
A welcome screen will be displayed in the monitor, followed
by a PictBridge playback display.
q
Q
248
w
Printing Pictures One at a Time
1
Select a picture.
Press 4 or 2 to view additional
pictures. Press 1 or 3 to view
photo information (0 222), or
press the X button to zoom in
on the current frame (0 231,
press K to exit zoom). To view six pictures at a time, press the
center of the multi selector. Use the multi selector to highlight
pictures, or press the center of the multi selector again to
display the highlighted picture full frame. To view images in
other locations, press W when thumbnails are displayed and
select the desired card and folder as described on page 221.
2
Display printing
options.
Press J to display
PictBridge printing
options.
3
J button
Adjust printing options.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option and press 2 to select.
Option
Description
Highlight a page size (only sizes supported by the
current printer are listed) and press J to select and exit
Page size
to the previous menu (to print at the default page size
for the current printer, select Printer default).
No. of Press 1 or 3 to choose number of copies (maximum 99),
copies then press J to select and return to the previous menu.
Q
249
Option
Description
This option is available only if supported by the printer.
Highlight Printer default (use current printer settings),
Border Print with border (print photo with white border), or No
border and press J to select and exit to the previous
menu.
Highlight Printer default (use current printer settings),
Print time stamp (print times and dates of recording on
Time stamp
photos), or No time stamp and press J to select and
exit to the previous menu.
This option is available only if supported by the printer.
To exit without cropping, highlight No cropping and
press J. To crop the current picture, highlight Crop and
press 2.
Cropping
4
Selecting Crop displays the
dialog shown at right. Press X to
increase the size of the crop, W
to decrease. Position the crop
using the multi selector and press
J. Note that print quality may
drop if small crops are printed at
large sizes.
Start printing.
Select Start printing and press
J to start printing. To cancel
before all copies have been
printed, press J.
Q
250
Printing Multiple Pictures
1
Display the PictBridge
menu.
Press the G button in the
PictBridge playback display
(see Step 3 on page 248).
2
G button
Choose an option.
Highlight one of the following
options and press 2.
• Print select: Select pictures
for printing.
• Print (DPOF): Print an
existing print order created with the DPOF print order
option in the playback menu (0 254). The current print
order will be displayed in Step 3.
• Index print: To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on
the memory card, proceed to Step 4. Note that if the
memory card contains more than 256 pictures, only the first
256 images will be printed.
Q
251
3
Select pictures.
Use the multi selector to
scroll through the pictures
on the memory card (to
view images in other
L (Z/Q) button
locations, press W and
select the desired card and
folder as described on
page 221). To display the
current picture full screen,
press and hold the X
button. To select the
current picture for printing,
press the L (Z/Q)
button and press 1. The
picture will be marked with
a Z icon and the number
X button
of prints will be set to 1.
Keeping the L (Z/Q) button pressed, press 1 or 3 to
specify the number of prints (up to 99; to deselect the picture,
press 3 when the number of prints is 1). Continue until all the
desired pictures have been selected.
4
Display printing
options.
Press J to display
PictBridge printing
options.
Q
252
J button
5
Adjust printing options.
Choose page size, border, and time stamp options as
described on page 249 (a warning will be displayed if the
selected page size is too small for an index print).
6
Start printing.
Select Start printing and press J to start printing.
To cancel before all copies have been printed, press
J.
Q
253
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set
The DPOF print order option in the playback menu is used to
create digital “print orders” for PictBridge-compatible printers and
devices that support DPOF (0 433).
1
Choose Select/set for
the DPOF print order
item in the playback
menu.
Press the G button and G button
select DPOF print order
in the playback menu. Highlight Select/set and press 2 (to
remove all photographs from the print order, select Deselect
all?).
2
Q
254
Select pictures.
Use the multi selector to scroll
through the pictures on the
memory card (to view images in
other locations, press W and select
L (Z/Q) button
the desired card and folder as
described on page 221). To display
the current picture in full screen,
press and hold the X button. To
select the current picture for
printing, press the L (Z/Q)
button and press 1. The picture
will be marked with a Z icon and
the number of prints will be set to 1. Keeping the L (Z/Q)
button pressed, press 1 or 3 to specify the number of prints
(up to 99; to deselect the picture, press 3 when the number of
prints is 1). Press J when all the desired pictures have been
selected.
3
Select imprint options.
Highlight the following options and
press 2 to toggle the highlighted
option on or off (to complete the print
order without including this
information, proceed to Step 4).
• Print shooting data: Print shutter speed and aperture on all
pictures in print order.
• Print date: Print date of recording on all pictures in print
order.
4
Complete the print
order.
Highlight Done and press
J to complete the print
order.
J button
D
Print Set
To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a
PictBridge printer, select Print (DPOF) in the PictBridge menu and
follow the steps in “Printing Multiple Pictures” to modify and print the
current order (0 251). DPOF date and shooting data imprint options
are not supported when printing via direct USB connection; to print the
date of recording on photographs in the current print order, use the
PictBridge Time stamp option.
The Print Set option can not be used if there is not enough space on the
memory card to store the print order.
Images created at image quality settings of NEF (RAW; 0 84) can not be
selected for printing using this option.
Q
Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a
computer or other device after the print order is created.
255
Viewing Photographs on TV
A type C mini-pin High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI)
cable (available separately from commercial sources) can be used
to connect the camera to high-definition video devices.
1
Turn the camera off.
Always turn the camera off before connecting or
disconnecting an HDMI cable.
2
Connect the HDMI cable as shown.
Connect to highdefinition device
(choose cable with
connector for HDMI
device)
3
Tune the device to the HDMI channel.
4
Turn the camera on and press K button.
Connect to
camera
During playback, images will be displayed both in the camera
monitor and on the high-definition television or monitor
screen.
Q
D
Close the Connector Cover
Close the connector cover when the connectors are not in use. Foreign
matter in the connectors can interfere with data transfer.
256
HDMI Options
The HDMI option in the setup menu (0 325) controls output
resolution and other advanced HDMI options.
❚❚ Output Resolution
Choose the format for images output to the
HDMI device. If Auto is selected, the
camera will automatically select the
appropriate format. Regardless of the
option selected, Auto will be used for
movie live view, movie recording, and
playback.
❚❚ Advanced
Option
Description
Auto is recommended in most situations. If the camera
is unable to determine the correct RGB video signal
output range for the HDMI device, you can choose from
the following options:
• Limited range: For devices with an RGB video signal input
range of 16 to 235. Choose this option if you notice loss
of detail in shadows.
• Full range: For devices with an RGB video signal input
range of 0 to 255. Choose this option if shadows are
“washed out” or too bright.
Output display Choose horizontal and vertical frame coverage for HDMI
size
output from 95% or 100%.
If Off is selected when the camera is connected to an
Live view onHDMI device, shooting information will not be displayed
screen display
in the monitor during live view photography.
Output range
Q
257
A
Television Playback
Use of an EH-5b AC adapter and EP-5B power connector (available
separately) is recommended for extended playback. Note that the
edges may not be visible when photographs are viewed on a television
screen.
A
Slide Shows
The Slide show option in the playback menu can be used for
automated playback (0 267).
A
Audio
Stereo sound recorded with optional ME-1 (0 65, 389) stereo
microphones plays in stereo when movies are viewed on HDMI devices
using a camera connected via an HDMI cable (note that audio will not
be played back over headphones connected to the camera). Volume
can be adjusted using television controls; the camera controls can not
be used.
A
HDMI and Live View
When the camera is connected via an HDMI cable, HDMI displays can be
used for live view photography and movie live view (0 57, 67). During
movie live view and movie recording and playback, HDMI output will be
adjusted according to the option selected for Movie settings > Frame
size/frame rate in the shooting menu (0 70). Note that some HDMI
devices may not support the selected setting; in this case, select 1080i
(interlaced) for HDMI > Output resolution (0 257).
Q
258
UMenu Guide
D The Playback Menu:
Managing Images
To display the playback menu, press G and select the K
(playback menu) tab.
G button
Option
Delete
Playback folder
Hide image
Playback display options
Copy image(s)
Image review
After delete
Rotate tall
Slide show
DPOF print order
0
236
260
260
261
262
265
266
266
267
254
U
A
See Also
Menu defaults are listed on page 405.
259
Playback Folder
G button ➜ D playback menu
Choose a folder for playback (0 219).
Option
Description
Pictures in all folders created with the D800 will be visible during
ND800
playback.
All
Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.
Only pictures in the current folder will be visible during
Current
playback.
Hide Image
G button ➜ D playback menu
Hide or reveal selected pictures as described below. Hidden
pictures are visible only in the Hide image menu and can only be
deleted by formatting the memory card.
D
Protected and Hidden Images
Revealing a protected image will also remove protection from the
image.
1
Choose Select/set.
Highlight Select/set and
press 2 (to skip the remaining
steps and reveal all pictures,
highlight Deselect all? and
press J).
U
260
2
Select pictures.
Use the multi selector to scroll
through the pictures on the
memory card (to view the
highlighted picture full screen,
press and hold the X button; to
view images in other locations, press W and select the
desired card and folder as described on page 221) and press
the center of the multi selector to select the current picture.
Selected pictures are marked by a R icon; to deselect a
picture, highlight it and press the center of the multi selector.
3
Press J.
Press J to complete the operation.
J button
Playback Display Options
G button ➜ D playback menu
Choose the information available in the playback photo
information display (0 222). Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option,
then press 2 to select the option for the photo information
display. A L appears next to selected items; to deselect, highlight
and press 2. To return to the playback menu, highlight Done and
press J.
U
261
Copy Image(s)
G button ➜ D playback menu
Copy pictures from one memory card to another.
Option
Select source
Select image(s)
Select destination
folder
Copy image(s)?
1
Description
Choose card from which pictures will be copied.
Select pictures to be copied.
Select destination folder on remaining card.
Copy selected pictures to specified destination.
Choose Select source.
Highlight Select source and
press 2.
2
Select the source card.
Highlight the slot for the card
containing the images to be
copied and press J.
3
Choose Select image(s).
Highlight Select image(s) and
press 2.
U
262
4
Select the source folder.
Highlight the folder containing
the images to be copied and
press 2.
5
Make the initial selection.
Before going on select or
deselect individual images, you
can mark all or all protected
images in the folder for
copying by choosing Select all
images or Select protected images. To mark only
individually selected images for copying, choose Deselect all
before proceeding.
6
Select additional images.
Highlight pictures and press
the center of the multi selector
to select or deselect (to view
the highlighted picture full
screen, press and hold the X
button). Selected images are marked with a L. Press J to
proceed to Step 7 when your selection is complete.
7
Choose Select destination
folder.
Highlight Select destination
folder and press 2.
U
263
8
Select a destination folder.
To enter a folder number, choose Select
folder by number, enter the number
(0 271), and press J.
To choose from a list of existing folders,
choose Select folder from list, highlight
a folder, and press J.
9
Copy the images.
Highlight Copy image(s)?
and press J.
J button
A confirmation dialog will
be displayed; highlight Yes and
press J. Press J again to exit
when copying is complete.
U
264
D
Copying Images
Images will not be copied if there is insufficient space on the destination
card. Be sure the battery is fully charged before copying movies.
If the destination folder contains an image with
the same name as one of the images to be
copied, a confirmation dialog will be displayed.
Select Replace existing image to replace the
image with the image to be copied, or select
Replace all to replace all existing images with
the same names without further prompting. To
continue without replacing the image, select Skip, or select Cancel to
exit without copying any further images. Hidden or protected files in the
destination folder will not be replaced.
Protect status is copied with the images but print marking (0 254) is
not. Hidden images can not be copied.
Image Review
G button ➜ D playback menu
Choose whether pictures are automatically
displayed in the monitor immediately after
shooting. If Off is selected, pictures can only
be displayed by pressing the K button.
U
265
After Delete
G button ➜ D playback menu
Choose the picture displayed after an image is deleted.
Option
Show
S
next
Show
T
previous
Description
Display following picture. If deleted picture was last frame,
previous picture will be displayed.
Display previous picture. If deleted picture was first frame,
following picture will be displayed.
If user was scrolling through pictures in order recorded,
following picture will be displayed as described for Show
Continue
U
next. If user was scrolling through pictures in reverse
as before
order, previous picture will be displayed as described for
Show previous.
Rotate Tall
G button ➜ D playback menu
Choose whether to rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures for
display during playback. Note that because the camera itself is
already in the appropriate orientation during shooting, images are
not rotated automatically during image review.
Option
On
Off
U
266
Description
“Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are automatically rotated for
display in the camera monitor. Pictures taken with Off selected for
Auto image rotation (0 331) will be displayed in “wide”
(landscape) orientation.
“Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are displayed in “wide”
(landscape) orientation.
Slide Show
G button ➜ D playback menu
Create a slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder
(0 260). Hidden images (0 260) are not displayed.
Option
Start
Image type
Frame interval
Description
Start slide show.
Choose type of image displayed from Still images and
movies, Still images only, and Movies only.
Choose how long each photo will be displayed.
To start the slide show, highlight Start and
press J. The following operations can be
performed while the slide show is in
progress:
To
Skip back/skip
ahead
View additional
photo info
Pause/resume
Exit to playback
menu
Exit to playback
mode
Exit to shooting
mode
Press
J
Description
Press 4 to return to previous frame, 2 to skip
to next frame.
Change photo info displayed (still images
only; 0 222).
Pause or resume slide show.
G End slide show and return to playback menu.
K
End slide show and exit to full-frame (0 219)
or thumbnail playback (0 219).
Press shutter-release button halfway to return
to shooting mode.
The dialog shown at right is displayed when
the show ends. Select Restart to restart or
Exit to return to the playback menu.
U
267
C The Shooting Menu:
Shooting Options
To display the shooting menu, press G and select the C
(shooting menu) tab.
G button
Option
Shooting menu bank
Extended menu banks
Storage folder
File naming
Primary slot selection
Secondary slot function
Image quality
Image size
Image area
JPEG compression
NEF (RAW) recording
White balance
Set Picture Control
A
0
269
270
271
273
89
89
84
87
79
86
86
145
163
Option
Manage Picture Control
Color space
Active D-Lighting
HDR (high dynamic range)
Vignette control
Auto distortion control
Long exposure NR
High ISO NR
ISO sensitivity settings
Multiple exposure
Interval timer shooting
Time-lapse photography
Movie settings
See Also
Menu defaults are listed on page 405.
U
268
0
169
274
174
176
275
276
277
277
109
195
201
207
70
Shooting Menu Bank
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Shooting menu options are stored in one of four banks. With the
exceptions of Extended menu banks, Interval timer shooting,
Multiple exposure, Time-lapse photography, and modifications
to Picture Controls (quick adjust and other manual adjustments),
changes to settings in one bank have no effect on the others. To
store a particular combination of frequently-used settings, select one
of the four banks and set the camera to these settings. The new
settings will be stored in the bank even when the camera is turned
off, and will be restored the next time the bank is selected. Different
combinations of settings can be stored in the other banks,
allowing the user to switch instantly from one combination to
another by selecting the appropriate bank from the bank menu.
The default names for the four shooting menu banks are A, B, C,
and D. A descriptive caption of up to 20 characters in length can
be added by highlighting the menu bank and pressing 2 as
described on page 170.
A
Shooting Menu Bank
The information display shows the current
shooting menu bank.
A
See Also
Exposure mode, shutter speed, and aperture can be included in
shooting menu banks using the Extended menu banks option in the
shooting menu (0 270).
U
269
❚❚ Restoring Default Settings
To restore default settings,
highlight a bank in the
Shooting menu bank menu
and press O (Q). A
confirmation dialog will be
displayed; highlight Yes and
O (Q) button
press J to restore default
settings for the selected bank.
See page 405 for a list of default
settings.
Extended Menu Banks
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Select On to include exposure mode, shutter
speed (modes f and h only), and aperture
(modes g and h only) in the information
recorded in each of the four shooting menu
banks, to be recalled whenever the bank is
selected. Selecting Off restores the values in
effect before On was selected.
U
270
Storage Folder
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Select the folder in which subsequent images will be stored.
❚❚ Select Folder by Number
1
Choose Select folder by
number.
Highlight Select folder by
number and press 2. The
dialog shown at right will be
displayed, with the current
primary slot (0 89) underlined.
2
Choose a folder number.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight a digit, press 1 or 3 to change. If a
folder with the selected number already exists, a W, X, or Y
icon will be displayed to the left of the folder number:
• W : Folder is empty.
• X : Folder is partially full.
• Y : Folder contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered
9999. No further pictures can be stored in this folder.
3
Save changes and exit.
Press J to complete the operation and return to the shooting
menu (to exit without changing the storage folder, press the
G button). If a folder with the specified number does not
already exist, a new folder will be created on the card in the
primary slot. Subsequent photographs will be stored in the
selected folder unless it is already full.
U
271
❚❚ Select Folder from List
1
Choose Select folder from
list.
Highlight Select folder from
list and press 2.
2
Highlight a folder.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a folder.
3
Select the highlighted folder.
Press J to select the highlighted folder and return to the
shooting menu. Subsequent photographs will be stored in
the selected folder.
D
Folder and File Numbers
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains 999 pictures or a
picture numbered 9999, the shutter-release will be disabled and no
further photographs can be taken. To continue shooting, create a folder
with a number less than 999, or select an existing folder with a number
less than 999 and less than 999 images.
A
Startup Time
Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card
contains a very large number of files or folders.
U
272
File Naming
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Photographs are saved using file names consisting of “DSC_” or, in
the case of images that use the Adobe RGB color space (0 274),
“_DSC”, followed by a four-digit number and a three-letter
extension (e.g., “DSC_0001.JPG”). The File naming option is used
to select three letters to replace the “DSC” portion of the file name.
For information on editing file names, see page 170.
A
Extensions
The following extensions are used: “.NEF” for NEF (RAW) images, “.TIF”
for TIFF (RGB) images, “.JPG” for JPEG images, “.MOV” for movies, and
“.NDF” for dust off reference data. In each pair of photographs recorded
at image-quality settings of NEF (RAW)+JPEG, the NEF and JPEG images
have the same file names but different extensions.
U
273
Color Space
G button ➜ C shooting menu
The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color
reproduction. Choose sRGB for photographs that will be printed
or used “as is,” with no further modification. Adobe RGB has a
wider color gamut and is recommended for images that will be
extensively processed or retouched after leaving the camera.
A
Color Space
Color spaces define the correspondence between colors and the
numeric values that represent them in a digital image file. The sRGB
color space is widely used, while the Adobe RGB color space is typically
used in publishing and commercial printing. sRGB is recommended
when taking photographs that will be printed without modification or
viewed in applications that do not support color management, or when
taking photographs that will be printed with ExifPrint, the direct
printing option on some household printers, or kiosk printing or other
commercial print services. Adobe RGB photographs can also be printed
using these options, but colors will not be as vivid.
JPEG photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space are DCF
compliant; applications and printers that support DCF will select the
correct color space automatically. If the application or device does not
support DCF, select the appropriate color space manually. An ICC color
profile is embedded in TIFF photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color
space, allowing applications that support color management to
automatically select the correct color space. For more information, see
the documentation provided with the application or device.
A
Nikon Software
ViewNX 2 (supplied) and Capture NX 2 (available separately)
automatically select the correct color space when opening photographs
created with this camera.
U
274
Vignette Control
G button ➜ C shooting menu
“Vignetting” is a drop in brightness at the edges of a photograph.
Vignette control reduces vignetting for type G and D lenses (DX
and PC lenses excluded). Its effects vary from lens to lens and are
most noticeable at maximum aperture. Choose from High,
Normal, Low, and Off.
A
Vignette Control
Depending on the scene, shooting conditions, and type of lens, TIFF
and JPEG images may exhibit noise (fog) or variations in peripheral
brightness, while custom Picture Controls and preset Picture Controls
that have been modified from default settings may not produce the
desired effect. Take test shots and view the results in the monitor.
Vignette control does not apply to movies (0 59) or multiple exposures
(0 195) or DX-format images (0 79).
U
275
Auto Distortion Control
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Select On to reduce barrel distortion in
photos taken with wide-angle lenses and to
reduce pin-cushion distortion in photos
taken with long lenses (note that the edges
of the area visible in the viewfinder may be
cropped out of the final photograph, and
that the time needed to process photographs before recording
begins may increase). This option does not apply to movies and is
available only with type G and D lenses (PC, fisheye, and certain
other lenses excluded); results are not guaranteed with other
lenses. Before using auto distortion control with DX lenses, select
On for Auto DX crop or choose an image area of DX (24×16) 1.5×
(0 80); selecting other options may result in heavily cropped
photographs or in photographs with severe peripheral distortion.
A
Retouch: Distortion Control
For information on creating copies of existing photographs with
reduced barrel and pin-cushion distortion, see page 358.
U
276
Long Exposure NR
(Long Exposure Noise Reduction)
G button ➜ C shooting menu
If On is selected, photographs taken at
shutter speeds slower than 1 s will be
processed to reduce noise (bright spots,
randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog). The
time required for processing roughly
doubles; during processing, “l m” will
blink in the shutter speed/aperture displays
and pictures can not be taken (if the camera
is turned off before processing is complete, the picture will be
saved but noise reduction will not be performed). In continuous
release mode, frame rates will slow and while photographs are
being processed, the capacity of the memory buffer will drop.
Long exposure noise reduction is not available during movie
recording.
High ISO NR
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to
reduce noise.
Option
High
Normal
Low
Off
Description
Reduce noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, lines, or fog),
particularly in photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities.
Choose the amount of noise reduction performed from High,
Normal, and Low.
Noise reduction is performed only at sensitivities of 1600 and
higher. The amount of noise reduction is less than the amount
performed when Low is selected for High ISO NR.
U
277
A Custom Settings:
Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
To display the Custom Settings menu, press G and select the
A (Custom Settings menu) tab.
G button
Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings to suit
individual preferences.
Custom Setting groups
Main menu
U
278
Custom settings
bank (0 280)
The following Custom Settings are available:
a
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
a8
b
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
c
c1
c2
c3
c4
d
d1
d2
d3
d4
d5
d6
d7
d8
d9
d10
d11
d12
Custom Setting
Custom settings bank
Autofocus
AF-C priority selection
AF-S priority selection
Focus tracking with lock-on
AF activation
AF point illumination
Focus point wrap-around
Number of focus points
Built-in AF-assist illuminator
Metering/exposure
ISO sensitivity step value
EV steps for exposure cntrl
Exp./flash comp. step value
Easy exposure compensation
Center-weighted area
Fine-tune optimal exposure
Timers/AE lock
Shutter-release button AE-L
Auto meter-off delay
Self-timer
Monitor off delay
Shooting/display
Beep
CL mode shooting speed
Max. continuous release
Exposure delay mode
File number sequence
Viewfinder grid display
ISO display and adjustment
Screen tips
Information display
LCD illumination
MB-D12 battery type
Battery order
0
280
281
282
283
283
284
284
285
286
287
287
287
288
289
290
290
291
291
292
292
293
293
293
294
295
295
295
296
296
297
298
e
e1
e2
e3
e4
e5
e6
e7
f
f1
f2
f3
f4
f5
f6
f7
f8
f9
f10
f11
f12
f13
g
g1
g2
g3
g4
Custom Setting
Bracketing/flash
Flash sync speed
Flash shutter speed
Flash control for built-in flash
Modeling flash
Auto bracketing set
Auto bracketing (Mode M)
Bracketing order
Controls
D switch
Multi selector center button
Multi selector
Assign Fn button
Assign preview button
Assign AE-L/AF-L button
Shutter spd & aperture lock
Assign BKT button
Customize command dials
Release button to use dial
Slot empty release lock
Reverse indicators
Assign MB-D12 AF-ON
Movie
Assign Fn button
Assign preview button
Assign AE-L/AF-L button
Assign shutter button
0
299
300
301
307
307
308
308
309
309
310
311
315
315
316
316
317
318
319
319
320
321
322
323
324
U
279
Custom Settings Bank
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Custom Settings are stored in one of four banks. Changes to
settings in one bank have no effect on the others. To store a
particular combination of frequently-used settings, select one of
the four banks and set the camera to these settings. The new
settings will be stored in the bank even when the camera is turned
off, and will be restored the next time the bank is selected.
Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other
banks, allowing the user to switch instantly from one combination
to another by selecting the appropriate bank from the bank menu.
The default names for the four Custom Settings banks are A, B, C,
and D. A descriptive caption of up to 20 characters in length can be
added by highlighting the menu bank and pressing 2 as described
on page 170.
❚❚ Restoring Default Settings
To restore default settings,
highlight a bank in the Custom
settings bank menu and press
O (Q). A confirmation dialog
will be displayed; highlight Yes
and press J to restore default
O (Q) button
settings for the selected bank
(0 407).
A
Custom Settings Bank
The information display shows the current
Custom Settings bank.
U
280
A
See Also
Menu defaults are listed on page 407. If settings in the current bank
have been modified from default values, an asterisk will be displayed
adjacent to the altered settings in the second level of the Custom
Settings menu.
a: Autofocus
a1: AF-C Priority Selection
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
When AF-C (0 91) is selected for viewfinder photography, this
option controls whether photographs can be taken whenever the
shutter-release button is pressed (release priority) or only when the
camera is in focus (focus priority).
Option
G Release
E
Release +
focus
F Focus
Description
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release
button is pressed.
Photos can be taken even when the camera is not in
focus. In continuous mode, frame rate slows for
improved focus if the subject is dark or low contrast.
Photos can only be taken when the in-focus indicator
(I) is displayed.
Regardless of the option selected, focus will not lock when AF-C is
selected for autofocus mode. The camera will continue to adjust
focus until the shutter is released.
U
281
a2: AF-S Priority Selection
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
When AF-S (0 91) is selected for viewfinder photography, this
option controls whether photographs can be taken only when the
camera is in focus (focus priority) or whenever the shutter-release
button is pressed (release priority) in single-servo AF.
Option
G Release
F Focus
Description
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release
button is pressed.
Photos can only be taken when the in-focus indicator
(I) is displayed.
Regardless of the option selected, if the in-focus indicator (I) is
displayed when AF-S is selected for autofocus mode, focus will lock
while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Focus lock
continues until the shutter is released.
U
282
a3: Focus Tracking with Lock-On
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
This option controls how autofocus adjusts to sudden large
changes in the distance to the subject when AF-C (0 91) is selected
during viewfinder photography.
Option
C 5 (Long)
Description
When the distance to the subject changes abruptly, the
camera waits for the specified period before adjusting
D 3 (Normal) the distance to the subject. This prevents the camera
from refocusing when the subject is briefly obscured by
) 2
objects passing through the frame.
E 1 (Short)
The camera immediately adjusts focus when the
distance to the subject changes. Use when
Off
photographing a series of subjects at varying distances
in quick succession.
( 4
a4: AF Activation
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
If Shutter/AF-ON is selected, both the
shutter-release button and the B button
can be used to initiate autofocus. If AF-ON
only is selected, autofocus is only initiated
when the B button is pressed.
U
283
a5: AF point Illumination
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose whether the active focus point is highlighted in red in the
viewfinder.
Option
Auto
On
Off
Description
The selected focus point is automatically highlighted as
needed to establish contrast with the background.
The selected focus point is always highlighted, regardless of
the brightness of the background. Depending on the
brightness of the background, the selected focus point may
be difficult to see.
The selected focus point is not highlighted. The area
outside the current crop is shown in grey (0 81).
a6: Focus Point Wrap-Around
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose whether focus-point selection “wraps around” from one
edge of the viewfinder to another.
Option
Wrap
No wrap
U
284
Description
Focus-point selection “wraps around”
from top to bottom, bottom to top,
w
q
right to left, and left to right, so that,
for example, pressing 2 when a focus
point at the right edge of the
viewfinder display is highlighted (q) selects the
corresponding focus point at the left edge of the display (w).
The focus-point display is bounded by the outermost focus
points so that, for example, pressing 2 when a focus point at
the right edge of the display is selected has no effect.
a7: Number of Focus Points
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the number of focus points available for manual focuspoint selection.
Option
B 51 points
Description
Choose from the 51 focus points
shown at right.
Choose from the 11 focus points
A 11 points shown at right. Use for quick focuspoint selection.
U
285
a8: Built-in AF-assist Illuminator
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose whether the built-in AF-assist
illuminator lights to assist the focus operation
when lighting is poor.
Option
On
Off
Description
The AF-assist illuminator lights when lighting is poor
(viewfinder photography only). AF-assist illumination is only
available when both of the following conditions are met:
1 AF-S is selected for autofocus mode (0 91).
2 Auto-area AF is chosen for AF-area mode (0 93), or an option
other than auto-area AF is chosen and the center focus point
is selected.
The AF-assist illuminator does not light to assist the focus
operation. The camera may not be able to focus using
autofocus when lighting is poor.
A
The AF-Assist Illuminator
The AF-assist illuminator has a range of about 0.5–3.0 m (1 ft 8 in.–9 ft
10 in.); when using the illuminator, use a lens with a focal length of 24–
200 mm and remove the lens hood.
A
See Also
See page 377 for restrictions on the lenses that can be used with AF
assist.
U
286
b: Metering/Exposure
b1: ISO Sensitivity Step Value
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Select the increments used when making
adjustments to ISO sensitivity (0 109). If
possible, the current ISO sensitivity setting is
maintained when the step value is changed.
If the current ISO sensitivity setting is not
available at the new step value, ISO
sensitivity will be rounded to the nearest available setting.
b2: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Select the increments used when making
adjustments to shutter speed, aperture, and
bracketing.
b3: Exp./Flash Comp. Step Value
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Select the increments used when making
adjustments to exposure and flash
compensation.
U
287
b4: Easy Exposure Compensation
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
This option controls whether the E button is needed to set
exposure compensation (0 130). If On (Auto reset) or On is
selected, the 0 at the center of the exposure display will blink even
when exposure compensation is set to ±0.
Option
Description
Exposure compensation is set by rotating one of the
command dials (see note below). The setting selected
On (Auto reset) using the command dial is reset when the camera or
exposure meters turn off (exposure compensation settings
selected using the E button are not reset).
As above, except that the exposure compensation value
On
selected using the command dial is not reset when the
camera or exposure meters turn off.
Exposure compensation is set by pressing the E button
Off
and rotating the main command dial.
A
Change Main/Sub
The dial used to set exposure compensation when On (Auto reset) or
On is selected for Custom Setting b4 (Easy exposure compensation)
depends on the option selected for Custom Setting f9 (Customize
command dials) > Change main/sub (0 317).
Exposure
mode
U
288
e
f
g
h
Customize command dials > Change main/sub
Off
On
Sub-command dial
Sub-command dial
Sub-command dial
Main command dial
Main command dial
Sub-command dial
N/A
A
Show ISO/Easy ISO
Custom Setting b4 (Easy exposure compensation) can not be used
with Custom Setting d7 (ISO display and adjustment) > Show ISO/
Easy ISO (0 295). Adjustments to either of these items reset the
remaining item; a message is displayed when the item is reset.
b5: Center-Weighted Area
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
When calculating exposure, center-weighted
metering assigns the greatest weight to a
circle in the center of the frame. The
diameter (φ ) of this circle can be set to 8, 12,
15, or 20 mm or to the average of the entire
frame.
Note that unless Average is selected, the diameter is fixed at
12 mm when a non-CPU lens is used, regardless of the setting
selected for Non-CPU lens data in the setup menu (0 212). When
Average is selected, the average of the entire frame will be used for
both CPU and non-CPU lenses.
U
289
b6: Fine-Tune Optimal Exposure
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Use this option to fine-tune the exposure
value selected by the camera. Exposure can
be fine-tuned separately for each metering
method by from +1 to –1 EV in steps of 1/6 EV.
D
Fine-Tuning Exposure
Exposure can be fine-tuned separately for each Custom Settings bank
and is not affected by two-button resets. Note that as the exposure
compensation (E) icon is not displayed, the only way to determine how
much exposure has been altered is to view the amount in the finetuning menu. Exposure compensation (0 130) is preferred in most
situations.
c: Timers/AE Lock
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
If On is selected, exposure will lock when the
shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
U
290
c2: Auto Meter-off Delay
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose how long the camera continues to
meter exposure when no operations are
performed. The shutter-speed and aperture
displays in the control panel and viewfinder
turn off automatically when the exposure
meters turn off.
Choose a shorter meter-off delay for longer battery life.
c3: Self-Timer
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the length of the shutter release
delay, the number of shots taken, and the
interval between shots in self-timer mode
(0 106).
• Self-timer delay: Choose the length of the
shutter-release delay.
• Number of shots: Press 1 and 3 to choose the
number of shots taken each time the
shutter-release button is pressed.
• Interval between shots: Choose the interval
between shots when the Number of shots
is more than 1.
U
291
c4: Monitor off Delay
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose how long the monitor remains on
when no operations are performed during
playback (Playback; defaults to 10 s) and
image review (Image review; defaults to 4 s),
when menus (Menus; defaults to 1 minute)
or information (Information display;
defaults to 10 s) are displayed, or during live view and movie
recording (Live view; defaults to 10 minutes). Choose a shorter
monitor-off delay for longer battery life.
d: Shooting/Display
d1: Beep
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the pitch and volume of the beep that sounds when the
camera focuses using single-servo AF (0 91), when focus locks
during live view photography, while the release timer is counting
down in self-timer mode (0 106), when time-lapse photography
ends (0 207), or if you attempt to take a photograph when the
memory card is locked (0 34). Note that a beep will not sound in
movie live view (0 59) or quiet-shutter release mode (mode J;
0 103), regardless of the option selected.
• Volume: Choose 3 (high), 2 (medium), 1 (low)
or Off (mute). When an option other than
Off is selected, c appears in the control
panel and information display.
• Pitch: Choose High or Low.
U
292
d2: CL Mode Shooting Speed
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the maximum frame advance rate in
CL (continuous low speed) mode (0 104;
during interval timer photography, this
setting also determines the frame advance
rate for single-frame).
d3: Max. Continuous Release
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
The maximum number of shots that can be
taken in a single burst in continuous mode
can be set to any value between 1 and 100.
A
The Memory Buffer
Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d3, shooting will
slow when the memory buffer fills (t00). See page 436 for more
information on the capacity of the memory buffer.
d4: Exposure Delay Mode
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
In situations where the slightest camera
movement can blur pictures, select 1 s, 2 s, or
3 s to delay shutter release until one, two, or
three seconds after the mirror is raised.
U
293
d5: File Number Sequence
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
When a photograph is taken, the camera
names the file by adding one to the last file
number used. This option controls whether
file numbering continues from the last
number used when a new folder is created,
the memory card is formatted, or a new
memory card is inserted in the camera.
Option
On
Off
Reset
D
Description
When a new folder is created, the memory card formatted, or a
new memory card inserted in the camera, file numbering
continues from the last number used or from the largest file
number in the current folder, whichever is higher. If a
photograph is taken when the current folder contains a
photograph numbered 9999, a new folder will be created
automatically and file numbering will begin again from 0001.
File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created,
the memory card is formatted, or a new memory card is
inserted in the camera. Note that a new folder is created
automatically if a photograph is taken when the current folder
contains 999 photographs.
As for On, except that the next photograph taken is assigned a
file number by adding one to the largest file number in the
current folder. If the folder is empty, file numbering is reset to
0001.
File Number Sequence
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999
photographs or a photograph numbered 9999, the shutter-release
button will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken.
Choose Reset for Custom Setting d5 (File number sequence) and then
either format the current memory card or insert a new memory card.
U
294
d6: Viewfinder Grid Display
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose On to display on-demand grid lines in
the viewfinder for reference when composing
photographs (0 8).
d7: ISO Display and Adjustment
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
If Show ISO sensitivity or Show ISO/Easy ISO is selected, the
control panel will show ISO sensitivity in place of the number of
exposures remaining. If Show ISO/Easy ISO is selected, ISO
sensitivity can be set in exposure modes e and f by rotating the
sub-command dial or in mode g by rotating the main command
dial. Select Show frame count to display the number of exposures
remaining in the viewfinder and control panel.
d8: Screen Tips
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose On to display tool tips for items
selected in the information display (0 13).
U
295
d9: Information Display
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
If Auto (AUTO) is selected, the color of the lettering in the
information display (0 10) will automatically change from black to
white or white to black to maintain contrast with the background.
To always use the same color lettering, select Manual and choose
Dark on light (B; black lettering) or Light on dark (W; white
lettering). Monitor brightness will automatically be adjusted for
maximum contrast with the selected text color.
Dark on light
d10: LCD Illumination
Light on dark
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
If Off is selected, the control panel backlight
(LCD illuminator) will only light while the
power switch is rotated toward D. If On is
selected, the control panel will be illuminated
whenever the exposure meters are active
(0 42). Select Off for increased battery life.
U
296
d11: MB-D12 Battery Type
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
To ensure that the camera functions as expected when the
optional MB-D12 battery pack is used with AA batteries, match the
option selected in this menu to the type of batteries inserted in the
battery pack. There is no need to adjust this option when using
EN-EL15 or optional EN-EL18 batteries.
Option
1 LR6 (AA alkaline)
2 HR6 (AA Ni-MH)
3 FR6 (AA lithium)
Description
Select when using LR6 alkaline AA batteries.
Select when using HR6 Ni-MH AA batteries.
Select when using FR6 lithium AA batteries.
A
Using AA Batteries
The capacity of AA batteries drops sharply at temperatures below 20 °C
(68 °F) and varies with make and storage conditions; in some cases,
batteries may cease to function before their expiry date. Some AA
batteries can not be used; due to their performance characteristics and
limited capacity, alkaline batteries have less capacity than some other
types and should only be used if no alternative is available and then
only at warmer temperatures. The camera shows the level of AA
batteries as follows:
Control panel
L
I
H
(blinks)
Viewfinder
—
d
d
(blinks)
Description
Batteries fully charged.
Low battery. Ready fresh batteries.
Shutter release disabled. Change batteries.
U
297
d12: Battery Order
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose whether the battery in the camera or
the batteries in the battery pack are used first
when an optional MB-D12 battery pack is
attached. Note that if the MB-D12 is powered
by an optional EH-5b AC adapter and EP-5B
power connector, the AC adapter will be used
regardless of the option selected.
A s icon is displayed in the camera control
panel when the batteries in the MB-D12 are
in use.
A
The MB-D12 Battery Pack
The MB-D12 takes one EN-EL15 or EN-EL18 rechargeable Li-ion battery
or eight AA alkaline, Ni-MH, or lithium batteries (an EN-EL15 is supplied
with the camera; EN-EL18 and AA batteries are available separately).
The information display shows the type of
battery inserted in the MB-D12 as follows:
MB-D12 battery type display
v
x
u
U
298
Battery type
EN-EL15 rechargeable Li-ion battery
EN-EL18 rechargeable Li-ion battery
AA batteries
e: Bracketing/Flash
e1: Flash Sync Speed
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
This option controls flash sync speed.
Option
Description
Auto FP high-speed sync is used when a compatible flash
unit is attached (0 382). If the built-in flash or other flash
1/320 s
units are used, shutter speed is set to 1/320 s. When the
(Auto FP) camera shows a shutter speed of 1/320 s in exposure mode e
or g, auto FP high-speed sync will be activated if the actual
shutter speed is faster than 1/320 s.
Auto FP high-speed sync is used when a compatible flash
unit is attached (0 382). If the built-in flash or other flash
1/250 s
units are used, shutter speed is set to 1/250 s. When the
(Auto FP) camera shows a shutter speed of 1/250 s in exposure mode e
or g, auto FP high-speed sync will be activated if the actual
shutter speed is faster than 1/250 s.
1/250 s–1/60 s Flash sync speed set to selected value.
A
Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit
To fix shutter speed at the sync speed limit in shutter-priority auto or
manual exposure modes, select the next shutter speed after the slowest
possible shutter speed (30 s or bulb). An X (flash sync indicator) will be
displayed in the viewfinder and control panel.
A
Auto FP High-Speed Sync
Allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by
the camera, making it possible to choose the maximum aperture for
reduced depth of field even when the subject is backlit in bright
sunlight. The information display flash mode indicator shows “FP”
when auto FP high-speed sync is active (0 185).
U
299
❚❚ Auto FP High-Speed Sync
When 1/320 s (Auto FP) or 1/250 s (Auto FP) is selected for
Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed, 0 299), the built-in flash can
be used at shutter speeds as fast as 1/320 s or 1/250 s, while
compatible optional flash units (0 382) can be used at any shutter
speed (Auto FP High-Speed Sync).
Flash sync speed 1/320 s (Auto FP) 1/250 s (Auto FP)
1/250 s
Built-in Optional Built-in Optional Built-in Optional
Shutter speed
flash flash unit flash flash unit flash flash unit
From 1/8,000 to but
— Auto FP — Auto FP —
—
not including 1/320 s
1
From /320 to but not
— Auto FP —
—
Flash sync *
including 1/250 s
1/250–30 s
Flash sync
* Flash range drops as shutter speed increases. Flash range will nevertheless
be greater than that obtained at the same speeds with Auto FP.
D
The Flash-Ready Indicator
When the flash fires at full power, the flash-indicator in the camera
viewfinder will blink to warn that the resulting photograph may be
underexposed. Note that the flash-ready indicators on optional flash
units will not display this warning when 1/320 s (Auto FP) is selected.
e2: Flash Shutter Speed
U
300
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
This option determines the slowest shutter
speed available when using front- or rearcurtain sync or red-eye reduction in
programmed auto or aperture-priority auto
exposure modes (regardless of the setting
chosen, shutter speeds can be as slow as 30 s
in shutter-priority auto and manual exposure modes or at flash
settings of slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, or red-eye reduction
with slow sync). Options range from 1/60 s (1/60 s) to 30 s (30 s).
e3: Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the flash mode for the built-in flash.
Option
Description
Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to
r TTL
shooting conditions.
Choose the flash level. The camera does not emit
s Manual
monitor pre-flashes.
Repeating The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is open,
t
flash
producing a strobe-light effect.
Use the built-in flash as a master flash controlling
Commander
u
remote optional flash units in one or more groups
mode
(0 303).
❚❚ Manual
Choose a flash level between Full and 1/128 (1/128 of full power). At
full power, the built-in flash has a Guide Number of 12/39 (m/ft, ISO
100, 20 °C/68 °F).
❚❚ Repeating Flash
The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is
open, producing a strobe-light effect. Press 4
or 2 to highlight the following options, 1 or
3 to change.
Option
Output
Times
Frequency
Description
Choose flash output (expressed as a fraction of full power).
Choose the number of times the flash fires at the selected
output. Note that depending on shutter speed and the
option selected for Frequency, the actual number of flashes
may be less than selected.
Choose how often the flash fires per second.
U
301
A
Flash Control Mode
The flash control mode for the built-in flash is
shown in the information display.
A
“Manual” and “Repeating Flash”
Y icons blink in the control panel and viewfinder when these options
are selected.
A
The SB-400
When an optional SB-400 flash unit is attached
and turned on, Custom Setting e3 changes to
Optional flash, allowing the flash control mode
for the SB-400 to be selected from TTL and
Manual (Repeating flash and Commander
mode options are not available).
A
“Times“
The options available for Repeating Flash > Times are determined by
flash output.
Output Options available for “Times”
Output Options available for “Times”
1/4
2
1/32
2–10, 15
1/8
2–5
1/64
2–10, 15, 20, 25
1/16
2–10
1/128
2–10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35
U
302
❚❚ Commander Mode
Use the built-in flash as a master flash controlling one or more
remote optional flash units in up to two groups (A and B) using
advanced wireless lighting (0 382).
Selecting this option displays the menu
shown at right. Press 4 or 2 to highlight the
following options, 1 or 3 to change.
Option
Built-in
flash
Description
Choose a flash mode for the built-in flash (commander flash).
i-TTL mode. Choose flash compensation from values between
+3.0 and –3.0 EV in increments of 1/3 EV.
Choose the flash level from values between 1/1 and 1/128
M
(1/128 of full power).
The built-in flash does not fire, although remote flash units do.
– – The built-in flash must be raised so that it can emit monitor
pre-flashes.
Group A Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group A.
i-TTL mode. Choose flash compensation from values between
TTL
+3.0 and –3.0 EV in increments of 1/3 EV.
Auto aperture (available only with compatible flash units;
AA 0 382). Choose flash compensation from values between +3.0
and –3.0 EV in increments of 1/3 EV.
Choose the flash level from values between 1/1 and 1/128
M
(1/128 of full power).
– – The flash units in this group do not fire.
Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group B. The options
Group B
available are the same as those listed for Group A, above.
Choose from channels 1–4. All flash units in both groups must
Channel
be set to the same channel.
TTL
U
303
Follow the steps below to take photographs in commander mode.
1
Adjust settings for the built-in flash.
Choose the flash control mode and
output level for the built-in flash. Note
that output level can not be adjusted in
– – mode.
2
Adjust settings for group A.
Choose the flash control mode and
output level for the flash units in group A.
3
Adjust settings for group B.
Choose the flash control mode and
output level for the flash units in group B.
U
304
4
Select the channel.
5
Press J.
6
Compose the shot.
Compose the shot and arrange the flash units as shown below.
Note that the maximum distance at which the remote flash
units can be placed may vary with shooting conditions.
10 m/
33 ft or less
60 ° or less
30 ° or
less
30 ° or
less
60 ° or less
7
5 m/
15 ft or less
Wireless remote
sensors on flash
units should face
camera.
5 m/
15 ft or less
Configure the remote flash units.
Turn all the remote flash units on, adjust group settings as
desired, and set them to the channel selected in Step 4. See
the flash unit instruction manuals for details.
8
Raise the built-in flash.
Press the flash pop-up button to raise the built-in flash. Note
that even if – – is selected for Built-in flash > Mode, the builtin flash must be raised so that monitor preflashes will be
emitted.
9
Frame the photograph, focus, and shoot.
After confirming that the camera flash-ready light and the
flash-ready lights for all other flash units are lit, frame the
photograph, focus, and shoot. FV lock (0 190) can be used if
desired.
U
305
A
The Flash Sync Mode Display
M does not appear in the control panel flash sync mode display when – –
is selected for Built-in flash > Mode.
A
Flash Compensation
The flash compensation value selected with the M (Y) button and subcommand dial is added to the flash compensation values selected for
the built-in flash, group A, and group B in the Commander mode
menu. A Y icon is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder when
a flash compensation value other than ±0 is selected for Built-in flash >
TTL. The Y icon flashes when the built-in flash is in mode M.
D
Commander Mode
Position the sensor windows on the remote flash units to pick up the
light from the built-in flash (particular care is required if the camera is
not mounted on a tripod). Be sure that direct light or strong reflections
from the remote flash units do not enter the camera lens (in TTL mode)
or the photocells on the remote flash units (AA mode), as this may
interfere with exposure. To prevent timing flashes emitted by the builtin flash from appearing in photographs taken at short range, choose
low ISO sensitivities or small apertures (large f-numbers) or use an
optional SG-3IR infrared panel for the built-in flash. An SG-3IR is
required for best results with rear-curtain sync, which produces brighter
timing flashes. After positioning the remote flash units, take a test shot
and view the results in the camera monitor.
Although there is no limit on the number of remote flash units that may
be used, the practical maximum is three. With more than this number,
the light emitted by the remote flash units will interfere with
performance.
U
306
e4: Modeling Flash
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
If On is selected when the camera is used
with the built-in flash or an optional CLScompatible flash unit (0 381), a modeling
flash will be emitted when the camera depthof-field preview button is pressed (0 117).
No modeling flash is emitted if Off is
selected.
e5: Auto Bracketing Set
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto bracketing
(0 132) is in effect. Choose AE & flash (j) to perform both
exposure and flash-level bracketing, AE only (k) to bracket only
exposure, Flash only (l) to perform only flash-level bracketing, WB
bracketing (m) to perform white balance bracketing (0 137), or
ADL bracketing to perform bracketing using Active D-Lighting
(0 141). Note that white balance bracketing is not available at
image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG.
U
307
e6: Auto Bracketing (Mode M)
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
This option determines which settings are affected when AE &
flash or AE only is selected for Custom Setting e5 in manual
exposure mode.
Option
F Flash/speed
Flash/speed/
G aperture
H Flash/aperture
I
Flash only
Description
Camera varies shutter speed (Custom Setting e5
set to AE only) or shutter speed and flash level
(Custom Setting e5 set to AE & flash).
Camera varies shutter speed and aperture (Custom
Setting e5 set to AE only) or shutter speed,
aperture, and flash level (Custom Setting e5 set to
AE & flash).
Camera varies aperture (Custom Setting e5 set to
AE only) or aperture and flash level (Custom
Setting e5 set to AE & flash).
Camera varies flash level only (Custom Setting e5
set to AE & flash).
Flash bracketing is performed only with i-TTL or AA flash control. If
a setting other than Flash only is selected and the flash is not used,
ISO sensitivity will be fixed at the value for the first shot, regardless
of the setting selected for auto ISO sensitivity control (0 111).
e7: Bracketing Order
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
At the default setting of MTR>under>over (H), exposure, flash,
and white balance bracketing are performed in the order
described on pages 134 and 138. If Under>MTR>over (I) is
selected, shooting will proceed in order from the lowest to the
highest value. This setting has no effect on ADL bracketing.
U
308
f: Controls
f1: D Switch
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose what happens when the power switch is rotated to D.
Option
Description
D LCD backlight (D) Control panel backlight illuminates for 6 s.
D and information Control panel backlight illuminates and
h display
shooting information is displayed in monitor.
f2: Multi Selector Center Button
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
This option determines the role assigned to the center of the multi
selector during viewfinder photography, playback, and live view
(regardless of the option selected, pressing the center of the multi
selector when a movie is displayed full frame starts movie
playback).
❚❚ Shooting Mode
Option
Role assigned to center of multi selector
Select center focus point.
K Highlight active focus point Highlight the active focus point.
Not used
None.
J Select center focus point
U
309
❚❚ Playback Mode
Option
Role assigned to center of multi selector
n Thumbnail on/off Toggle between full-frame and thumbnail playback.
In both full-frame and thumbnail playback,
o View histograms a histogram is displayed while the center of the
multi selector is pressed.
Toggle between full-frame or thumbnail playback
and playback zoom. Choose the initial zoom setting
from Low magnification, Medium magnification,
p Zoom on/off
and High magnification. The zoom display will
center on the active focus point.
Choose slot and
u
Display the slot and folder selection dialog (0 221).
folder
❚❚ Live View
J
Option
Select center
focus point
p Zoom on/off
Not used
Role assigned to center of multi selector
Pressing the center of the multi selector in live view
selects the center focus point.
Press the center of the multi selector to toggle zoom
on and off. Choose the initial zoom setting from
Low magnification, Medium magnification, and
High magnification. The zoom display will center
on the active focus point.
Pressing the center of the multi selector has no
effect in live view.
f3: Multi Selector
U
310
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
If Reset meter-off delay is selected,
operating the multi selector when the
exposure meters are off (0 42) will activate
the exposure meters. If Do nothing is
selected, the exposure meters will not be
activated when the multi selector is pressed.
f4: Assign Fn Button
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the role played by the Fn button,
either by itself (Fn button press) or when
used in combination with the command dials
(Fn button + command dials).
❚❚ Fn button press
Selecting Fn button press displays the following options:
q
Option
Preview *
r FV lock *
Description
Press the Fn button to preview depth of field (0 117).
Press the Fn button to lock flash value (built-in flash and
compatible optional flash units only, 0 190, 382). Press
again to cancel FV lock.
Focus and exposure lock while the Fn button is pressed.
B AE/AF lock
C AE lock only Exposure locks while the Fn button is pressed.
Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed, and
remains locked until the button is pressed a second
time, the shutter is released, or the exposure meters
turn off.
Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed, and
AE lock
remains locked until the button is pressed a second
E (Hold) *
time or the exposure meters turn off.
AF
lock
only
Focus
locks while the Fn button is pressed.
F
AE lock
D (Reset on
release) *
A AF-ON *
s Flash off
Pressing the Fn button initiates autofocus.
The flash will not fire in photos taken while the Fn
button is pressed.
U
311
Option
Bracketing
1 burst
Matrix
L metering
Center-
M weighted
N
metering
Spot
metering
K Playback *
Access top
3 item in MY
MENU *
4
U
312
+ NEF
(RAW) *
Description
If the Fn button is pressed while exposure, flash, or ADL
bracketing is active in single frame or quiet shutterrelease mode, all shots in the current bracketing
program will be taken each time the shutter-release
button is pressed. If white balance bracketing is active
or continuous release mode (mode CH or CL) is selected,
the camera will repeat the bracketing burst while the
shutter-release button is held down.
Matrix metering is activated while the Fn button is
pressed.
Center-weighted metering is activated while the Fn
button is pressed.
Spot metering is activated while the Fn button is
pressed.
Fn button performs same function as K button. Select
when using a telephoto lens or in other circumstances
in which it is difficult to operate the K button with
your left hand.
Press the Fn button to jump to the top item in “MY
MENU.” Select this option for quick access to a
frequently-used menu item.
If image quality is set to JPEG fine, JPEG normal, or
JPEG basic, “RAW” will be displayed in the control
panel and an NEF (RAW) copy will be recorded with the
next picture taken after the Fn button is pressed (to
record NEF/RAW copies with a series of photographs,
keep the shutter-release button pressed halfway
between shots). To exit without recording an NEF
(RAW) copy, press the Fn button again.
Option
Viewfinder
! virtual
horizon *
None
Description
Press the Fn button to view a virtual horizon display in
the viewfinder (see below).
No operation is performed when the Fn button is
pressed.
* This option can not be used in combination with Fn button + command
dials (0 314). Selecting this option displays a message and sets Fn
button + command dials to None. If another option is selected for Fn
button + command dials while this setting is active, Fn button press will
be set to None.
A
Virtual Horizon
When Viewfinder virtual horizon is selected for Fn button press,
pressing the Fn button displays a pitch and roll indicators in the
viewfinder. Press the button a second time to return to clear the
indicators from display.
Roll
Camera tilted right
Camera level
Camera tilted left
Camera level
Camera tilted back
Pitch
Camera tilted forward
U
Note that the display may not be accurate when the camera is tilted at
a sharp angle forward or back.
313
❚❚ Fn button + command dials
Selecting Fn button + command dials displays the following
options:
Option
i
$
v
w
y
U
314
Description
Press the Fn button and
rotate a command dial to
choose from pre-selected
image areas (0 79).
Choose image
Selecting Choose image
area
area displays a list of
image areas; highlight
options and press the multi selector right to select
or deselect, then highlight Done and press J.
Press the Fn button and rotate the main command
dial to lock shutter speed in modes f and h; press
Shutter speed
the Fn button and rotate the sub-command dial to
& aperture lock
lock aperture in modes g and h. See page 126 for
more information.
If the Fn button is pressed when the command dials
are rotated, changes to shutter speed (exposure
1 step spd/
modes f and h) and aperture (exposure modes g
aperture
and h) are made in increments of 1 EV, regardless of
the option selected for Custom Setting b2 (EV
steps for exposure cntrl, 0 287).
Choose nonPress the Fn button and rotate a command dial to
CPU lens
choose a lens number specified using the Non-CPU
number
lens data option (0 212).
Active
Press the Fn button and rotate the command dials
D-Lighting
to adjust Active D-Lighting (0 174).
No operation is performed when the command
None
dials are rotated while the Fn button is pressed.
f5: Assign Preview Button
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the role played by the depth-of-field
preview button, either by itself (Preview
button press) or when used in combination
with the command dials (Preview +
command dials). The options available are
the same as for Assign Fn button (0 311),
except that AF-ON is not available for Assign preview button.
The default options for Preview button press and Preview +
command dials are Preview and None, respectively.
f6: Assign AE-L/AF-L button
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the role played by the A AE-L/AF-L
button, either by itself (AE-L/AF-L button
press) or when used in combination with the
command dials (AE-L/AF-L + command
dials). The options available are the same as
for Assign Fn button (0 311), except that 1
stp spd/aperture and Active D-Lighting are not available. The
default options for AE-L/AF-L button press and AE-L/AF-L +
command dials are AE/AF lock and None, respectively.
U
315
f7: Shutter Spd & Aperture Lock
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Selecting On for Shutter speed lock locks
shutter speed at the value currently selected
in mode f or h. Selecting On for Aperture
lock locks aperture at the value currently
selected in mode g or h. Shutter speed and
aperture lock are not available in mode e.
f8: Assign BKT Button
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the role played by the D button. If
high dynamic range or multiple exposure is
active while another function is assigned to
the D button, the D button can not be
used until high dynamic range or multiple
exposure photography ends.
Option
t
$
2
U
316
Description
Press the t button and rotate the command dials
Auto bracketing to choose the bracketing increment and number
of shots in the bracketing sequence (0 132).
Press the t button and rotate the command dials
Multiple exposure to choose the mode and number of shots for
multiple exposures (0 197).
Press the t button and rotate the command dials
HDR (high
to choose the mode and the exposure differential
dynamic range)
(0 176).
f9: Customize Command Dials
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
This option controls the operation of the main and sub-command
dials.
Option
Reverse
rotation
Change
main/sub
Aperture
setting
Description
Reverse the direction of rotation of the
command dials when they are used to
make adjustments to Exposure
compensation and/or Shutter speed/
aperture. Highlight options and press
the multi selector right to select or
deselect, then highlight Done and
press J. This setting also applies to the command dials for
optional MB-D12 multi-power battery packs.
If Off is selected, the main command
dial controls shutter speed and the subcommand dial controls aperture. If On
is selected, the main command dial will
control aperture and the sub-command
dial shutter speed. If On (Mode A) is
selected, the main command dial will
be used to set aperture in exposure mode g only. This setting
also applies to the command dials for the MB-D12.
If Sub-command dial is selected, aperture can only be
adjusted with the sub-command dial (or with the main
command dial if On is selected for Change main/sub). If
Aperture ring is selected, aperture can only be adjusted with
the lens aperture ring and the camera aperture display will
show aperture in increments of 1 EV (aperture for type G lenses
is still set using the sub-command dial). Note that regardless of
the setting chosen, the aperture ring must be used to adjust
aperture when a non-CPU lens is attached.
U
317
Option
Description
If Off is selected, the multi selector is used to choose the
picture displayed during full-frame playback, highlight
thumbnails, and navigate menus. If On or On (image review
excluded) is selected, the main command dial can be used to
choose the picture displayed during full-frame playback, move
the cursor left or right during thumbnail playback, and move
the menu highlight bar up or down. The sub-command dial is
Menus
used to display additional photo information in full-frame
and
playback and to move the cursor up or down during thumbnail
playback
playback. Select On (image review excluded) to prevent the
command dials from being used for playback during image
review. While menus are displayed, rotating the subcommand dial right displays the sub-menu for the selected
option, while rotating it left displays the previous menu. To
make a selection, press 2, the center of the multi selector, or
J.
f10: Release Button to Use Dial
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Selecting Yes allows adjustments that are normally made by
holding the I (Q), E, M (Y), D, S, T, U, or AF-mode
button and rotating a command dial to be made by rotating the
command dial after the button is released (this also applies to the
Fn and depth-of-field preview buttons if they have been assigned
Active D-Lighting using Custom Setting f4, Assign Fn button;
0 314, or Custom Setting f5, Assign preview button; 0 315).
Setting ends when any of the affected buttons is pressed again or
the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Except when No
limit is selected for Custom Setting c2 Auto meter-off delay,
setting will also end when the exposure meters turn off.
U
318
f11: Slot Empty Release Lock
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Selecting Enable release allows the shutter to be released when
no memory card is inserted, although no pictures will be recorded
(they will however be displayed in the monitor in demo mode). If
Release locked is selected, the shutter-release button is only
enabled when a memory card is inserted in the camera.
f12: Reverse Indicators
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
If
is selected, the exposure indicators in the
control panel, viewfinder, and information display are displayed
with negative values on the left and positive values on the right.
Select
to display positive values on the left and
negative values on the right.
U
319
f13: Assign MB-D12 AF-ON
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the function assigned to the
B button on the optional
MB-D12 battery pack.
Option
A AF-ON
Description
Pressing the MB-D12 B button initiates autofocus.
Press the MB-D12 B button to lock flash value
r FV lock
(built-in flash and compatible optional flash units only,
0 190, 382). Press again to cancel FV lock.
Focus and exposure lock while the MB-D12 B
B AE/AF lock
button is pressed.
Exposure locks while the MB-D12 B button is
C AE lock only
pressed.
Exposure locks when the MB-D12 B button is
AE lock (Reset pressed, and remains locked until the button is
D
pressed a second time, the shutter is released or the
on release)
exposure meters turn off.
Exposure locks when the MB-D12 B button is
E AE lock (Hold) pressed, and remains locked until the button is
pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn off.
F AF lock only Focus locks while the MB-D12 B button is pressed.
The MB-D12 B button performs the function
Same as Fn
G
button
selected for Custom Setting f4 (0 311).
U
320
g: Movie
g1: Assign Fn Button
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the role played by the Fn button during movie live view.
Option
Description
Aperture widens while the button is pressed. Use in
Power aperture combination with Custom Setting g2 (Assign
t
(open)
preview button) > Power aperture (close) for
button-controlled aperture adjustment.
Press the button during movie recording to add an
r Index marking index at the current position (0 63). Indices can be
used when viewing and editing movies.
Press the button to display information on shutter
View photo
speed, aperture, and other photo settings in place of
s
shooting info
movie recording information. Press again to return to
the movie recording display.
None
Pressing the button has no effect.
U
321
g2: Assign Preview Button
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the role played by the depth-of-field preview button
during movie live view.
Option
Description
Aperture narrows while the button is pressed. Use in
Power aperture combination with Custom Setting g1 (Assign Fn
q
(close)
button) > Power aperture (open) for buttoncontrolled aperture adjustment.
Press the button during movie recording to add an
r Index marking index at the current position (0 63). Indices can be
used when viewing and editing movies.
Press the button to display information on shutter
speed, aperture, and other photo settings in place of
View photo
s
movie recording information. Press again to return to
shooting info
the movie recording display.
None
Pressing the button has no effect.
A
Power Aperture
Power aperture is available only in exposure modes g and h and can not
be used during recording or while photo shooting info is displayed (a 6
icon indicates that power aperture can not be used). The display may
flicker while aperture is adjusted.
U
322
g3: Assign AE-L/AF-L button
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the role played by the A AE-L/AF-L button during movie live
view.
Option
r Index marking
s
View shooting
photo info
B AE/AF lock
C AE lock only
E AE lock (Hold)
F AF lock only
None
Description
Press the button during movie recording to add an
index at the current position (0 63). Indices can be
used when viewing and editing movies.
Press the button to display information on shutter
speed, aperture, and other photo settings in place of
movie recording information. Press again to return
to the movie recording display.
Focus and exposure lock while the button is
pressed.
Exposure locks while the button is pressed.
Exposure locks when the button is pressed, and
remains locked until the button is pressed a second
time or the exposure meters turn off.
Focus locks while the button is pressed.
Pressing the button has no effect.
U
323
g4: Assign Shutter Button
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the role played by pressing the shutter-release button
when 1 is selected with the live view selector.
Option
C Take photos
1 Record movies
A
Description
Press the shutter-release button all the way down to
end movie recording and take a photograph with an
aspect ratio of 16 : 9 (for information on image size,
see page 68).
Press the shutter-release button halfway to start
movie live view. You can then press the shutterrelease button halfway to focus and press it all the
way down to start or end recording. To end movie live
view, press the a button. The shutter-release buttons
on optional remote cords (0 390) function in the
same way as the camera shutter-release button.
Record Movies
When this option is selected, interval timer photography (0 201) is not
available and any functions assigned to the shutter release button (such
as taking photographs, measuring preset white balance, and taking
image dust-off reference photos) can not be used when 1 is selected
with the live view selector. Select Take photos to use these options.
U
324
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
To display the setup menu, press G and select the B (setup
menu) tab.
G button
Option
Format memory card
Monitor brightness
Clean image sensor
Lock mirror up for cleaning 1
Image Dust Off ref photo
HDMI
Flicker reduction
Time zone and date
Language
Auto image rotation
Battery info
0
326
326
394
397
327
256
329
329
330
331
332
Option
Wireless transmitter
Image comment
Copyright information
Save/load settings
GPS
Virtual horizon
Non-CPU lens data
AF fine-tune
Eye-Fi upload 2
Firmware version
0
245
333
334
335
218
337
212
338
339
340
1 Not available when battery is low.
2 Only available when compatible Eye-Fi memory card is inserted (0 340).
A
See Also
Menu defaults are listed on page 410.
U
325
Format Memory Card
G button ➜ B setup menu
To begin formatting, choose a memory card
slot and select Yes. Note that formatting
permanently deletes all pictures and other data
on the card in the selected slot. Before
formatting, be sure to make backup copies as
required.
D
During Formatting
Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards during formatting.
A
Two-Button Format
Memory cards can also be formatted by pressing the O (Q) and I
(Q) buttons for more than two seconds (0 32).
Monitor Brightness
G button ➜ B setup menu
Adjust the brightness of the monitor for playback, menus, and the
information display.
Option
Description
When the monitor is on, monitor brightness is automatically
Auto adjusted according to ambient lighting conditions. Care should
be taken not to cover the ambient brightness sensor (0 5).
Press 1 or 3 to choose monitor brightness. Choose higher
Manual values for increased brightness, lower values for reduced
brightness.
A
See Also
For information on adjusting monitor brightness in live view, see
page 53.
U
326
Image Dust Off Ref Photo
G button ➜ B setup menu
Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in
Capture NX 2 (available separately; for more information, see the
Capture NX 2 manual).
Image Dust Off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is
mounted on the camera. A non-DX lens with a focal length of at
least 50 mm is recommended. When using a zoom lens, zoom all
the way in.
1
Choose a start option.
Highlight one of the
following options and
press J. To exit without
acquiring image dust off
J button
data, press G.
• Start: The message shown
at right will be displayed and “rEF” will
appear in the viewfinder and control
panel displays.
• Clean sensor and then start: Select this
option to clean the image sensor
before starting. The message shown at
right will be displayed and “rEF” will
appear in the viewfinder and control
panel displays when cleaning is
complete.
D
Image Sensor Cleaning
Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is
performed can not be used with photographs taken after image
sensor cleaning is performed. Select Clean image sensor and
then start only if the dust off reference data will not be used with
existing photographs.
U
327
2
Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder.
With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a welllit, featureless white object, frame the object so that it fills the
viewfinder and then press the shutter-release button halfway.
In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity;
in manual focus mode, set focus to infinity manually.
3
Acquire dust off reference data.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to
acquire Image Dust Off reference data. The monitor turns off
when the shutter-release button is pressed.
If the reference object is too bright or too
dark, the camera may be unable to
acquire Image Dust Off reference data
and the message shown at right will be
displayed. Choose another reference
object and repeat the process from
Step 1.
D
Image Dust Off Reference Data
The same reference data can be used for
photographs taken with different lenses or at
different apertures. Reference images can not
be viewed using computer imaging software.
A grid pattern is displayed when reference
images are viewed on the camera.
U
328
Flicker Reduction
G button ➜ B setup menu
Reduce flicker and banding when shooting
under fluorescent or mercury-vapor lighting
during live view or movie recording. Choose
Auto to allow the camera to automatically
choose the correct frequency, or manually
match the frequency to that of the local AC
power supply.
D
Flicker Reduction
If Auto fails to produce the desired results and you are unsure as to the
frequency of the local power supply, test both the 50 and 60 Hz options
and choose the one that produces the best results. Flicker reduction
may not produce the desired results if the subject is very bright, in which
case you should try choosing a smaller aperture (larger f-number). To
prevent flicker, select mode h and choose a shutter speed adapted to the
frequency of the local power supply:
1/125 s, 1/60 s, or 1/30 s for 60 Hz; 1/100 s, 1/50 s, or 1/25 s for 50 Hz.
Time Zone and Date
G button ➜ B setup menu
Change time zones, set the camera clock, choose the date display
order, and turn daylight saving time on or off (0 27).
Option
Description
Choose a time zone. The camera clock is automatically set
Time zone
to the time in the new time zone.
Date and time Set the camera clock.
Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are
Date format
displayed.
Turn daylight saving time on or off. The camera clock will
Daylight
automatically be advanced or set back one hour. The
saving time
default setting is Off.
U
B blinks in the control panel when the clock is not set.
329
Language
G button ➜ B setup menu
Choose a language for camera menus and messages. The
following options are available.
Čeština
Dansk
Deutsch
English
Español
Français
Indonesia
Italiano
Nederlands
Norsk
Polski
Português
U
330
Czech
Danish
German
English
Spanish
French
Indonesian
Italian
Dutch
Norwegian
Polish
Portuguese
Русский
Română
Suomi
Svenska
Türkçe
Українська
Russian
Romanian
Finnish
Swedish
Turkish
Ukrainian
Arabic
Traditional Chinese
Simplified Chinese
Japanese
Korean
Thai
Auto Image Rotation
G button ➜ B setup menu
Photographs taken while On is selected contain information on
camera orientation, allowing them to be rotated automatically
during playback (0 266) or when viewed in ViewNX 2 (supplied)
or in Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0 389). The following
orientations are recorded:
Landscape (wide)
orientation
Camera rotated 90°
clockwise
Camera rotated 90°
counter-clockwise
Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected. Choose
this option when panning or taking photographs with the lens
pointing up or down.
A
Rotate Tall
To automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs for
display during playback, select On for the Rotate tall option in the
playback menu (0 266).
U
331
Battery Info
G button ➜ B setup menu
View information on the battery currently
inserted in the camera.
Item
Charge
Description
The current battery level expressed as a percentage.
The number of times the shutter has been released with the
current battery since the battery was last charged. Note that
No. of
the camera may sometimes release the shutter without
shots
recording a photograph, for example when measuring preset
white balance.
• This item is displayed only when the camera is powered by
an optional MB-D12 battery pack equipped with an EN-EL18
(available separately).
Calibration • j: Due to repeated use and recharging, calibration is
required to ensure that battery level can be measured
accurately; recalibrate battery before charging.
• —: Calibration not required.
A five-level display showing battery age. 0 (k) indicates that
battery performance is unimpaired, 4 (l) that the battery has
reached the end of its charging life and should be replaced.
Battery Note that fresh batteries charged at temperatures under
about 5 °C (41 °F) may show a temporary drop in charging life;
age
the battery age display will however return to normal once
the battery has been recharged at a temperature of about
20 °C (68 °F) or higher.
U
332
A
The MB-D12 Battery Pack
The display for the MB-D12 is shown at right. In
the case of EN-EL18 batteries, the display shows
whether calibration is required. If AA batteries
are used, the battery level will be shown by a
battery level icon; other items will not be
displayed.
Image Comment
G button ➜ B setup menu
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken.
Comments can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX 2 (supplied) or
Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0 389). The comment is also
visible on the shooting data page in the photo information display
(0 228).
• Done: Save changes and return to the setup menu.
• Input comment: Input a comment as described on page 170.
Comments can be up to 36 characters long.
• Attach comment: Select this option to
attach the comment to all subsequent
photographs. Attach comment can be
turned on and off by highlighting it and
pressing 2.
U
333
Copyright Information
G button ➜ B setup menu
Add copyright information to new photographs as they are taken.
Copyright information is included in the shooting data shown in
the photo information display (0 228) and can be viewed as
metadata in ViewNX 2 (supplied) or in Capture NX 2 (available
separately; 0 389).
• Done: Save changes and return to the setup menu.
• Artist: Enter a photographer name as described on page 170.
Photographer names can be up to 36 characters long.
• Copyright: Enter the name of the copyright holder as described
on page 170. Copyright holder names can be up to 54 characters
long.
• Attach copyright information: Select this
option to attach copyright information to all
subsequent photographs. Attach
copyright information can be turned on
and off by highlighting it and pressing 2.
D
Copyright Information
To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names,
make sure that Attach copyright information is not selected and that
the Artist and Copyright fields are blank before lending or transferring
the camera to another person. Nikon does not accept liability for any
damages or disputes arising from the use of the Copyright
information option.
U
334
Save/Load Settings
G button ➜ B setup menu
Select Save settings to save the following settings to the memory
card, or to the memory card in the primary card slot if two memory
cards are inserted (0 89; if the card is full, an error will be
displayed). Use this option to share settings among D800 cameras.
Menu
Playback
Shooting
(all banks)
Option
Playback display options
Image review
After delete
Rotate tall
Shooting menu bank
Extended menu banks
File naming
Primary slot selection
Secondary slot function
Image quality
Image size
Image area
JPEG compression
NEF (RAW) recording
White balance (with fine-tuning and presets d-1–d-4)
Set Picture Control
Color space
Active D-Lighting
Vignette control
Auto distortion control
Long exposure NR
High ISO NR
ISO sensitivity settings
Movie settings
Custom settings
All Custom Settings
(all banks)
U
335
Menu
Option
Clean image sensor
HDMI
Flicker reduction
Time zone and date (excepting date and time)
Language
Setup
Auto image rotation
Image comment
Copyright information
GPS
Non-CPU lens data
Eye-Fi upload
All My Menu items
My Menu/
All recent settings
Recent Settings
Choose tab
Settings saved using the D800 can be restored by selecting Load
settings. Note that Save/load settings is only available when a
memory card is inserted in the camera, and that the Load settings
option is only available if the card contains saved settings.
A
Saved Settings
Settings are saved in a file named NCSETUP8. The camera will not be
able to load settings if the file name is changed.
U
336
Virtual Horizon
G button ➜ B setup menu
Display roll and pitch information based on information from the
camera tilt sensor. If the camera is tilted neither left nor right, the
roll reference line will turn green, while if the camera is tilted
neither forward nor back, the pitch reference line will turn green
and a dot will appear in the center of the display. Each division is
equivalent to 5°.
Camera level
Camera tilted left or
right
Camera tilted forward
or back
D
Tilting the Camera
The virtual horizon display is not accurate when the camera is tilted at a
sharp angle forward or back. If the camera is unable to measure tilt, the
amount of tilt will not be displayed.
A
See Also
For information on viewing a virtual horizon display in the viewfinder,
see Custom Setting f4 (Assign Fn button > Fn button press; 0 311,
313). For information on displaying a virtual horizon in live view, see
pages 54 and 66.
U
337
AF Fine-Tune
G button ➜ B setup menu
Fine-tune focus for up to 20 lens types. AF tuning is not
recommended in most situations and may interfere with normal
focus; use only when required.
Option
Description
AF fine• On: Turn AF tuning on.
tune
• Off: Turn AF tuning off.
(On/Off)
Tune AF for the current lens (CPU
Move focal
lenses only). Press 1 or 3 to choose point away
Saved a value between +20 and –20.
from camera.
value Values for up to 20 lens types can be
stored. Only one value can be
stored for each type of lens.
Choose the AF tuning value used
when no previously saved value
Default
exists for the current lens (CPU
lenses only).
Move focal
point toward
camera.
Current
value
Previous
value
List previously saved AF tuning values. To delete a lens from the
list, highlight the desired lens and press O (Q). To change a lens
identifier (for example, to choose an identifier that is the same as
the last two digits of the lens serial number to distinguish it from
other lenses of the same type in light of the fact that Saved value
List can be used with only one lens of each type), highlight the
saved desired lens and press 2.
values The menu shown at right will be
displayed; press 1 or 3 to choose an
identifier and press J to save changes
and exit.
U
338
D
AF Tuning
The camera may be unable to focus at minimum range or at infinity
when AF tuning is applied.
D
Live View
Tuning is not applied to autofocus during live view (0 45).
A
Saved Value
Only one value can be stored for each type of lens. If a teleconverter is
used, separate values can be stored for each combination of lens and
teleconverter.
Eye-Fi Upload
G button ➜ B setup menu
This option is displayed only when an Eye-Fi memory card
(available separately from third-party suppliers) is inserted in the
camera. Choose Enable to upload photographs to a preselected
destination. Note that pictures will not be uploaded if signal
strength is insufficient.
Observe all local laws concerning wireless devices and choose
Disable where wireless devices are prohibited.
When an Eye-Fi card is inserted, its status is
indicated by an icon in the information
display:
• d: Eye-Fi upload disabled.
• e: Eye-Fi upload enabled but no pictures
available for upload.
• f (static): Eye-Fi upload enabled; waiting to begin upload.
• f (animated): Eye-Fi upload enabled; uploading data.
• g: Error — camera can not control Eye-Fi card. If a blinking W
appears in the control panel or viewfinder, refer to page 420; if
this indicator is not blinking, pictures can be taken normally but
you may be unable to change Eye-Fi settings.
U
339
D
Eye-Fi Cards
Eye-Fi cards may emit wireless signals when Disable is selected. If a
warning is displayed in the monitor (0 420), turn the camera off and
remove the card.
See the manual provided with the Eye-Fi card, and direct any inquiries
to the manufacturer. The camera can be used to turn Eye-Fi cards on
and off, but may not support other Eye-Fi functions.
A
Supported Eye-Fi Cards
As of September 2011, the camera supports 8 GB SDHC Pro X2 Eye-Fi
cards. Some cards may not be available in some countries or regions;
consult the manufacturer for more information. Eye-Fi cards are for use
only in the country of purchase. Be sure the Eye-Fi card firmware has
been updated to the latest version.
A
Using Eye-Fi Cards in Ad Hoc Mode
Additional time may be required when connecting using Eye-Fi cards
that support ad hoc mode, such as the Eye-Fi Pro X2 SDHC 8 GB. Set
Custom Setting c2 (Auto meter-off delay, 0 291) to 30 s or longer.
Firmware Version
View the current camera firmware version.
U
340
G button ➜ B setup menu
N The Retouch Menu:
Creating Retouched Copies
To display the retouch menu, press G and select the N (retouch
menu) tab.
G button
The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed, or
retouched copies of existing pictures. The retouch menu is only
displayed when a memory card containing photographs is
inserted in the camera (note that if the memory card is being used
to store both RAW/NEF and JPEG copies of the same photographs
as described on page 84, retouch other than Image overlay and
NEF (RAW) processing apply only to the JPEG copies).
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
7
8
Y
Option
D-Lighting
Red-eye correction
Trim
Monochrome
Filter effects
Color balance
Image overlay 1
NEF (RAW) processing
Resize
Quick retouch
0
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
353
355
357
Z
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
9
p
Option
Straighten
Distortion control
Fisheye
Color outline
Color sketch
Perspective control
Miniature effect
Selective color
Edit movie
Side-by-side comparison 2
1 Can only be selected by pressing G and selecting N tab.
2 Available only if J button is pressed in full-frame playback when a
retouched image or original is displayed.
0
357
358
358
359
359
360
361
362
74
364
U
341
Creating Retouched Copies
To create a retouched copy:
1
Select an item in the
retouch menu.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an
item, 2 to select.
2
Select a picture.
Highlight a picture and press J
(to view the highlighted picture
full screen, press and hold the X
button).
To view images in other locations, press
W and select the desired card and folder
as described on page 221.
A
Retouch
The camera may not be able to display or
retouch images created with other devices.
3
Select retouch options.
For more information, see the section for the selected item. To
exit without creating a retouched copy, press G.
A
U
342
Monitor off Delay
The monitor will turn off automatically if no operations are
performed for a brief period. Any unsaved changes will be lost. To
increase the time the monitor remains on, choose a longer menu
display time for Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off delay, 0 292).
4
Create a retouched
copy.
Press J to create a
retouched copy.
Retouched copies are
indicated by a N icon.
J button
A
Creating Retouched Copies During Playback
Retouched copies can also be created during playback.
Display picture full
frame and press J.
Highlight option and
press J.
Create retouched
copy.
D
Retouching Copies
Most options can be applied to copies created using other retouch
options, although with the exceptions of Image overlay and
Edit movie > Choose start/end point each option can be applied only
once (note that multiple edits may result in loss of detail). Options that
can not be applied to the current image are grayed out and unavailable.
A
Image Quality
Except in the case of copies created with Trim, Image overlay, NEF
(RAW) processing, and Resize, copies created from JPEG images are
the same size and quality as the original, copies created from NEF (RAW)
photos are saved as large fine-quality JPEG images, and copies created
from TIFF (RGB) photos are saved as fine-quality JPEG images of the
same size as the original. Size-priority compression is used when copies
are saved in JPEG format.
U
343
D-Lighting
G button ➜ N retouch menu
D-Lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit
photographs.
Before
After
Press 1 or 3 to choose the amount of
correction performed. The effect can be
previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy
the photograph.
U
344
Red-Eye Correction
G button ➜ N retouch menu
This option is used to correct “red-eye” caused by the flash and is
available only with photographs taken using a flash. The
photograph selected for red-eye correction can be previewed in
the edit display. Confirm the effects of red-eye correction and
create a copy as described in the following table. Note that
red-eye correction may not always produce the expected results
and may in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the
image that are not affected by red-eye; check the preview
thoroughly before proceeding.
To
Use
Zoom in
X
Zoom out
W
View other
areas of image
Cancel zoom
J
Create copy
J
Description
Press X to zoom in, W to
zoom out. While photo is
zoomed in, use multi
selector to view areas of
image not visible in
monitor. Keep multi
selector pressed to scroll
rapidly to other areas of frame. Navigation
window is displayed when zoom buttons or multi
selector are pressed; area currently visible in
monitor is indicated by yellow border. Press J to
cancel zoom.
If the camera detects red-eye in the selected
photograph, a copy will be created that has been
processed to reduce its effects. No copy will be
created if the camera is unable to detect red-eye.
U
345
Trim
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create a cropped copy of the selected
photograph. The selected photograph is
displayed with the selected crop shown in
yellow; create a cropped copy as described in
the following table.
To
Reduce size of
crop
Increase size of
crop
Use
Description
W
Press W to reduce the size of the crop.
X
Press X to increase the size of the crop.
Change crop
aspect ratio
Rotate the main command dial to switch
between aspect ratios of 3 : 2, 4 : 3, 5 : 4, 1 : 1,
and 16 : 9.
Position crop
Use multi selector to position the crop. Press
and hold to move the crop rapidly to the
desired position.
Preview crop
Press center of multi selector to preview
cropped image.
Create copy
J
Save the current crop as a separate file.
A
Trim: Image Quality and Size
Copies created from NEF (RAW), NEF
(RAW) + JPEG, or TIFF (RGB) photos have an
image quality (0 84) of JPEG fine; cropped
copies created from JPEG photos have the same
image quality as the original. The size of the
copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio and
appears at upper left in the crop display.
A
U
346
Viewing Cropped Copies
Playback zoom may not be available when cropped copies are
displayed.
Monochrome
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Copy photographs in Black-and-white,
Sepia, or Cyanotype (blue and white
monochrome).
Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype
displays a preview of the selected
image; press 1 to increase color
saturation, 3 to decrease. Press J
to create a monochrome copy.
Increase
saturation
Decrease
saturation
U
347
Filter Effects
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Choose from the following filter effects. After adjusting filter
effects as described below, press J to copy the photograph.
Option
Description
Creates the effect of a skylight filter,
making the picture less blue. The effect
Skylight
can be previewed in the monitor as
shown at right.
Creates a copy with warm tone filter
Warm effects, giving the copy a “warm” red
filter cast. The effect can be previewed in the
monitor.
Red
intensifier Intensify reds (Red intensifier), greens
Green (Green intensifier), or blues (Blue
intensifier intensifier). Press 1 to increase the
Blue effect, 3 to decrease.
intensifier
Add starburst effects to light sources.
• Number of points: Choose from four, six,
or eight.
• Filter amount: Choose the brightness of
the light sources affected.
Cross
• Filter angle: Choose the angle of the
screen
points.
• Length of points: Choose the length of points.
• Confirm: Preview the effects of the filter as shown at right. Press
X to preview the copy full frame.
• Save: Create a retouched copy.
Soft
U
348
Add a soft filter effect. Press 1 or 3 to
choose the filter strength.
Color Balance
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Use the multi selector to create a copy with
modified color balance as shown below. The
effect is displayed in the monitor together
with red, green, and blue histograms (0 225)
giving the distribution of tones in the copy.
Press J to copy the photograph.
Increase amount of green
Increase amount of blue
Increase amount of amber
Increase amount of magenta
A
Zoom
To zoom in on the image displayed in the
monitor, press X. The histogram will be updated
to show data only for the portion of the image
displayed in the monitor. While the image is
zoomed in, press L (Z/Q) to toggle back and
forth between color balance and zoom. When
zoom is selected, you can zoom in and out with
the X and W buttons and scroll the image with
the multi selector.
U
349
Image Overlay
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to
create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals;
the results, which make use of RAW data from the camera image
sensor, are noticeably better than photographs combined in an
imaging application. The new picture is saved at current image
quality and size settings; before creating an overlay, set image
quality and size (0 84, 87; all options are available). To create a
NEF (RAW) copy, choose an image quality of NEF (RAW).
+
1
Select Image overlay.
Highlight Image overlay and
press 2. The dialog shown at
right will be displayed, with
Image 1 highlighted; press J
to display a picture selection
dialog listing only NEF (RAW) images created with this camera.
U
350
2
Select the first image.
Use the multi selector to
highlight the first photograph
in the overlay. To view the
highlighted photograph full
frame, press and hold the X
button. To view images in other locations, press W and select
the desired card and folder as described on page 221. Press J
to select the highlighted photograph and return to the
preview display.
3
Select the second image.
The selected image will appear as Image 1. Highlight Image 2
and press J, then select the second photo as described in
Step 2.
4
Adjust gain.
Highlight Image 1 or Image 2
and optimize exposure for the
overlay by pressing 1 or 3 to
select the gain from values
between 0.1 and 2.0. Repeat
for the second image. The default value is 1.0; select 0.5 to
halve gain or 2.0 to double it. The effects of gain are visible in
the Preview column.
U
351
5
Preview the overlay.
Press 4 or 2 to place the
cursor in the Preview column
and press 1 or 3 to highlight
Overlay. Press J to preview
the overlay as shown at right
(to save the overlay without displaying a preview, select Save).
To return to Step 4 and select new photos or adjust gain, press
W.
6
Save the overlay.
Press J while the preview
is displayed to save the
overlay. After an overlay is
created, the resulting
image will be displayed
full-frame in the monitor.
J button
D
Image Overlay
Only NEF (RAW) photographs with the same image area and bit depth
can be combined.
U
352
The overlay has the same photo info (including date of recording,
metering, shutter speed, aperture, exposure mode, exposure
compensation, focal length, and image orientation) and values for
white balance and Picture Control as the photograph selected for
Image 1. The current image comment is appended to the overlay when
it is saved; copyright information, however, is not copied. Overlays
saved in NEF (RAW) format use the compression selected for Type in the
NEF (RAW) recording menu and have the same bit depth as the
original images; JPEG overlays are saved using size-priority
compression.
NEF (RAW) Processing
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs.
1
Select NEF (RAW)
processing.
Highlight NEF (RAW)
processing and press 2 to
display a picture selection
dialog listing only NEF (RAW) images created with this camera.
2
Select a photograph.
Highlight a photograph (to
view the highlighted
photograph full frame, press
and hold the X button; to view
images in other locations as described on page 221, press W).
Press J to select the highlighted photograph and proceed to
the next step.
U
353
3
Adjust NEF (RAW) processing settings.
Adjust the settings listed below. Note that white balance and
vignette control are not available with multiple exposures or
pictures created with image overlay and that exposure
compensation can only be set to values between –2 and
+2 EV. If Auto is selected for white balance, it will be set to
whichever of Normal and Keep warm lighting colors was in
effect when the picture was taken. The Picture Control grid is
not displayed when Picture Controls are adjusted.
Image quality (0 84)
Image size (0 87)
White balance (0 145)
Exposure comp. (0 130)
Picture Control (0 163)
High ISO NR (0 277)
Color space (0 274)
Vignette control (0 275)
D-Lighting (0 344)
4
U
354
Copy the photograph.
Highlight EXE and press J
to create a JPEG copy of
the selected photograph.
To exit without copying
the photograph, press the
G button.
J button
Resize
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create small copies of selected photographs.
1
Select Resize.
To resize selected images, press
G to display the menus and
select Resize in the retouch
menu.
2
Choose a destination.
If two memory cards are
inserted, you can choose a
destination for the resized
copies by highlighting Choose
destination and pressing 2 (if
only one memory card is
inserted, proceed to Step 3).
The menu shown at right will be
displayed; highlight a card slot
and press J.
3
Choose a size.
Highlight Choose size and
press 2.
U
355
The options shown at right will
be displayed; highlight an
option and press J.
4
Choose pictures.
Highlight Select image and
press 2.
Highlight pictures and press the
center of the multi selector to
select or deselect (to view the
highlighted picture full screen,
press and hold the X button; to
view pictures in other locations
as described on page 221, press W). Selected pictures are
marked by a 8 icon. Press J when the selection is complete.
Note that photographs taken at an image-area setting of 5 : 4
(0 80) can not be resized.
5
Save the resized copies.
A confirmation dialog will
be displayed. Highlight
Yes and press J to save
the resized copies.
U
356
J button
A
Viewing Resized Copies
Playback zoom may not be available when resized copies are displayed.
A
Image Quality
Copies created from NEF (RAW), NEF (RAW) + JPEG, or TIFF (RGB) photos
have an image quality (0 84) of JPEG fine; copies created from JPEG
photos have the same image quality as the original.
Quick Retouch
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create copies with enhanced saturation and
contrast. D-Lighting is applied as required to
brighten dark or backlit subjects.
Press 1 or 3 to choose the amount of
enhancement. The effect can be previewed in
the edit display. Press J to copy the photograph.
Straighten
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create a straightened copy of the selected
image. Press 2 to rotate the image clockwise
by up to five degrees in increments of
approximately 0.25 degrees, 4 to rotate it
counterclockwise (the effect can be
previewed in the edit display; note that edges
of the image will be trimmed to create a square copy). Press J to
copy the photograph, or press K to exit to playback without
creating a copy.
U
357
Distortion Control
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create copies with reduced peripheral
distortion. Select Auto to let the camera
correct distortion automatically and then
make fine adjustments using the multi
selector, or select Manual to reduce
distortion manually (note that Auto is not
available with photos taken using auto distortion control; see
page 276). Press 2 to reduce barrel distortion, 4 to reduce
pincushion distortion (the effect can be previewed in the edit
display; note that greater amounts of distortion control result in
more of the edges being cropped out). Press J to copy the
photograph, or press K to exit to playback without creating a
copy. Note that distortion control may heavily crop or distort the
edges of copies created from photographs taken with DX lenses at
image areas other than DX (24×16) 1.5×.
A
Auto
Auto is for use only with pictures taken with type G and D lenses (PC,
fisheye, and certain other lenses excluded). Results are not guaranteed
with other lenses.
Fisheye
U
358
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create copies that appear to have been taken
with a fisheye lens. Press 2 to increase the
effect (this also increases the amount that will
be cropped out at the edges of the image), 4
to reduce it. The effect can be previewed in
the edit display. Press J to copy the
photograph, or press K to exit to playback without creating a
copy.
Color Outline
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create an outline copy of a photograph to use
as a base for painting. The effect can be
previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy
the photograph.
Before
Color Sketch
After
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create a copy of a photograph that resembles
a sketch made with colored pencils. Press 1
or 3 to highlight Vividness or Outlines and
press 4 or 2 to change. Vividness can be
increased to make colors more saturated, or
decreased for a washed-out, monochromatic
effect, while outlines can be made thicker or thinner. Thicker
outlines makes colors more saturated. The results can be
previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy the photograph, or
press K to exit to playback without creating a copy.
U
359
Perspective Control
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create copies that reduce the effects of
perspective taken from the base of a tall
object. Use the multi selector to adjust
perspective (note that greater amounts of
perspective control result in more of the
edges being cropped out). The results can be
previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy the photograph, or
press K to exit to playback without creating a copy.
Before
U
360
After
Miniature Effect
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create a copy that appears to be a photo of a diorama. Works best
with photos taken from a high vantage point.
To
Choose
orientation
Press
W
Description
Press W to choose orientation of area that is in
focus.
If photo is displayed in wide
orientation, press 1 or 3 to
position frame showing area
of copy that will be in focus.
Choose
position
Area in focus
If photo is displayed in tall
orientation (0 331), press 4
or 2 to position frame
showing area of copy that will
be in focus.
If area of effect is in wide orientation, press 4 or 2
to choose height.
Choose size
Preview
copy
Cancel
Create copy
If area of effect is in tall orientation, press 1 or 3 to
choose width.
X
Preview copy.
K
J
Exit to full-frame playback without creating copy.
Create copy.
U
361
Selective Color
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create a copy in which only selected hues appear in color.
1
Select Selective color.
Highlight Selective color in the
retouch menu and press 2 to
display a picture selection
dialog.
2
Select a photograph.
Highlight a photograph (to
view the highlighted
photograph full frame, press
and hold the X button; to view
images in other locations as described on page 221, press W).
Press J to select the highlighted photograph and proceed to
the next step.
3
Select a color.
Selected color
Use the multi selector to
position the cursor over an
object and press center of multi
selector to select the color of
the object as one that will
remain in the final copy (the
camera may have difficulty detecting unsaturated colors;
choose a saturated color). To zoom in on the picture for
precise color selection, press X. Press W to zoom out.
U
362
4
Highlight the color range.
Color range
Rotate the main command dial
to highlight the color range for
the selected color.
5
Choose the color range.
Press 1 or 3 to increase or
decrease the range of similar
hues that will be included in the
final photograph or movie.
Choose from values between 1 and 7; note that higher values
may include hues from other colors. The effect can be
previewed in the edit display.
6
Select additional colors.
To select additional colors,
rotate the main command dial
to highlight another of the
three color boxes at the top of
the display and repeat Steps 3–5 to select another color.
Repeat for a third color if desired. To deselect the highlighted
color, press O (Q), or press and hold O (Q) to remove all
colors.
7
Save the edited copy.
Press J to copy the
photograph.
U
J button
363
Side-by-Side Comparison
Compare retouched copies to the original photographs. This
option is only available if the J button is pressed to display the
retouch menu when a copy or original is played back full frame.
1
Select a picture.
Select a retouched copy
(shown by a N icon) or a
photograph that has been
retouched in full-frame
playback and press J.
2
Select Side-by-side
comparison.
Highlight Side-by-side
comparison and press J.
U
364
J button
3
Compare the copy with the
original.
Options used to
create copy
The source image is displayed
on the left, the retouched copy
on the right, with the options
used to create the copy listed
at the top of the display. Press
Source Retouched
4 or 2 to switch between the
image
copy
source image and the
retouched copy. To view the highlighted picture full frame,
press and hold the X button. If the copy was created from two
images using Image overlay, press 1 or 3 to view the other
source image. If multiple copies exist for the current source
image, press 1 or 3 to view the other copies. To exit to
playback, press the K button, or press J to exit to playback
with the highlighted image selected.
D
Side-by-Side Comparison
The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a
photograph that was protected (0 233), is on a locked memory card, or
has since been deleted or hidden (0 260).
U
365
O My Menu/m Recent Settings
To display My Menu, press G and select the O (My Menu) tab.
G button
The My Menu option can be used to create and edit a customized
list of options from the playback, shooting, Custom Settings,
setup, and retouch menus for quick access (up to 20 items). If
desired, recent settings can be displayed in place of My Menu
(0 370).
Options can be added, deleted, and reordered as described on the
following pages.
U
366
❚❚ Adding Options to My Menu
1
Select Add items.
In My Menu (O), highlight Add
items and press 2.
2
Select a menu.
Highlight the name of the
menu containing the option
you wish to add and press 2.
3
Select an item.
Highlight the desired
menu item and press J.
J button
4
Position the new item.
Press 1 or 3 to move the new
item up or down in My Menu.
Press J to add the new item.
5
Add more items.
The items currently displayed in My
Menu are indicated by a check mark.
Items indicated by a V icon can not be
selected. Repeat steps 1–4 to select
additional items.
U
367
❚❚ Deleting Options from My Menu
1
Select Remove items.
In My Menu (O), highlight Remove items and press 2.
2
Select items.
Highlight items and press 2 to
select or deselect. Selected
items are indicated by a check
mark.
3
Select Done.
Highlight Done and press
J. A confirmation dialog
will be displayed.
J button
4
Delete the selected items.
Press J to delete the selected
items.
A
Deleting Items in My Menu
To delete the item currently highlighted in My Menu, press the O (Q)
button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O (Q) again to
remove the selected item from My Menu.
U
368
❚❚ Reordering Options in My Menu
1
Select Rank items.
In My Menu (O), highlight Rank items and press 2.
2
Select an item.
Highlight the item you
wish to move and press J.
J button
3
Position the item.
Press 1 or 3 to move the item
up or down in My Menu and
press J. Repeat Steps 2–3 to
reposition additional items.
4
Exit to My Menu.
Press the G button to
return to My Menu.
G button
U
369
Recent Settings
To display the twenty most recently used settings, select m Recent
settings for O My Menu > Choose tab.
1
Select Choose tab.
In My Menu (O), highlight
Choose tab and press 2.
2
Select m Recent
settings.
Highlight m Recent
settings and press J. The
name of the menu will
change from “MY MENU”
to “RECENT SETTINGS.”
J button
Menu items will be added to the top of the recent settings menu
as they are used. To view My Menu again, select O My Menu for
m Recent settings > Choose tab.
A
Removing Items from the Recent Settings Menu
To remove an item from the recent settings menu, highlight it and press
the O (Q) button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O (Q)
again to delete the selected item.
U
370
nTechnical Notes
Read this chapter for information on compatible accessories,
cleaning and storing the camera, and what to do if an error
message is displayed or you encounter problems using the camera.
Compatible Lenses
Camera setting
Focus mode
AF
CPU lenses 1
Lens/accessory
Type G or D AF NIKKOR 2
✔
AF-S, AF-I NIKKOR
PC-E NIKKOR series
—
PC Micro 85mm
—
f/2.8D 4
7
AF-S / AF-I Teleconverter
✔
Other AF NIKKOR
✔9
(except lenses for F3AF)
AI-P NIKKOR
—
AI-, AI-modified, NIKKOR
—
or Nikon Series E lenses 12
Medical-NIKKOR 120mm
—
f/4
Reflex-NIKKOR
—
PC-NIKKOR
—
—
AI-type Teleconverter 18
PB-6 Bellows Focusing
—
Attachment 19
Auto extension rings
(PK-series 11A, 12, or 13;
—
PN-11)
Exposure
Metering system
mode
L
e g
M
f h 3D Color N
Non-CPU lenses 11
M (with
electronic
rangefinder)
M
✔
✔
✔5
✔ ✔5 ✔5 ✔5
— ✔ 3,5
✔5
✔
— ✔6 ✔
— ✔ 3,5
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔3
✔9
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔3
✔ 10
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔3
✔ 10
✔
— ✔ 13 — ✔ 14 ✔ 15
✔
✔
— ✔ 16 —
—
✔5
✔8
✔
✔
✔
— ✔ 13 — — ✔ 15
— ✔ 17 — — ✔
— ✔ 13 — ✔14 ✔ 15
✔8
✔
— ✔ 20 —
—
✔
✔8
✔
— ✔ 13 —
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔3
—
n
371
1
2
3
4
n
372
IX-NIKKOR lenses can not be used.
Vibration Reduction (VR) supported with VR lenses.
Spot metering meters selected focus point (0 115).
The camera’s exposure metering and flash control systems do not work
properly when shifting and/or tilting the lens, or when an aperture other than
the maximum aperture is used.
5 Can not be used with shifting or tilting.
6 Manual exposure mode only.
7 Can be used with AF-S and AF-I lenses only (0 373). For information on the
focus points available for autofocus and electronic rangefinding, see page 373.
8 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
9 When focusing at minimum focus distance with AF 80–200mm f/2.8, AF 35–
70mm f/2.8, AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 <New>, or AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 lens at
maximum zoom, in-focus indicator may be displayed when image on matte
screen in viewfinder is not in focus. Adjust focus manually until image in
viewfinder is in focus.
10 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
11 Some lenses can not be used (see page 374).
12 Range of rotation for AI 80–200mm f/2.8 ED tripod mount is limited by camera body.
Filters can not be exchanged while AI 200–400mm f/4 ED is mounted on camera.
13 If maximum aperture is specified using Non-CPU lens data (0 212), aperture
value will be displayed in viewfinder and control panel.
14 Can be used only if lens focal length and maximum aperture are specified using
Non-CPU lens data (0 212). Use spot or center-weighted metering if desired
results are not achieved.
15 For improved precision, specify lens focal length and maximum aperture using
Non-CPU lens data (0 212).
16 Can be used in manual exposure modes at shutter speeds slower than flash
sync speed by one step or more.
17 Exposure determined by presetting lens aperture. In aperture-priority auto
exposure mode, preset aperture using lens aperture ring before performing AE
lock and shifting lens. In manual exposure mode, preset aperture using lens
aperture ring and determine exposure before shifting lens.
18 Exposure compensation required when used with AI 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5, AI 35–
105mm f/3.5–4.5, AI 35–135mm f/3.5–4.5, or AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D. See
teleconverter manual for details.
19 Requires PK-12 or PK-13 auto extension ring. PB-6D may be required
depending on camera orientation.
20 Use preset aperture. In aperture-priority auto exposure mode, set aperture using
focusing attachment before determining exposure and taking photograph.
• PF-4 Reprocopy Outfit requires PA-4 Camera Holder.
• Noise in the form of horizontal lines may appear in pictures taken with AF-S Zoom
Nikkor 24–85 mm f/3.5–4.5G (IF) lenses at ISO sensitivities over 6400; use manual
focus or focus lock.
A
Recognizing CPU and Type G and D Lenses
CPU lenses (particularly types G and D) are recommended, but note that
IX-NIKKOR lenses can not be used. CPU lenses can be identified by the
presence of CPU contacts, type G and D lenses by a letter on the lens
barrel. Type G lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring.
CPU contacts
Aperture ring
CPU lens
Type G lens
Type D lens
A
The AF-S/AF-I Teleconverter
The AF-S/AF-I teleconverter can be used with the following AF-S and
AF-I lenses:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED VR II
AF-S VR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED
AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D ED
AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G
IF-ED 1
AF-S NIKKOR 200mm f/2G ED VR II
AF-S VR 200mm f/2G ED
AF-S NIKKOR 200–400mm f/4G ED
VR II 2
AF-S VR 200–400mm f/4G ED 2
AF-S NIKKOR 300mm f/2.8G ED VR II
AF-S VR 300mm f/2.8G ED
AF-S 300mm f/2.8D ED II
AF-S 300mm f/2.8D ED
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AF-I 300mm f/2.8D ED
AF-S 300mm f/4D ED 2
AF-S NIKKOR 400mm f/2.8G ED VR
AF-S 400mm f/2.8D ED II
AF-S 400mm f/2.8D ED
AF-I 400mm f/2.8D ED
AF-S NIKKOR 500mm f/4G ED VR 2
AF-S 500mm f/4D ED II 2
AF-S 500mm f/4D ED 2
AF-I 500mm f/4D ED 2
AF-S NIKKOR 600mm f/4G ED VR 2
AF-S 600mm f/4D ED II 2
AF-S 600mm f/4D ED 2
AF-I 600mm f/4D ED 2
1 Autofocus not supported.
2 Autofocus and electronic
TC-20E II/
TC-17E II
rangefinding support focus
TC-20E III
points shown at right when
used with TC-17E II, TC-20E II, or TC-20E III AF-S teleconverters. When used
with TC-20E II/TC-20E III, focus data for focus points other than the center focus
point are obtained from line sensors. Single point AF is used when 3Dtracking or auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode (0 93); at maximum or
combined apertures slower than f/5.6, the camera may not be able to focus on
dark or low-contrast subjects.
n
373
A
Lens f-number
The f-number given in lens names is the maximum aperture of the lens.
A
Compatible Non-CPU Lenses
When using non-CPU lenses and accessories, select exposure mode g or
h and set aperture using the lens aperture ring. In other modes, the
shutter-release is disabled. Non-CPU lens data (0 212) can be used to
enable many of the features available with CPU lenses, including color
matrix metering; if no data are provided, center-weighted metering will
be used in place of color matrix metering, while if the maximum
aperture is not provided, the camera aperture display will show the
number of stops from maximum aperture and the actual aperture value
must be read off the lens aperture ring.
D
Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses
The following can NOT be used with the D800:
• TC-16AS AF teleconverter
• Non-AI lenses
• Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing
unit (400mm f/4.5, 600mm f/5.6,
800mm f/8, 1200mm f/11)
• Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6,
8mm f/8, OP 10mm f/5.6)
• 2.1cm f/4
• Extension Ring K2
• 180–600mm f/8 ED (serial numbers
174041–174180)
• 360–1200mm f/11 ED (serial numbers
174031–174127)
• 200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers
280001–300490)
n
374
• AF lenses for the F3AF (AF 80mm
f/2.8, AF 200mm f/3.5 ED,
AF Teleconverter TC-16)
• PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900
or earlier)
• PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers
851001–906200)
• PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type)
• Reflex 1000mm f/6.3 (old type)
• Reflex 1000mm f/11 (serial numbers
142361–143000)
• Reflex 2000mm f/11 (serial numbers
200111–200310)
A
The Built-in Flash
The built-in flash can be used with CPU lenses with focal lengths of
24mm (16mm in DX format) to 300mm, although in some cases the flash
may be unable to entirely light the subject at some ranges or focal
lengths due to shadows cast by the lens, while lenses that block the
subject’s view of the red-eye reduction lamp may interfere with red-eye
reduction. Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows. The flash has a
minimum range of 0.6 m (2 ft) and can not be used in the macro range of
macro zoom lenses. The flash may be unable to light the entire subject
with the following lenses at ranges less than those given below:
Lens
DX
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 12–24mm
f/4G IF-ED
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 17–55mm
f/2.8G IF-ED
AF-S NIKKOR 16–35mm f/4G ED VR
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 17–35mm f/2.8D
IF-ED
AF Zoom-Nikkor 18–35mm
f/3.5–4.5D IF-ED
AF Zoom-Nikkor 20–35mm f/2.8D IF
AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED
FX
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 24–120mm
f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED
AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 28–70mm f/2.8D
IF-ED
AF-S NIKKOR 28–300mm f/3.5–5.6G
ED VR
PC-E NIKKOR 24mm f/3.5D ED *
Zoom position
Minimum distance
without vignetting
18–24mm
No vignetting
20mm
24–55mm
35mm
28mm
35mm
24mm
28–35mm
24mm
28–35mm
35mm
50–70mm
24mm
28–120mm
28mm
35–120mm
35mm
50–70mm
35mm
50–300mm
24mm
1.5 m/4 ft 11 in.
No vignetting
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
No vignetting
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
No vignetting
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
No vignetting
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
No vignetting
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
No vignetting
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
No vignetting
1.5 m/4 ft 11 in.
No vignetting
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
No vignetting
1.5 m/4 ft 11 in.
* When not shifted or tilted.
n
375
When used with the AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED, the flash will be
unable to light the entire subject at all ranges.
The built-in flash can also be used with AI-S, AI-, AI-modified NIKKOR,
Nikon Series E and non-CPU lenses with a focal length of 24–300mm. AI
50–300mm f/4.5, modified AI 50–300mm f/4.5, and AI-S 50–300mm f/4.5
ED lenses must be used at a zoom position of 180mm or above, and AI
50–300mm f/4.5 ED lenses at a zoom position of 135mm or above.
n
376
A
AF-Assist Illumination
AF-assist illumination is available with lenses with focal lengths of 24–
200 mm. It can not however be used to assist the focus operation with
the following lenses:
• AF-S VR Nikkor 200mm f/2G IF-ED • AF-S NIKKOR 200–400mm f/4G ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 200mm f/2G ED VR II
VR II
• AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 200–400mm
f/4G IF-ED
At ranges under 0.7 m (2 ft 4 in.), the following lenses may block the AFassist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor:
• AF-S NIKKOR 16–35mm f/4G ED VR
• AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 17–35mm
f/2.8D IF-ED
• AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 17–55mm
f/2.8G IF-ED
• AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–
5.6G ED VR II
• AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED
• AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 24–120mm
f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED
• AF-S Zoom Nikkor ED 28–70mm
f/2.8D (IF)
• AF Micro-Nikkor 200mm f/4D IF-ED
At ranges under 1.1 m (3 ft 7 in.), the following lenses may block the AFassist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor:
• AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED
• AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 55–200mm
VR
f/4–5.6G ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 28–300mm f/3.5–5.6G
ED VR
At ranges under 1.5 m (4 ft 11 in.), the following lenses may block the AFassist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor:
• AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED
• AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor ED 70–
200mm f2.8G (IF)
• AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED
VR II
• AF Zoom-Nikkor 70–300mm f/4–
5.6G
• AF Zoom-Nikkor 80–200mm f/2.8D
ED
• AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 80–200mm
f/2.8D IF-ED
At ranges under 2.3 m (7 ft 7 in.), the following lenses may block the AFassist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor:
• AF VR Zoom-Nikkor 80–400mm f/4.5–5.6D ED
n
377
A
Calculating Angle of View
The D800 can be used with Nikon lenses for 35mm (135) format cameras.
If Auto DX crop is on (0 79) and a 35mm format lens is attached, the
angle of view will be the same as a frame of 35mm film (35.9 × 24.0 mm);
if a DX lens is attached, the angle of view will automatically be adjusted
to 23.4 × 15.6 mm (DX format).
To choose an angle of view different from that of the current lens, turn
Auto DX crop off and select from FX (36×24), 1.2× (30×20),
DX (24×16), and 5 : 4 (30×24). If a 35mm format lens is attached, the
angle of view could be reduced by 1.5 × by selecting DX (24×16) or by
1.2 × by selecting 1.2× (30×20), to expose a smaller area, or the aspect
ratio could be changed by selecting 5 : 4 (30×24).
FX (36×24) picture size (35.9 × 24.0 mm,
equivalent to 35mm format camera)
1.2× (30×20) picture size
(30.0 × 19.9 mm)
DX (24×16) picture size
(23.4 × 15.6 mm, equivalent to DX
format camera)
Lens
5 : 4 (30×24) picture size
(30.0 × 24.0 mm)
Picture diagonal
Angle of view (FX (36×24);
35mm format)
Angle of view (1.2× (30×20))
Angle of view (DX (24×16); DX format)
Angle of view (5 : 4 (30×24))
n
378
A
Calculating Angle of View (Continued)
The DX (24×16) angle of view is about 1.5 times smaller than the 35mm
format angle of view, while the 1.2× (30×20) angle of view is about 1.2
times smaller and the 5 : 4 (30×24) angle of view is about 1.1 times
smaller. To calculate the focal length of lenses in 35mm format when
DX (24×16) is selected, multiply the focal length of the lens by about
1.5, by about 1.2 when is 1.2× (30×20) selected, or by about 1.1 when
5 : 4 (30×24) is selected (for example, the effective focal length of a
50mm lens in 35mm format would be 75 mm when DX (24×16) is
selected, 60 mm when 1.2× (30×20) is selected, or 55 mm when
5 : 4 (30×24) is selected).
n
379
Optional Flash Units
(Speedlights)
The camera supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) and
can be used with CLS-compatible flash units. Optional flash units
can be attached directly to the camera accessory shoe as described
below. The accessory shoe is equipped with a safety lock for flash
units with a locking pin.
1
Remove the accessory shoe cover.
2
Mount the flash unit on the
accessory shoe.
See the manual provided with the flash
unit for details. The built-in flash will not
fire when an optional flash unit is
attached.
A
n
380
The Sync Terminal
A sync cable can be connected to the sync
terminal as required. Do not connect another
flash unit via a sync cable when performing rearcurtain sync flash photography with a flash unit
mounted on the camera accessory shoe.
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)
Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) offers improved
communication between the camera and compatible flash units
for improved flash photography.
❚❚ CLS-Compatible Flash Units
The camera can be used with the following CLS-compatible flash
units:
• The SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-400, and SB-R200:
Flash unit
Feature
SB-910 1 SB-900 1 SB-800 SB-700 1 SB-600 SB-400 2 SB-R200 3
Guide ISO 100 34/111 34/111 38/125 28/92 30/98 21/69 10/33
No. 4 ISO 200 48/157 48/157 53/174 39/128 42/138 30/98 14/46
1 If a color filter is attached to the SB-910, SB-900, or SB-700 when v or N
(flash) is selected for white balance, the camera will automatically detect the
filter and adjust white balance appropriately.
2 Wireless flash control is not available with the SB-400.
3 Controlled remotely with built-in flash in commander mode or using optional
SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, or SB-700 flash unit or SU-800 wireless Speedlight
commander.
4 m/ft, 20 °C (68 °F), SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, and SB-600 at 35 mm zoom
head position; SB-910, SB-900, and SB-700 with standard illumination.
• SU-800 Wireless Speedlight Commander: When mounted on a CLScompatible camera, the SU-800 can be used as a commander for
remote SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash
units in up to three groups. The SU-800 itself is not equipped
with a flash.
A
Guide Number
To calculate the range of the flash at full power, divide the Guide
Number by the aperture. For example, at ISO 100 the SB-800 has a Guide
Number of 38 m or 125 ft (35mm zoom head position); its range at an
aperture of f/5.6 is 38÷5.6 or about 6.8 meters (or in feet,
125÷5.6=approximately 23 ft 7 in.). For each twofold increase in ISO
sensitivity, multiply the Guide Number by the square root of two
(approximately 1.4).
n
381
The following features are available with CLS-compatible flash
units:
Flash unit
Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master/commander
Remote
SB-910
SB-910
SB-910
SB-900
SB-900
SB-900 SB-700
SB-800 SB-700 SB-600 SB-400 SB-800 SB-700 SU-800 1 SB-800 SB-600 SB-R200
Flash mode/feature
i-TTL balanced filli-TTL flash for digital
✔2
SLR
AA
Auto aperture
✔4
A
Non-TTL auto
✔4
Distance-priority
GN
✔
manual
M
Manual
✔
RPT Repeating flash
✔
Auto FP High-Speed Sync 7 ✔
FV lock
✔
AF-assist for multi-area
✔
AF 8
Flash Color Information
✔
Communication
REAR Rear-curtain sync ✔
Y Red-eye reduction ✔
Power zoom
✔
✔3
✔2
✔3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔5
✔5
—
—
✔5
—
✔5
✔5
—
—
—
—
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔6
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
—
—
✔
—
—
✔
—
—
1 Only available when SU-800 is used to control other flash units. The SU-800 itself
is not equipped with a flash.
2 Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering or when selected
with flash unit.
3 Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering.
4 Selected with flash unit.
5 Auto aperture (AA) is used regardless of mode selected with flash unit.
6 Can be selected with camera.
7 Select 1/320s (Auto FP) or 1/250 s (Auto FP) for Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync
speed, 0 299).
8 CPU lens required.
n
382
A
Other Flash Units
The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto and manual
modes.
Flash unit
Flash mode
A Non-TTL auto
M Manual
Repeating
G
flash
Rear-curtain
3
REAR
sync
SB-80DX,
SB-28DX,
SB-28, SB-26,
SB-25, SB-24
✔
✔
SB-50DX
—
✔
SB-30, SB-27 1,
SB-23, SB-29 2,
SB-22S, SB-22,
SB-21B 2,
SB-20,
SB-29S 2
SB-16B, SB-15
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
1 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter-release is disabled. Set flash
unit to A (non-TTL auto flash).
2 Autofocus is available with AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED and AF-S
Micro NIKKOR 60mm f/2.8G ED lenses only.
3 Available when camera is used to select flash mode.
A
Auto Aperture/Non-TTL Auto
Unless the focal length and maximum aperture are specified using the
Non-CPU lens data option in the setup menu (0 213), choosing auto
aperture (AA) when a non-CPU lens is attached automatically selects nonTTL auto (A).
n
383
D
Notes on Optional Flash Units
Refer to the flash unit manual for detailed instructions. If the unit
supports CLS, refer to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR
cameras. The D800 is not included in the “digital SLR” category in the
SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals.
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and 6400.
At values over 6400, the desired results may not be achieved at some
ranges or aperture settings. If the flash-ready indicator blinks for about
three seconds after a photograph is taken, the flash has fired at full
power and the photograph may be underexposed. View the
photograph in the monitor; if it is underexposed, adjust aperture, ISO
sensitivity, or the distance to the subject and try again.
When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash
photography, correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode. We
recommend that you select standard i-TTL flash control. Take a test shot
and view the results in the monitor.
In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash
unit. Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels, as this may
produce incorrect exposure.
n
384
The SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, and SB-400 provide red-eye
reduction, while the SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, and SU-800
provide AF-assist illumination with the following restrictions:
• SB-910 and SB-900: AF-assist
illumination is available with 17–
135 mm AF lenses, however,
17–19 mm 20–105 mm 106–135 mm
autofocus is available only with
the focus points shown at right.
• SB-800, SB-600, and SU-800: AF-assist
illumination is available with 24–
105 mm AF lenses, however,
24–34 mm 35–49 mm 50–105 mm
autofocus is available only with
the focus points shown at right.
• SB-700: AF-assist illumination is
available with 24–135 mm AF
lenses, however, autofocus is
24–27 mm 28–135 mm
available only with the focus
points shown at right.
In exposure mode e, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is
limited according to ISO sensitivity, as shown below:
100
4
200
5
Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of:
400
800
1600
5.6
7.1
8
3200
10
6400
11
If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the
maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens.
n
385
A
Flash Control Mode
The information display shows the flash control mode for optional flash
units as follows:
Flash sync
Auto FP (0 300)
i-TTL
Auto aperture (AA)
Non-TTL auto flash (A)
Distance-priority manual
(GN)
Manual
Repeating flash
—
Advanced wireless
lighting
D
Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories
Use only Nikon flash units. Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V
applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal operation,
but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash. Before using a
Nikon flash unit not listed in this section, contact a Nikon-authorized
service representative for more information.
n
386
Other Accessories
At the time of writing, the following accessories were available for
the D800.
• Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL15 (0 19, 21): Additional
EN-EL15 batteries are available from local retailers and
Nikon service representatives. These batteries can be
recharged using an MH-25 battery charger.
• Battery Charger MH-25 (0 19): The MH-25 can be used to
recharge EN-EL15 batteries.
• Multi-Power Battery Pack MB-D12: The MB-D12 is equipped
with a shutter-release button, B button, multi selector,
and main- and sub-command dials for improved
operation when taking photographs in portrait (tall)
orientation. When attaching the MB-D12, remove the
Power sources camera MB-D12 contact cover. A BL-5 battery-chamber
cover and an MH-26 battery charger are required when
using EN-EL18 batteries.
• Power Connector EP-5B, AC Adapter EH-5b: These accessories can
be used to power the camera for extended periods (EH-5a
and EH-5 AC adapters can also be used). A power
connector EP-5B is required to connect the camera to the
EH-5b, EH-5a, or EH-5; see page 391 for details. Note that
when the camera is used with an MB-D12, the EP-5B must
be inserted into the MB-D12, not the camera. Do not
attempt to use the camera with power connectors
inserted into both the camera and MB-D12.
Wireless Transmitter WT-4: Connects the camera to wireless and
Ethernet networks. The photographs on the camera
memory card can be viewed by computers on the same
network or copied to a computer for long-term storage. The
Wireless LAN
camera can also be controlled from any computer on the
adapters
network using Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately).
(0 245)
Note that the WT-4 requires an independent power source
in the form of an optional EH-6b AC adapter or EN-EL3e
battery. See the WT-4 manual for details. Always use the
latest version of the WT-4 software.
n
387
Viewfinder
eyepiece
accessories
n
388
• Rubber Eyecup DK-19: The DK-19 makes the image in the
viewfinder easier to see, preventing eye fatigue.
• Diopter-Adjustment Viewfinder Lens DK-17C: To accommodate
individual differences in vision, viewfinder lenses are
available with diopters of –3, –2, 0, +1, and +2 m–1. Use
diopter adjustment lenses only if the desired focus can
not be achieved with the built-in diopter adjustment
control (–3 to +1 m–1). Test diopter adjustment lenses
before purchase to ensure that the desired focus can be
achieved. The DK-17C is equipped with a safety lock.
• Magnifying Eyepiece DK-17M: The DK-17M magnifies the view
through the viewfinder by approximately 1.2 × for greater
precision when framing. The DK-17M is equipped with a
safety lock.
• Eyepiece Magnifier DG-2: The DG-2 magnifies the scene at the
center of the viewfinder for more accurate focus. DK-18
eyepiece adapter (available separately) required.
• Eyepiece Adapter DK-18: The DK-18 is used when attaching
the DG-2 magnifier or DR-3 right-angle viewing
attachment to the D800.
• Antifog Finder Eyepiece DK-14/Antifog Finder Eyepiece DK-17A:
These viewfinder eyepieces prevent fogging in humid or
cold conditions. The DK-17A is equipped with a safety
lock.
• Right-Angle Viewing Attachment DR-5/Right-Angle Viewing
Attachment DR-4: The DR-5 and DR-4 attach to the
viewfinder eyepiece at a right angle, allowing the image in
the viewfinder to be viewed from above when the camera
is in the horizontal shooting position. The DR-5 supports
diopter adjustment and can also magnify the view
through the viewfinder by 2 × for greater precision when
framing (note that the edges of the frame will not be
visible when the view is magnified).
Filters
PC card
adapters
Software
Body caps
Microphones
• Filters intended for special-effects photography may
interfere with autofocus or the electronic rangefinder.
• The D800 can not be used with linear polarizing filters.
Use the C-PL or C-PLII circular polarizing filter instead.
• Use NC filters to protect the lens.
• To prevent ghosting, use of a filter is not recommended
when the subject is framed against a bright light, or when
a bright light source is in the frame.
• Center-weighted metering is recommended with filters
with exposure factors (filter factors) over 1× (Y44, Y48,
Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S, ND8, ND8S,
ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12). See the filter manual for
details.
PC Card Adapter EC-AD1: The EC-AD1 PC card adapter allows
Type I CompactFlash memory cards to be inserted in
PCMCIA card slots.
• Capture NX 2: A complete photo editing package with such
advanced editing features as selection control points and
an auto retouch brush.
• Camera Control Pro 2: Control the camera remotely from a
computer and save photographs directly to the computer
hard disk.
Note: Use the latest versions of Nikon software; see the websites
listed on page xx for the latest information on supported
operating systems. At default settings, Nikon Message Center 2
will periodically check for updates to Nikon software and
firmware while you are logged in to an account on the
computer and the computer is connected to the Internet. A
message is automatically displayed when an update is found.
Body Cap BF-1B/Body Cap BF-1A: The body cap keeps the mirror,
viewfinder screen, and low-pass filter free of dust when a
lens is not in place.
Stereo Microphone ME-1 (0 65): Connect the ME-1 to the
camera microphone jack to record stereo sound while
reducing the noise caused by lens vibration being recorded
with movies during autofocus.
n
389
Remote
terminal
accessories
n
390
The D800 is equipped with a ten-pin remote terminal (0 3)
for remote control and automatic photography. The
terminal is provided with a cap, which protects the contacts
when the terminal is not in use. The following accessories
can be used (all lengths are approximate):
• Remote Cord MC-22: Remote shutter release with blue, yellow,
and black terminals for connection to a remote shuttertriggering device, allowing control via sound or electronic
signals (length 1 m/3 ft 3 in.).
• Remote Cord MC-30: Remote shutter release; can be used to
reduce camera shake (length 80 cm/2 ft 7 in.).
• Remote Cord MC-36: Remote shutter release; can be used for
interval timer photography or to reduce camera shake or
keep the shutter open during a time exposure (length
85 cm/2 ft 9 in.).
• Extension Cord MC-21: Can be connected to ML-3 or MC-series
20, 22, 23, 25, 30, or 36. Only one MC-21 can be used at a
time (length 3 m/9 ft 10 in.).
• Connecting Cord MC-23: Connects two cameras for
simultaneous operation (length 40 cm/1 ft 4 in.).
• Adapter Cord MC-25: Ten-pin to two-pin adapter cord for
connection to devices with two-pin terminals, including
the MW-2 radio control set, MT-2 intervalometer, and ML-2
modulite control set (length 20 cm/8 in.).
• GPS Unit GP-1 (0 215): Record latitude, longitude, altitude,
and UTC time with pictures.
• GPS Adapter Cord MC-35 (0 216): Connects GPS devices to
D800 via PC cable supplied by manufacturer of GPS device
(length 35 cm/1 ft 2 in.).
• Modulite Remote Control Set ML-3: Allows infrared remote
control at ranges of up to 8 m (26 ft 3 in.).
Attaching a Power Connector and AC
Adapter
Turn the camera off before attaching an optional power connector
and AC adapter.
1
Ready the camera.
Open the battery-chamber (q) and
power connector (w) covers.
2
Insert the EP-5B power connector.
Be sure to insert the connector in the
orientation shown, using the connector
to keep the orange battery latch pressed
to one side. The latch locks the connector
in place when the connector is fully
inserted.
3
Close the battery-chamber cover.
Position the power connector cable so
that it passes through the power
connector slot and close the batterychamber cover.
n
391
4
Connect the AC adapter.
Connect the AC adapter power cable to the AC socket on AC
adapter (e) and the EP-5B power cable to the DC socket (r).
When the camera is powered by the AC adapter and power
connector, the battery level display in the monitor turns off.
n
392
Caring for the Camera
Storage
When the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove
the battery and store it in a cool, dry area with the terminal cover in
place. To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, wellventilated area. Do not store your camera with naphtha or
camphor moth balls or in locations that:
• are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%
• are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic
fields, such as televisions or radios
• are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below
–10 °C (14 °F)
Cleaning
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a
soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside,
Camera
wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly dampened in distilled
body
water and dry thoroughly. Important: Dust or other foreign
matter inside the camera may cause damage not covered under
warranty.
These glass elements are easily damaged. Remove dust and
lint with a blower. If using an aerosol blower, keep the can
Lens,
mirror, and vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid. To remove
viewfinder fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens
cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care.
Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing
fingerprints and other stains, wipe the surface lightly with a
Monitor
soft cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply pressure, as this
could result in damage or malfunction.
Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.
n
393
The Low-Pass Filter
The image sensor that acts as the camera’s picture element is fitted
with a low-pass filter to prevent moiré. If you suspect that dirt or
dust on the filter is appearing in photographs, you can clean the
filter using the Clean image sensor option in the setup menu. The
filter can be cleaned at any time using the Clean now option, or
cleaning can be performed automatically when the camera is
turned on or off.
❚❚ “Clean Now”
1
Place the camera base down.
Image sensor cleaning is most effective
when the camera is placed base down as
shown at right.
2
Select Clean image
sensor in the setup
menu.
Press G to display the
menus. Highlight Clean
G button
image sensor in the setup
menu and press 2.
n
394
3
Select Clean now.
Highlight Clean now and
press J. The camera will
check the image sensor
and then begin cleaning.
J button
This process takes about
ten seconds; during this
time, 1 is displayed in
the control panel and other
operations can not be
performed. Do not remove
or disconnect the power
source until cleaning is
complete and 1 is no
longer displayed.
n
395
❚❚ “Clean at Startup/Shutdown”
Choose from the following options:
Option
Description
The image sensor is automatically cleaned each time
5 Clean at startup
the camera is turned on.
Clean at
The image sensor is automatically cleaned during
6
shutdown
shutdown each time the camera is turned off.
Clean at startup The image sensor is cleaned automatically at startup
7
& shutdown
and at shutdown.
Cleaning off
Automatic image sensor cleaning off.
1
Select Clean at startup/
shutdown.
Display the Clean image
sensor menu as described in
Step 2 on the previous page.
Highlight Clean at startup/
shutdown and press 2.
2
Select an option.
Highlight an option and
press J.
J button
n
396
D
Image Sensor Cleaning
Using camera controls during startup interrupts image sensor cleaning.
Image sensor cleaning may not be performed at startup if the flash is
charging.
Cleaning is performed by vibrating the low-pass filter. If dust can not be
fully removed using the options in the Clean image sensor menu, clean
the image sensor manually (see below) or consult a Nikon-authorized
service representative.
If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession, image
sensor cleaning may be temporarily disabled to protect the camera’s
internal circuitry. Cleaning can be performed again after a short wait.
❚❚ Manual Cleaning
If foreign matter can not be removed from the low-pass filter using
the Clean image sensor (0 394) option in the setup menu, the
filter can be cleaned manually as described below. Note, however,
that the filter is extremely delicate and easily damaged. Nikon
recommends that the filter be cleaned only by Nikon-authorized
service personnel.
1
Charge the battery or connect an AC adapter.
A reliable power source is required when inspecting or
cleaning the low-pass filter. Turn the camera off and insert a
fully-charged EN-EL15 battery or connect an optional EP-5B
power connector and EH-5b AC adapter.
2
Remove the lens.
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.
n
397
3
Select Lock mirror up
for cleaning.
Turn the camera on and
press the G button to
display the menus.
G button
Highlight Lock mirror up
for cleaning in the setup menu and press 2 (note that this
option is not available at battery levels of J or below).
4
Press J.
The message shown at right will be
displayed in the monitor and a row of
dashes will appear in the control panel
and viewfinder. To restore normal
operation without inspecting the lowpass filter, turn the camera off.
5
Raise the mirror.
Press the shutter-release
button all the way down.
The mirror will be raised and
the shutter curtain will open,
revealing the low-pass filter. The display in the viewfinder will
turn off and the row of dashes in the control panel will blink.
n
398
6
Examine the low-pass filter.
Holding the camera so that light falls on
the low-pass filter, examine the filter for
dust or lint. If no foreign objects are
present, proceed to Step 8.
7
Clean the filter.
Remove any dust and lint from the filter
with a blower. Do not use a blower-brush,
as the bristles could damage the filter.
Dirt that can not be removed with a
blower can only be removed by Nikon-authorized service
personnel. Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe
the filter.
8
Turn the camera off.
The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter
curtain will close. Replace the lens or body cap.
n
399
D
Use a Reliable Power Source
The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged. If the camera powers
off while the mirror is raised, the curtain will close automatically. To
prevent damage to the curtain, observe the following precautions:
• Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source
while the mirror is raised.
• If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound and
the self-timer lamp will blink to warn that the shutter curtain will close
and the mirror will be lowered after about two minutes. End cleaning
or inspection immediately.
D
Foreign Matter on the Low-Pass Filter
Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from
coming into contact with the low-pass filter during production and
shipping. The D800, however, is designed to be used with
interchangeable lenses, and foreign matter may enter the camera when
lenses are removed or exchanged. Once inside the camera, this foreign
matter may adhere to the low-pass filter, where it may appear in
photographs taken under certain conditions. To protect the camera
when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the body cap provided with
the camera, being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign
matter that may be adhering to the body cap.
Should foreign matter find its way onto the low-pass filter, clean the filter
as described above, or have the filter cleaned by authorized Nikon service
personnel. Photographs affected by the presence of foreign matter on
the filter can be retouched using Capture NX 2 (available separately;
0 389) or the clean image options available in some third-party imaging
applications.
D
n
400
Servicing the Camera and Accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon
recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or
Nikon service representative once every one to two years, and that it be
serviced once every three to five years (note that fees apply to these
services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly
recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any accessories
regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional flash units,
should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced.
Caring for the Camera and
Battery: Cautions
Do not drop: The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or
vibration.
Keep dry: This product is not waterproof, and may malfunction if immersed
in water or exposed to high levels of humidity. Rusting of the internal
mechanism can cause irreparable damage.
Avoid sudden changes in temperature: Sudden changes in temperature, such as
those that occur when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold day,
can cause condensation inside the device. To prevent condensation, place
the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before exposing it to sudden
changes in temperature.
Keep away from strong magnetic fields: Do not use or store this device in the
vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or
magnetic fields. Strong static charges or the magnetic fields produced by
equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor,
damage data stored on the memory card, or affect the product’s internal
circuitry.
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun: Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun
or other strong light source for an extended period. Intense light may
cause the image sensor to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect in
photographs.
n
401
Cleaning: When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove
dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the
camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth
lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly. In
rare instances, static electricity may cause the LCD displays to light up or
go dark. This does not indicate a malfunction, and the display will soon
return to normal.
The lens and mirror are easily damaged. Dust and lint should be gently
removed with a blower. When using an aerosol blower, keep the can
vertical to prevent discharge of liquid. To remove fingerprints and other
stains from the lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth
and wipe the lens carefully.
See “The Low-Pass Filter” (0 394) for information on cleaning the low-pass
filter.
Lens contacts: Keep the lens contacts clean.
Do not touch the shutter curtain: The shutter curtain is extremely thin and easily
damaged. Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on the
curtain, poke it with cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air currents
from a blower. These actions could scratch, deform, or tear the curtain.
The shutter curtain may appear to be unevenly colored, but this has no
affect on pictures and does not indicate a malfunction.
Storage: To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, wellventilated area. If you are using an AC adapter, unplug the adapter to
prevent fire. If the product will not be used for an extended period,
remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic
bag containing a desiccant. Do not, however, store the camera case in a
plastic bag, as this may cause the material to deteriorate. Note that
desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be
replaced at regular intervals.
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once a
month. Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before
putting it away.
n
402
Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Replace the terminal cover before
putting the battery away.
Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source: Do not
unplug the product or remove the battery while the product is on or while
images are being recorded or deleted. Forcibly cutting power in these
circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product memory
or internal circuitry. To prevent an accidental interruption of power, avoid
carrying the product from one location to another while the AC adapter is
connected.
Notes on the monitor: The monitor is constructed with extremely high
precision; at least 99.99% of pixels are effective, with no more than 0.01%
being missing or defective. Hence while these displays may contain pixels
that are always lit (white, red, blue, or green) or always off (black), this is not
a malfunction and has no effect on images recorded with the device.
Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light.
Do not apply pressure to the monitor, as this could cause damage or
malfunction. Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower.
Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a soft cloth or chamois
leather. Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury
from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching
the skin or entering the eyes and mouth.
Replace the monitor cover when transporting the camera or leaving it
unattended.
Batteries: Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled. Observe the
following precautions when handling batteries:
• Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.
• Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat.
• Keep the battery terminals clean.
• Turn the product off before replacing the battery.
• Remove the battery from the camera or charger when not in use and
replace the terminal cover. These devices draw minute amounts of
charge even when off and could draw the battery down to the point that
it will no longer function. If the battery will not be used for some time,
insert it in the camera and run it flat before removing it from the camera
for storage. The battery should be stored in a cool location with an
ambient temperature of 15 to 25 °C (59 to 77 °F; avoid hot or extremely
cold locations). Repeat this process at least once every six months.
n
403
• Turning the camera on or off repeatedly when the battery is fully
discharged will shorten battery life. Batteries that have been fully
discharged must be charged before use.
• The internal temperature of the battery may rise while the battery is in
use. Attempting to charge the battery while the internal temperature is
elevated will impair battery performance, and the battery may not
charge or charge only partially. Wait for the battery to cool before
charging.
• Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair
battery performance.
• A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge when
used at room temperature indicates that it requires replacement.
Purchase a new EN-EL15 battery.
• Charge the battery before use. When taking photographs on important
occasions, ready a spare EN-EL15 battery and keep it fully charged.
Depending on your location, it may be difficult to purchase replacement
batteries on short notice. Note that on cold days, the capacity of
batteries tends to decrease. Be sure the battery is fully charged before
taking photographs outside in cold weather. Keep a spare battery in a
warm place and exchange the two as necessary. Once warmed, a cold
battery may recover some of its charge.
• Used batteries are a valuable resource; recycle in accord with local
regulations.
n
404
Defaults
The default settings for the options in the camera menus are listed
below. For information on two-button reset, see page 193.
❚❚ Playback Menu Defaults
Option
Playback folder (0 260)
Image review (0 265)
After delete (0 266)
Rotate tall (0 266)
Slide show (0 267)
Image type (0 267)
Frame interval (0 267)
Default
ND800
Off
Show next
On
Still images and movies
2s
❚❚ Shooting Menu Defaults 1
Option
Extended menu banks (0 270)
File naming (0 273)
Primary slot selection (0 89)
Secondary slot function (0 89)
Image quality (0 84)
Image size (0 87)
Image area (0 79)
Auto DX crop (0 79)
Choose image area (0 80)
JPEG compression (0 86)
NEF (RAW) recording (0 86)
Type (0 86)
NEF (RAW) bit depth (0 86)
White balance (0 145)
Fine-tuning (0 148)
Choose color temp. (0 152)
Preset manual (0 154)
Default
Off
DSC
SD card slot
Overflow
JPEG normal
Large
On
FX (36×24)
Size priority
Lossless compressed
14-bit
Auto > Normal
A-B: 0, G-M: 0
5000 K
d-1
n
405
Option
Default
Set Picture Control (0 163)
Standard
Color space (0 274)
sRGB
Active D-Lighting (0 174)
Off
HDR (high dynamic range) (0 176)
HDR mode (0 177)
Off
Exposure differential (0 178)
Auto
Smoothing (0 178)
Normal
Vignette control (0 275)
Normal
Auto distortion control (0 276)
Off
Long exposure NR (0 277)
Off
High ISO NR (0 277)
Normal
ISO sensitivity settings (0 109)
ISO sensitivity (0 109)
100
Auto ISO sensitivity control (0 111)
Off
Multiple exposure (0 195) 2
Multiple exposure mode (0 196)
Off
Number of shots (0 197)
2
Auto gain (0 198)
On
Interval timer shooting (0 201)
Reset 3
Time-lapse photography (0 207)
Reset 4
Movie settings (0 70)
Frame size/frame rate (0 70)
1920 × 1080; 30 fps
Movie quality (0 70)
High quality
Microphone (0 70)
Auto sensitivity
Destination (0 70)
SD card slot
1 Default settings can be restored using Shooting menu bank (0 269).
With the exception of Extended menu banks, Multiple exposure,
Interval timer shooting, and Time-lapse photography, only settings
in the current shooting menu bank will be reset.
2 Applies to all banks. Shooting menu reset is not available while
shooting is in progress.
3 Applies to all banks. Shooting ends when reset is performed.
4 Applies to all banks. Interval reset to 5 s, recording time to 25 minutes.
n
406
❚❚ Custom Settings Menu Defaults *
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
a8
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
c1
c2
c3
c4
Option
AF-C priority selection (0 281)
AF-S priority selection (0 282)
Focus tracking with lock-on (0 283)
AF activation (0 283)
AF point illumination (0 284)
Focus point wrap-around (0 284)
Number of focus points (0 285)
Built-in AF-assist illuminator (0 286)
ISO sensitivity step value (0 287)
EV steps for exposure cntrl (0 287)
Exp./flash comp. step value (0 287)
Easy exposure compensation (0 288)
Center-weighted area (0 289)
Fine-tune optimal exposure (0 290)
Matrix metering
Center-weighted metering
Spot metering
Shutter-release button AE-L (0 290)
Auto meter-off delay (0 291)
Self-timer (0 291)
Self-timer delay
Number of shots
Interval between shots
Monitor off delay (0 292)
Playback
Menus
Information display
Image review
Live view
Default
Release
Focus
3 (Normal)
Shutter/AF-ON
Auto
No wrap
51 points
On
1/3 step
1/3 step
1/3 step
Off
ø 12 mm
0
0
0
Off
6s
10 s
1
0.5 s
10 s
1 min
10 s
4s
10 min
n
407
Option
d1 Beep (0 292)
Volume
Pitch
d2 CL mode shooting speed (0 293)
d3 Max. continuous release (0 293)
d4 Exposure delay mode (0 293)
d5 File number sequence (0 294)
d6 Viewfinder grid display (0 295)
d7 ISO display and adjustment (0 295)
d8 Screen tips (0 295)
d9 Information display (0 296)
d10 LCD illumination (0 296)
d11 MB-D12 battery type (0 297)
d12 Battery order (0 298)
e1 Flash sync speed (0 299)
e2 Flash shutter speed (0 300)
e3 Flash cntrl for built-in flash/Optional
flash (0 301, 302)
e4 Modeling flash (0 307)
e5 Auto bracketing set (0 307)
e6 Auto bracketing (Mode M) (0 308)
e7 Bracketing order (0 308)
f1 D switch (0 309)
f2 Multi selector center button (0 309)
Shooting mode
Playback mode
Live view
f3 Multi selector (0 310)
f4 Assign Fn button (0 311)
Fn button press (0 311)
Fn button + command dials (0 314)
n
408
Default
Off
High
2 fps
100
Off
On
Off
Show frame count
On
Auto
Off
LR6 (AA alkaline)
Use MB-D12 batteries first
1/250 s
1/60 s
TTL
On
AE & flash
Flash/speed
MTR > under > over
LCD backlight (D)
Select center focus point
Thumbnail on/off
Select center focus point
Do nothing
Viewfinder virtual horizon
None
Option
f5 Assign preview button (0 315)
Preview button press
Preview + command dials
f6 Assign AE-L/AF-L button (0 315)
AE-L/AF-L button press
AE-L/AF-L + command dials
f7 Shutter spd & aperture lock (0 316)
Shutter speed lock
Aperture lock
f8 Assign BKT button (0 316)
f9 Customize command dials (0 317)
Reverse rotation (0 317)
Default
Preview
None
AE/AF lock
None
Off
Off
Auto bracketing
Exposure compensation: U
Shutter speed/aperture: U
Off
Sub-command dial
Off
No
Enable release
Change main/sub (0 317)
Aperture setting (0 317)
Menus and playback (0 318)
f10 Release button to use dial (0 318)
f11 Slot empty release lock (0 319)
f12 Reverse indicators (0 319)
f13 Assign MB-D12 AF-ON (0 320)
AF-ON
g1 Assign Fn button (0 321)
Fn button press
None
g2 Assign preview button (0 322)
Preview button press
Index marking
g3 Assign AE-L/AF-L button (0 323)
AE-L/AF-L button press
AE/AF lock
g4 Assign shutter button (0 324)
Take photos
* Defaults for the current Custom Settings bank can be restored using
Custom settings bank (0 280).
n
409
❚❚ Setup Menu Defaults
Option
Monitor brightness (0 326)
Manual
Clean image sensor (0 394)
Clean at startup/shutdown (0 396)
HDMI (0 256)
Output resolution (0 257)
Advanced (0 257)
Output range
Output display size
Live view on-screen display
Flicker reduction (0 329)
Time zone and date (0 329)
Daylight saving time (0 329)
Auto image rotation (0 331)
GPS (0 218)
Auto meter-off
Use GPS to set camera clock
Eye-Fi upload (0 339)
n
410
Default
Manual
0
Clean at startup & shutdown
Auto
Auto
95%
On
Auto
Off
On
Enable
Yes
Enable
Exposure Program
The exposure program for programmed auto (0 118) is shown in
the following graph:
12
14
f/1
16 15
f/1.4
16
1
/3
17
18
19
f/5.6
f/8
20
f/2.8
f/1.4 − f/16
Aperture
f/2
f/4
21
f/11
22
f/16
23
f/22
f/32
13
11
9
10
8
7
5
6
3
2
4
0
1
-1
-3
-2
-5
]
V
[E
-4
ISO 100; lens with maximum aperture of f/1.4 and minimum
aperture of f/16 (e.g., AF 50mm f/1.4D)
30" 15" 8" 4"
2"
1"
2
4
8
15 30 60 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Shutter speed
The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with ISO sensitivity;
the above graph assumes an ISO sensitivity of ISO 100 equivalent.
When matrix metering is used, values over 16 1/3 EV are reduced to
16 1/3 EV.
n
411
Troubleshooting
If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of
common problems below before consulting your retailer or Nikon
representative.
❚❚ Display
Viewfinder is out of focus: Adjust viewfinder focus or use optional diopter
adjustment lenses (0 35, 388).
Viewfinder is dark: Insert a fully-charged battery (0 19, 37).
Displays turn off without warning: Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2
(Auto meter-off delay) or c4 (Monitor off delay) (0 291, 292).
Displays in control panel or viewfinder are unresponsive and dim: The response times
and brightness of these displays vary with temperature.
A
n
412
If the Camera Stops Responding
In extremely rare instances, the displays may not respond as expected
and the camera may stop functioning. In most cases, this phenomenon
is caused by a strong external static charge. Turn the camera off, remove
and replace the battery, taking care to avoid burns, and turn the camera
on again, or, if you are using an AC adapter (available separately),
disconnect and reconnect the adapter and turn the camera on again. If
the problem persists, contact your retailer or Nikon-authorized service
representative.
❚❚ Shooting
Camera takes time to turn on: Delete files or folders.
Shutter-release disabled:
• Memory card is full (0 29, 38).
• Release locked is selected for Custom Setting f11 (Slot empty release
lock; 0 319) and no memory card is inserted (0 29).
• CPU lens with aperture ring attached but aperture not locked at highest
f-number. If B is displayed in the control panel, select Aperture ring
for Custom Setting f9 (Customize command dials) > Aperture setting
to use lens aperture ring to adjust aperture (0 317).
• Exposure mode f selected with A selected for shutter speed
(0 418).
Camera is slow to respond to shutter-release button: Select Off for Custom Setting
d4 (Exposure delay mode; 0 293).
Only one shot taken each time shutter-release button is pressed in continuous release
mode:
• Lower the built-in flash (0 107).
• Turn HDR off (0 176).
Photos are out of focus:
• Rotate focus-mode selector to AF (0 91).
• Camera unable to focus using autofocus: use manual focus or focus lock
(0 98, 101).
Full range of shutter speeds not available: Flash in use. Flash sync speed can be
selected using Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed); when using
compatible flash units, choose 1/320 s (Auto FP) or 1/250 s (Auto FP) for
full range of shutter speeds (0 299).
Focus does not lock when shutter-release button is pressed halfway: Camera is in
focus mode AF-C: use A AE-L/AF-L button to lock focus (0 98).
Can not select focus point:
• Unlock focus selector lock (0 96).
• Auto-area AF or face-priority AF selected for AF-area mode; choose
another mode (0 49, 93).
• Camera is in playback mode (0 219).
• Menus are in use (0 259).
• Press shutter-release button halfway to activate exposure meters (0 42).
Image size can not be changed: Image quality set to NEF (RAW) (0 84).
Camera is slow to record photos: Turn long exposure noise reduction off
(0 277).
n
413
AF-assist illuminator does not light:
• AF-assist lamp does not light if AF-C is selected for autofocus mode
(0 91). Choose AF-S. If an option other than auto-area AF is selected for
AF-area mode, select center focus point (0 96).
• The camera is currently in live view or a movie is being recorded.
• Off selected for Custom Setting a8 (Built-in AF-assist illuminator)
(0 286).
• Illuminator has turned off automatically. Illuminator may become hot
with continued use; wait for lamp to cool down.
Flicker or banding appear during live view or movie recording: Choose an option for
Flicker reduction that matches the frequency of the local AC power
supply (0 329).
Bright bands appear during live view or movie recording: A flash or other light
source with brief duration was used during live view or movie recording.
Noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, lines, or reddish areas) appears in
photos:
• To reduce randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines, choose lower ISO
sensitivity or use high ISO noise reduction (0 109, 277).
• To reduce bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog at shutter
speeds slower than 1 s or to reduce reddish areas and other artifacts in
long time-exposures, enable long exposure noise reduction (0 277).
• Turn Active D-Lighting off to avoid heightening the effects of noise
(0 175).
Photos are blotched or smeared:
• Clean lens.
• Clean low-pass filter (0 394).
Colors are unnatural:
• Adjust white balance to match light source (0 145).
• Adjust Set Picture Control settings (0 163).
Can not measure white balance: Subject is too dark or too bright (0 157).
n
414
Image can not be selected as source for preset white balance: Image was not created
with D800 (0 158).
White balance bracketing unavailable:
• NEF (RAW) or NEF+JPEG image quality option selected for image quality
(0 84).
• Multiple exposure mode is in effect (0 195).
Effects of Picture Control differ from image to image: A (auto) is selected for
sharpening, contrast, or saturation. For consistent results over a series of
photographs, choose a setting other than A (auto) (0 167).
Metering can not be changed: Autoexposure lock or movie live view is in effect
(0 59, 129).
Exposure compensation can not be used: Choose exposure mode e, f, or g
(0 131).
Sound is not recorded with movies: Microphone off is selected for Movie
settings > Microphone (0 70).
❚❚ Playback
NEF (RAW) image is not played back: Photo was taken at image quality of NEF +
JPEG (0 85).
Can not view pictures recorded with other cameras: Pictures recorded with other
makes of camera may not be displayed correctly.
Some photos are not displayed during playback: Select All for Playback folder
(0 260).
“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation:
• Select On for Rotate tall (0 266).
• Photo was taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation (0 331).
• Photo is displayed in image review (0 220).
• Camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken (0 331).
Can not delete photo:
• Picture is protected: remove protection (0 233).
• Memory card is locked (0 34).
Can not retouch picture: Picture was not created with D800 (0 342).
Message is displayed stating that no images are available for playback: Select All for
Playback folder (0 260).
n
415
Can not change print order:
• Memory card is full: delete pictures (0 38, 234).
• Memory card is locked (0 34).
Can not select photo for printing: NEF (RAW) and TIFF photos can not be printed
by direct USB connection. Use DPOF print service (TIFF images only),
create JPEG copy using NEF (RAW) processing (0 353), or transfer to
computer and print using ViewNX 2 (supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available
separately; 0 389).
Photo is not displayed on high-definition video device: Confirm that HDMI cable
(available separately) is connected (0 256).
Photos are not displayed in Capture NX 2: Update to latest version (0 389).
Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 does not have desired effect: Image sensor
cleaning changes the position of dust on the low-pass filter. Dust off
reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can
not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is
performed. Dust off reference data recorded after image sensor cleaning is
performed can not be used with photographs taken before image sensor
cleaning is performed (0 327).
Computer displays NEF (RAW) images differently from camera: Third-party software
does not display effects of Picture Controls, Active D-Lighting, or vignette
control. Use ViewNX 2 (supplied) or optional Nikon software such as
Capture NX 2 (available separately).
Can not transfer photos to computer: OS not compatible with camera or transfer
software. Use card reader to copy photos to computer (0 242).
❚❚ Miscellaneous
Date of recording is not correct: Set camera clock (0 27).
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available at certain
combinations of settings or when no memory card is inserted. Note that
Battery info option is not available when camera is powered by an
optional EP-5B power connector and EH-5b AC adapter (0 332).
n
416
Error Messages
This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in
the viewfinder, control panel, and monitor.
Indicator
Control Viewpanel finder
B
(blinks)
H
d
Problem
Lens aperture ring is
not set to minimum
aperture.
Low battery.
• Battery exhausted.
• Battery can not be
used.
d
(blinks) (blinks)
H
B
(blinks)
F
—
• An extremely
exhausted
rechargeable Li-ion
battery or a thirdparty battery is
inserted either in the
camera or in the
optional MB-D12
battery pack.
Solution
Set ring to minimum
aperture (largest
f-number).
Ready a fully-charged
spare battery.
• Recharge or replace
battery.
• Contact Nikonauthorized service
representative.
• Replace the battery,
or recharge the
battery if the
rechargeable Li-ion
battery is exhausted.
0
25
19, 37
xix, 19,
21, 387
Camera clock is not set. Set camera clock.
27
No lens attached, or
non-CPU lens attached
without specifying
Aperture value will be
maximum aperture.
displayed if maximum
Aperture shown in
aperture is specified.
stops from maximum
aperture.
212
n
417
Indicator
Control ViewProblem
Solution
0
panel finder
2 4 Camera unable to focus Change composition or
—
40, 101
(blinks) using autofocus.
focus manually.
• Use a lower ISO
109
sensitivity.
389
• Use optional ND filter.
Subject too bright;
In exposure mode:
photo will be
f Increase shutter
119
overexposed.
speed
g Choose a smaller
120
(Exposure
aperture (larger
indicators and
f-number)
shutter speed
• Use a higher ISO
109
or aperture
sensitivity.
display blink)
181, 380
• Use flash.
In exposure mode:
Subject too dark; photo
f Lower shutter
119
will be underexposed.
speed
g Choose a larger
120
aperture (smaller
f-number)
Change shutter speed
A
A selected in
or select manual
119, 122
(blinks)
exposure mode f.
exposure mode.
1 k Images are being
Wait until processing is
—
(blinks) (blinks) processed.
complete.
n
418
Indicator
Control Viewpanel finder
—
Problem
If indicator blinks for 3s
c
after flash fires, photo
(blinks)
may be underexposed.
Memory insufficient to
n
record further photos
j
i/j
at current settings, or
(blinks)
(blinks)
camera has run out of
file or folder numbers.
O
(blinks)
A
Camera malfunction.
Solution
Check photo in
monitor; if
underexposed, adjust
settings and try again.
• Reduce quality or
size.
• Delete photographs
after copying
important images to
computer or other
device.
• Insert new memory
card.
Release shutter. If error
persists or appears
frequently, consult
Nikon-authorized
service representative.
The i and j Icons
These icons flash to show the card affected.
0
187
84, 87
234
29
—
n
419
Indicator
Monitor
Control
panel
Solution
0
Turn camera off and
confirm that card is
29
correctly inserted.
• Use Nikon434
approved card.
• Check that contacts
—
are clean. If card is
damaged, contact
retailer or Nikon
representative.
• Unable to create • Delete files or insert 29, 234
new folder.
new memory card
after copying
important images
to computer or
other device.
340
• Check that Eye-Fi
card firmware is up
to date.
Camera can not
• Copy files on Eye-Fi 29, 239
control Eye-Fi
card to a computer
card.
or other device and
format card, or
insert new card.
Problem
Camera cannot
No memory card. S detect memory
card.
• Error accessing
memory card.
This memory
card cannot be
used.
Card may be
damaged.
Insert
another card.
g
W
R
i/j
(blinks)
W,
R
(blinks)
Memory card is
W, Memory card is
locked. Slide lock
j locked (write
to “write”
(blinks) protected).
position.
W,
Eye-Fi card is
Not available if
R,
Eye-Fi card is
locked (write
j
locked.
protected).
(blinks)
n
420
Slide card writeprotect switch to
“write” position.
34
Indicator
Control
panel
Problem
Solution
0
Memory card has
This card is not
Format memory card
[C] not been
29, 32,
formatted.
or insert new memory
(blinks) formatted for use
326
Format the card.
card.
in camera.
Failed to update
flash unit
firmware.
Firmware for flash
Contact a NikonFlash cannot be
unit mounted on
—
authorized service
—
used.
camera was not
representative.
Contact a Nikonupdated correctly.
authorized
service
representative.
The internal
Wait for the internal
Unable to start
temperature of
circuits to cool before
56, 69
live view. Please
—
the camera is
resuming live view or
wait.
high.
movie recording.
Select folder
containing images
No images on
memory card or in from Playback folder
Folder contains
29, 260
—
folder(s) selected menu or insert
no images.
memory card
for playback.
containing images.
No images can be
played back until
All photos in
another folder has
All images are
— current folder are been selected or Hide 260
hidden.
hidden.
image used to allow
at least one image to
be displayed.
Monitor
n
421
Indicator
Monitor
Control
panel
Cannot display
this file.
—
Cannot select
this file.
—
Check printer.
—
Check paper.
—
Paper jam.
—
Out of paper.
—
Check ink supply.
—
Out of ink.
—
Problem
File has been
created or
modified using a
computer or
different make of
camera, or file is
corrupt.
Selected image
can not be
retouched.
422
0
File can not be played
back on camera.
—
Images created with
other devices can not
be retouched.
Check printer. To
resume, select
Printer error.
Continue (if
available).
Paper in printer is Insert paper of correct
not of selected
size and select
size.
Continue.
Paper is jammed Clear jam and select
in printer.
Continue.
Insert paper of
Printer is out of
selected size and
paper.
select Continue.
Check ink. To resume,
Ink error.
select Continue.
Printer is out of
Replace ink and select
ink.
Continue.
* See printer manual for more information.
n
Solution
342
248 *
248 *
248 *
248 *
248 *
248 *
Specifications
❚❚ Nikon D800/D800E Digital Camera
Type
Type
Single-lens reflex digital camera
Lens mount
Nikon F mount (with AF coupling and AF contacts)
Effective pixels
Effective pixels
36.3 million
Image sensor
Image sensor
35.9 × 24.0 mm CMOS sensor (Nikon FX format)
Total pixels
36.8 million
Dust-reduction System
Image sensor cleaning, Image Dust Off reference data
(requires optional Capture NX 2 software)
Storage
Image size (pixels)
• FX (36×24) image area
7,360 × 4,912 (L) 5,520 × 3,680 (M) 3,680 × 2,456 (S)
• 1.2× (30×20) image area
6,144 × 4,080 (L) 4,608 × 3,056 (M) 3,072 × 2,040 (S)
• DX (24×16) image area
4,800 × 3,200 (L) 3,600 × 2,400 (M) 2,400 × 1,600 (S)
• 5 : 4 (30×24) image area
6,144 × 4,912 (L) 4,608 × 3,680 (M) 3,072 × 2,456 (S)
• FX-format photographs taken in movie live view
6,720 × 3,776 (L) 5,040 × 2,832 (M) 3,360 × 1,888 (S)
• DX-format photographs in movie live view
4,800 × 2,704 (L) 3,600 × 2,024 (M) 2,400 × 1,352 (S)
Note: Photographs taken in movie live view have an
aspect ratio of 16 : 9. A DX-based format is used for
photographs taken using the DX (24 × 16) 1.5× image
area; an FX-based format is used for all other
photographs.
n
423
Storage
File format
• NEF (RAW): 12 or 14 bit, lossless compressed,
compressed, or uncompressed
• TIFF (RGB)
• JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine (approx. 1 : 4),
normal (approx. 1 : 8), or basic (approx. 1 : 16)
compression (Size priority); Optimal quality
compression available
• NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in both
NEF (RAW) and JPEG formats
Picture Control System
Can be selected from Standard, Neutral, Vivid,
Monochrome, Portrait, Landscape; selected Picture
Control can be modified; storage for custom Picture
Controls
Media
SD (Secure Digital) and UHS-I compliant SDHC and
SDXC memory cards; Type I CompactFlash memory
cards (UDMA compliant)
Dual card slots
Either card can be used for primary or backup storage
or for separate storage of NEF (RAW) and JPEG images;
pictures can be copied between cards.
File system
DCF (Design Rule for Camera File System) 2.0, DPOF
(Digital Print Order Format), Exif (Exchangeable Image
File Format for Digital Still Cameras) 2.3, PictBridge
Viewfinder
n
424
Viewfinder
Eye-level pentaprism single-lens reflex viewfinder
Frame coverage
•
•
•
•
Magnification
Approx. 0.7 × (50 mm f/1.4 lens at infinity, –1.0 m–1)
Eyepoint
17 mm (–1.0 m–1; from center surface of viewfinder
eyepiece lens)
Diopter adjustment
–3–+1 m–1
Focusing screen
Type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark VIII screen with AF
area brackets and framing grid
Reflex mirror
Quick return
FX (36×24): Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical
1.2× (30×20): Approx. 97% horizontal and 97% vertical
DX (24×16): Approx. 97% horizontal and 97% vertical
5:4 (30×24): Approx. 97% horizontal and 100% vertical
Viewfinder
Depth-of-field preview
When depth-of-field preview button is pressed, lens
aperture is stopped down to value selected by user (g
and h modes) or by camera (e and f modes)
Lens aperture
Instant return, electronically controlled
Lens
Compatible lenses
Compatible with AF NIKKOR lenses, including type G
and D lenses (some restrictions apply to PC MicroNIKKOR lenses) and DX lenses (using DX 24 × 16 1.5×
image area), AI-P NIKKOR lenses, and non-CPU AI
lenses (exposure modes g and h only). IX NIKKOR
lenses, lenses for the F3AF, and non-AI lenses can not
be used.
The electronic rangefinder can be used with lenses
that have a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster (the
electronic rangefinder supports the 11 focus points
with lenses that have a maximum aperture of f/8 or
faster).
Shutter
Type
Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-plane
shutter
Speed
1/8000 –
Flash sync speed
X=1/250
30 s in steps of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV, bulb, X250
s; synchronizes with shutter at 1/320 s or slower
(flash range drops at speeds between 1/250 and 1/320 s)
Release
Release mode
S (single frame), CL (continuous low speed),
CH (continuous high speed), J (quiet shutter-release),
E (self-timer), MUP (mirror up)
n
425
Release
Approximate frame
advance rate
With EN-EL15 batteries
Image area: FX/5 : 4
CL: 1–4 fps
CH: 4 fps
Image area: DX/1.2×
CL: 1–5 fps
CH: 5 fps
Self-timer
2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s; 1–9 exposures at intervals of 0.5, 1, 2,
or 3 s
Other power sources
Image area: FX/5 : 4
CL: 1–4 fps
CH: 4 fps
Image area: 1.2×
CL: 1–5 fps
CH: 5 fps
Image area: DX
CL: 1–5 fps
CH: 6 fps
Exposure
Metering
TTL exposure metering using RGB sensor with
approximately 91K (91,000) pixels
Metering method
• Matrix: 3D color matrix metering III (type G and D
lenses); color matrix metering III (other CPU lenses);
color matrix metering available with non-CPU lenses
if user provides lens data
• Center-weighted: Weight of 75% given to 12 mm circle
in center of frame. Diameter of circle can be changed
to 8, 15, or 20 mm, or weighting can be based on
average of entire frame (non-CPU lenses use 12-mm
circle or average of entire frame)
• Spot: Meters 4 mm circle (about 1.5% of frame)
centered on selected focus point (on center focus
point when non-CPU lens is used)
Range (ISO 100, f/1.4
lens, 20 °C/68 °F)
• Matrix or center-weighted metering: 0–20 EV
• Spot metering: 2–20 EV
Exposure meter coupling Combined CPU and AI
Exposure mode
Programmed auto with flexible program (e); shutterpriority auto (f ); aperture-priority auto (g); manual (h)
Exposure compensation –5 – +5 EV in increments of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV
n
426
Exposure bracketing
2–9 frames in steps of 1/3, 1/2, 2/3, or 1 EV
Flash bracketing
2–9 frames in steps of 1/3, 1/2, 2/3, or 1 EV
Exposure
White balance
bracketing
2–9 frames in steps of 1, 2, or 3
ADL bracketing
2 frames using selected value for one frame or 3–5
frames using preset values for all frames
Exposure lock
Luminosity locked at detected value with A AE-L/AF-L
button
ISO sensitivity
(Recommended
Exposure Index)
ISO 100 – 6400 in steps of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV. Can also be
set to approx. 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, or 1 EV (ISO 50 equivalent)
below ISO 100 or to approx. 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, 1, or 2 EV (ISO
25600 equivalent) above ISO 6400; auto ISO sensitivity
control available
Active D-Lighting
Can be selected from Auto, Extra high, High, Normal,
Low, or Off
Focus
Autofocus
Nikon Advanced Multi-CAM 3500FX autofocus sensor
module with TTL phase detection, fine-tuning, 51
focus points (including 15 cross-type sensors; f/8
supported by 11 sensors), and AF-assist illuminator
(range approx. 0.5–3 m/1 ft 8 in.–9 ft 10 in.)
Detection range
–2 – +19 EV (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)
Lens servo
• Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); continuous-servo
AF (AF-C); predictive focus tracking automatically
activated according to subject status
• Manual focus (M): Electronic rangefinder can be used
Focus point
Can be selected from 51 or 11 focus points
AF-area mode
Single-point AF, 9-, 21-, or 51- point dynamic-area AF,
3D-tracking, auto-area AF
Focus lock
Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button
halfway (single-servo AF) or by pressing A AE-L/AF-L
button
n
427
Flash
Built-in flash
Manual pop-up with button release and a Guide
Number of 12/39, 12/39 with manual flash (m/ft,
ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)
Flash control
TTL: i-TTL flash control using RGB sensor with
approximately 91K (91,000) pixels is available with
built-in flash and SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700,
SB-600, or SB-400; i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital
SLR is used with matrix and center-weighted metering,
standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR with spot metering
Flash mode
Front curtain sync, slow sync, rear-curtain sync, red-eye
reduction, red-eye reduction with slow sync, slow rearcurtain sync; Auto FP High-Speed Sync supported
Flash compensation
–3 – +1 EV in increments of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV
Flash-ready indicator
Lights when built-in flash or optional flash unit is fully
charged; blinks for 3 s after flash is fired at full output
Accessory shoe
ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts and
safety lock
Nikon Creative Lighting Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with built-in
System (CLS)
flash, SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, or SB-700 as a master
flash and SB-600 or SB-R200 as remotes, or SU-800 as
commander; built-in flash can serve as master flash in
commander mode; Auto FP High-Speed Sync and
modeling illumination supported with all CLScompatible flash units except SB-400; Flash Color
Information Communication and FV lock supported
with all CLS-compatible flash units
Sync terminal
ISO 519 sync terminal with locking thread
White balance
White balance
n
428
Auto (2 types), incandescent, fluorescent (7 types), direct
sunlight, flash, cloudy, shade, preset manual (up to 4
values can be stored), choose color temperature
(2500 K–10000 K), all with fine-tuning.
Live view
Modes
Live view photography (still images), movie live view
(movies)
Lens servo
• Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); full-time servo AF
(AF-F)
• Manual focus (M)
AF-area mode
Face-priority AF, wide-area AF, normal-area AF, subjecttracking AF
Autofocus
Contrast-detect AF anywhere in frame (camera selects
focus point automatically when face-priority AF or
subject-tracking AF is selected)
Movie
Metering
TTL exposure metering using main image sensor
Frame size (pixels) and
frame rate
• 1,920 × 1,080; 30 p (progressive), 25 p, 24 p
• 1,280 × 720; 60 p, 50 p, 30 p, 25 p
Actual frame rates for 60 p, 50 p, 30 p, 25 p, and 24 p are
59.94, 50, 29.97, 25, and 23.976 fps respectively;
options support both ★high and normal image quality
File format
MOV
Video compression
H.264/MPEG-4 Advanced Video Coding
Audio recording format Linear PCM
Audio recording device
Built-in monaural or external stereo microphone;
sensitivity adjustable
Other options
Index marking, time-lapse photography
Monitor
Monitor
8-cm/3.2-in., approx. 921k-dot (VGA) TFT LCD with
170 ° viewing angle, approx. 100% frame coverage,
and automatic monitor brightness control using
ambient brightness sensor
n
429
Playback
Playback
Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 9, or 72 images) playback
with playback zoom, movie playback, photo and/or
movie slide shows, highlights, histogram display, auto
image rotation, and image comment (up to 36
characters)
Interface
USB
SuperSpeed USB (USB 3.0 Micro-B connector)
HDMI output
Type C mini-pin HDMI connector; can be used
simultaneously with camera monitor
Audio input
Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5mm diameter)
Audio output
Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5mm diameter)
Ten-pin remote terminal Can be used to connect optional remote control, GP-1
GPS unit, or GPS device compliant with NMEA0183
version 2.01 or 3.01 (requires optional MC-35 GPS
adapter cord and cable with D-sub 9-pin connector)
Supported languages
Supported languages
Arabic, Chinese (Simplified and Traditional), Czech,
Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish, French, German,
Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Norwegian,
Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Spanish,
Swedish, Thai, Turkish, Ukrainian
Power source
Battery
One rechargeable Li-ion EN-EL15 battery
Battery pack
Optional MB-D12 multi-power battery pack with one
rechargeable Nikon EN-EL18 Li-ion battery (available
separately), one rechargeable Nikon EN-EL15 Li-ion
battery, or eight AA alkaline, Ni-MH, or lithium
batteries. A BL-5 battery-chamber cover is required
when using EN-EL18 batteries.
AC adapter
EH-5b AC adapter; requires EP-5B power connector
(available separately)
Tripod socket
n
430
Tripod socket
1/4 in.
(ISO 1222)
Dimensions/weight
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 146 × 123 × 81.5 mm (5.7 × 4.8 × 3.2 in.)
Weight
Approx. 1,000 g (2 lb 3.3 oz) with battery and SD
memory card but without body cap; approx. 900 g/1 lb
15.7 oz (camera body only)
Operating environment
Temperature
0–40 °C (+32–104 °F)
Humidity
Less than 85% (no condensation)
• Unless otherwise stated, all figures are for a camera with a fully-charged
battery operating at an ambient temperature of 20 °C (68 °F).
• Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and
software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice.
Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from any mistakes
that this manual may contain.
n
431
MH-25 battery charger
Rated input
(in North America)
AC 120 V, 60 Hz, 0.2 A
Rated input
(in other regions)
AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.23–0.12 A
Rated output
DC 8.4 V/1.2 A
Supported batteries
Nikon EN-EL15 rechargeable Li-ion batteries
Charging time
Approx. 2 hours and 35 minutes at an ambient
temperature of 25 °C/77 °F when no charge remains
Operating temperature 0–40 °C (+32–104 °F)
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 91.5 × 33.5 × 71 mm/3.6 × 1.3 × 2.8 in.,
excluding projections
Length of cord
Approx. 1.8 m/6 ft (U.S.A. and Canada) or 1.5 m/4.9 ft
(other countries)
Weight
Approx. 110 g/3.9 oz, excluding power cable and AC
wall adapter
EN-EL15 rechargeable Li-ion battery
Type
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Rated capacity
7.0 V, 1,900 mAh
Operating temperature 0–40 °C (+32–104 °F)
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 40 × 56 × 20.5 mm/1.6 × 2.2 × 0.8 in.
Weight
n
432
Approx. 88 g/3.1 oz, excluding terminal cover
A
Supported Standards
• DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF) is a
standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure
compatibility among different makes of camera.
• DPOF: Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide standard
that allows pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the
memory card.
• Exif version 2.3: The camera supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File
Format for Digital Still Cameras) version 2.3, a standard in which
information stored with photographs is used for optimal color
reproduction when the images are output on Exif-compliant printers.
• PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with the digital
camera and printer industries, allowing photographs to be output
directly to a printer without first transferring them to a computer.
• HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for
multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices
capable of transmitting audiovisual data and control signals to HDMIcompliant devices via a single cable connection.
A
Trademark Information
Macintosh, Mac OS, and QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple
Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. Microsoft, Windows and
Windows Vista are either registered trademarks, or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The
SD, SDHC, and SDXC logos are trademarks of the SD-3C, LLC.
CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation. HDMI, the
logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. PictBridge
is a trademark. All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the
other documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks
or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
n
433
Approved Memory Cards
The camera accepts the SD and CompactFlash memory cards listed
in the following sections. Other cards have not been tested. For
more details on the cards listed below, please contact the
manufacturer.
❚❚ SD Memory Cards
The following cards have been tested and approved for use in the
camera. Cards with class 6 or faster write speeds are recommended
for movie recording. Recording may end unexpectedly when cards
with slower write speeds are used.
SD cards
SanDisk
Toshiba
Panasonic
2 GB 1
SDHC cards 2
SDXC cards 3
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB
64 GB
4 GB, 6 GB, 8 GB, 12 GB,
16 GB, 24 GB, 32 GB
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB
48 GB, 64 GB
Lexar Media
Platinum II
—
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB
Professional
—
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB
Full-HD Video
1 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be
used support 2 GB cards.
2 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be
used are SDHC-compliant. The camera supports UHS-1.
3 Check that any card readers or other devices with
which the card will be used are SDXC-compliant. The
camera supports UHS-1.
n
434
❚❚ CompactFlash Memory Cards
The following Type I CompactFlash memory cards have been
tested and approved for use in the camera. Type II cards and
microdrives can not be used.
SanDisk
Extreme Pro
Extreme
Extreme IV
Extreme III
Ultra II
Standard
Professional UDMA
Lexar
Media
Professional
Platinum II
SDCFXP
SDCFX
SDCFX4
SDCFX3
SDCFH
SDCFB
600 ×
400 ×
300 ×
233 ×
133 ×
80 ×
80 ×
60 ×
16 GB, 32 GB, 64 GB, 128 GB
8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB
2 GB, 4 GB
8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB
8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB
2 GB, 4 GB
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB
4 GB
n
435
Memory Card Capacity
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures
that can be stored on an 8 GB Toshiba R95 W80MB/s UHS-I SDHC
card at different image quality (0 84), image size (0 87), and
image area settings (0 79).
❚❚ FX (36×24) Image Area *
Image quality
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 12-bit
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 14-bit
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 12-bit
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 14-bit
NEF (RAW),
Uncompressed,
12-bit
NEF (RAW),
Uncompressed,
14-bit
TIFF (RGB)
JPEG fine 3
JPEG normal 3
JPEG basic 3
n
436
Image size
File size 1
No. of images 1 Buffer capacity 2
—
32.4 MB
133
21
—
41.3 MB
103
17
—
29.0 MB
182
25
—
35.9 MB
151
20
—
57.0 MB
133
18
—
74.4 MB
103
16
L
M
S
L
M
S
L
M
S
L
M
S
108.2 MB
61.5 MB
28.0 MB
16.3 MB
10.4 MB
5.2 MB
9.1 MB
5.3 MB
2.6 MB
4.0 MB
2.7 MB
1.4 MB
71
126
277
360
616
1200
718
1200
2400
1400
2400
4800
16
18
26
56
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
* Includes images taken with non-DX lenses when On is selected for Auto DX
crop.
❚❚ DX (24×16) Image Area *
Image quality
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 12-bit
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 14-bit
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 12-bit
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 14-bit
NEF (RAW),
Uncompressed,
12-bit
NEF (RAW),
Uncompressed,
14-bit
TIFF (RGB)
JPEG fine 3
JPEG normal 3
JPEG basic 3
Image size
File size 1
No. of images 1 Buffer capacity 2
—
14.9 MB
303
38
—
18.6 MB
236
29
—
13.2 MB
411
54
—
16.2 MB
343
41
—
25.0 MB
303
30
—
32.5 MB
236
25
L
M
S
L
M
S
L
M
S
L
M
S
46.6 MB
26.8 MB
12.5 MB
8.0 MB
5.1 MB
2.7 MB
4.1 MB
2.6 MB
1.4 MB
2.0 MB
1.3 MB
0.7 MB
165
289
616
796
1200
2300
1500
2500
4600
3000
5000
8900
21
26
41
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
* Includes images taken with DX lenses when On is selected for Auto DX crop.
n
437
1 All figures are approximate. File size varies with scene recorded.
2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 100.
Drops if Optimal quality is selected for JPEG compression, ISO sensitivity is set
to Hi 0.3 or higher, High ISO NR is on when auto ISO sensitivity control is on or
ISO sensitivity is set to ISO 1600 or higher, or long exposure noise reduction,
Active D-Lighting, or auto distortion control is on.
3 Figures assume JPEG compression is set to Size priority. Selecting Optimal
quality increases the file size of JPEG images; number of images and buffer
capacity drop accordingly.
n
438
A
d3—Max. Continuous Release (0 293)
The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single
burst can be set to any amount between 1 and 100.
Battery Life
The number of shots that can be taken with fully-charged batteries
varies with the condition of the battery, temperature, and how the
camera is used. In the case of AA batteries, capacity also varies with
make and storage conditions; some batteries can not be used.
Sample figures for the camera and optional MB-D12 multi-power
battery pack are given below.
• CIPA standard 1
One EN-EL15 battery (camera): Approximately 900 shots
One EN-EL15 battery (MB-D12): Approximately 900 shots
One EN-EL18 battery (MB-D12): Approximately 1,400 shots
Eight AA alkaline batteries (MB-D12): Approximately 1,000 shots
• Nikon standard 2
One EN-EL15 battery (camera): Approximately 2,400 shots
One EN-EL15 battery (MB-D12): Approximately 2,400 shots
One EN-EL18 battery (MB-D12): Approximately 3,800 shots
Eight AA alkaline batteries (MB-D12): Approximately 2,400 shots
1 Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with an AF-S NIKKOR 24-120mm
f/4G ED VR lens under the following test conditions: lens cycled from
infinity to minimum range and one photograph taken at default settings
once every 30 s; flash fired once every other shot. Live view not used.
2 Measured at 20 °C/68 °F with an AF-S NIKKOR 70-200mm f/2.8G ED VR II
lens under the following test conditions: vibration reduction off, image
quality set to JPEG normal, image size set to L (large), shutter speed
1/250 s, shutter-release button pressed halfway for three seconds and
focus cycled from infinity to minimum range three times; six shots are
then taken in succession and monitor turned on for five seconds and
then turned off; cycle repeated once exposure meters have turned off.
n
439
The following can reduce battery life:
• Using the monitor
• Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway
• Repeated autofocus operations
• Taking NEF (RAW) or TIFF (RGB) photographs
• Slow shutter speeds
• Using an optional WT-4 wireless transmitter
• Using the optional GP-1 GPS unit
• Using VR (vibration reduction) mode with VR lenses
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN-EL15
batteries:
• Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce
battery performance.
• Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their
charge if left unused.
n
440
Index
Symbols
e (Programmed auto) ........................ 118
f (Shutter-priority auto) ................... 119
g (Aperture-priority auto) ................ 120
h (Manual).............................................. 122
S ................................................................. 103
CL ....................................................... 103, 293
CH ............................................................... 103
J ............................................................... 103
E (Self-timer)............................... 103, 106
MUP ................................................... 104, 108
K (Single-point AF) .............................. 93
I (Dynamic-area AF) ........................... 93
H (Auto-area AF) ................................... 94
! (Face-priority AF) .............................. 49
5 (Wide-area AF) ................................... 49
6 (Normal-area AF) ............................... 49
& (Subject-tracking AF) .................... 49
L (Matrix) .............................................. 115
M (Center-weighted) ................ 115, 289
N (Spot).................................................. 115
Fn button ....................................... 311, 321
R (Info) button................................ 10, 13
a (Live view) button ..................... 45, 59
Q (Help) ............................................... 15, 18
t (Memory buffer) ....................... 40, 105
D switch............................................. 4, 309
I (Focus indicator)............... 40, 98, 102
L (Preset manual) .................. 146, 154
Numerics
1.2× (30×20) 1.2× ................................... 80
12-bit .......................................................... 86
14-bit .......................................................... 86
3D color matrix metering III ............ 115
3D-tracking ....................................... 94, 95
5 : 4 (30 × 24)............................................ 80
A
AC adapter.................................... 387, 391
Accessories ............................................ 387
Accessory shoe ..................................... 380
Active D-Lighting....................... 141, 174
Add items (My Menu)......................... 367
ADL bracketing........................... 141, 307
Adobe RGB (Color space) .................. 274
AE & flash (Auto bracketing set) .... 132,
307
AE only (Auto bracketing set) 132, 307
AE-L/AF-L button ................ 98, 315, 323
AF...................... 48–50, 91–100, 281–286
AF activation.......................................... 283
AF area brackets................................. 8, 35
AF fine-tune........................................... 338
AF-area mode................................... 49, 93
AF-assist ............................... 286, 377, 385
AF-C ................................................... 91, 281
AF-F............................................................. 48
AF-mode button ............... 48, 50, 92, 94
B button .................................... 92, 283
AF-S............................................. 48, 91, 282
After delete ............................................ 266
A-M switch ................................................. 25
Ambient brightness sensor......... 5, 326
Angle of view ....................... 79, 378–379
Aperture.............................. 120–122, 126
Aperture lock......................................... 126
Aperture-priority auto ....................... 120
Approved memory cards .................. 434
Aspect ratio.............................. 67, 79, 346
Assign MB-D12 AF-ON ....................... 320
Attaching the lens ................................. 24
Auto (White balance) ......................... 145
Auto bracketing ................ 132, 307, 308
Auto bracketing (Mode M) ............... 308
Auto bracketing set............................. 307
Auto distortion control...................... 276
Auto DX crop .................................... 79, 82
Auto FP high-speed sync. ....... 299, 300
Auto image rotation ........................... 331
Auto ISO sensitivity control.............. 111
Auto meter off...................... 42, 218, 291
n
441
Auto-area AF ..................................... 94, 95
Autofocus...... 48–50, 91–100, 281–286
Autofocus mode .............................. 48, 91
B
Backlight............................................. 4, 296
Backup........................................................ 89
Battery.... 19, 21, 37, 297, 298, 332, 387
Battery charger .................... 19, 387, 432
Battery info ............................................ 332
Battery order......................................... 298
Battery pack .... 104, 297, 298, 320, 387
Beep ......................................................... 292
Bit depth for NEF (RAW) images ....... 86
D button 133, 137, 141, 180, 197, 316
Black-and-white (Monochrome).... 347
Blue intensifier ..................................... 348
Body cap...................................... 1, 24, 389
Border...................................................... 250
Bracketing........................... 132, 307, 308
Bracketing order .................................. 308
Brightness .............................................. 166
Built-in AF-assist Illuminator ........... 286
Built-in flash ................................. 181, 375
Bulb ................................................. 122, 124
Burst ................................................ 293, 312
C
n
442
Camera Control Pro 2................ 246, 389
Capture NX 2......................... 85, 327, 389
Center-weighted metering..... 115, 289
Charging the battery .................... 19–20
Choose color temp. (White balance).....
146, 152
Choose image area ......................... 80, 82
Choose start/end point........................ 74
CL mode shooting speed ................. 293
Clean image sensor ............................ 394
Clock ................................................. 27, 329
Clock battery............................................ 28
Cloudy (White balance) .................... 145
CLS............................................................ 381
Color balance........................................ 349
Color outline ......................................... 359
Color sketch ........................................... 359
Color space............................................. 274
Color temperature ............ 146, 147, 152
Commander mode .................... 301, 303
CompactFlash ...................... 29, 326, 434
Compatible lenses ............................... 371
Compressed (Type) ............................... 86
Computer................................................ 239
Continuous high speed ..................... 103
Continuous low speed ............. 103, 293
Continuous release mode................. 103
Continuous-servo AF................... 91, 281
Contrast................................................... 166
Control panel......................................... 6–7
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) . 27,
217
Copy image(s) ....................................... 262
Copyright information ............. 228, 334
CPU contacts ......................................... 373
CPU lens ........................................... 25, 371
Creative Lighting System .................. 381
Cropping (PictBridge [Setup] menu) ....
250
Cross screen ........................................... 348
Custom setting bank .......................... 280
Custom Settings ................................... 278
Customize command dials ............... 317
Cyanotype (Monochrome) ............... 347
D
Date and time................................. 27, 329
Date format..................................... 28, 329
Daylight saving time.................... 27, 329
DCF.................................................. 274, 433
Default settings .......................... 193, 405
Delete................................................ 44, 234
Delete all images.................................. 236
Delete current image................... 44, 234
Deleting selected photographs...... 236
Depth-of-field ............................. 117, 120
Depth-of-field preview button 63, 117,
315, 322
Destination (Movie settings).............. 70
Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) 251,
254, 433
Diopter............................................. 35, 388
Direct sunlight (White balance)..... 145
Distortion control................................ 358
D-Lighting.............................................. 344
DPOF..................................... 251, 254, 433
DPOF print order ................................. 254
Dust off ref photo................................ 327
DX (24 × 16) 1.5 ×............................ 67, 80
DX format.................................................. 80
DX-based (movie) format .................... 68
Dynamic-area AF............................. 93, 95
E
Easy exposure compensation......... 288
Edit movie....................................... 74, 341
Electronic rangefinder....................... 102
Ethernet......................................... 245, 387
EV steps for exposure cntrl .............. 287
Exif ................................................... 274, 433
Exp./flash comp. step value............. 287
Exposure............ 115, 117, 128, 130, 132
Exposure bracketing ....... 132, 307, 308
Exposure compensation................... 130
Exposure delay mode........................ 293
Exposure differential.......................... 178
Exposure indicator.............................. 123
Exposure lock ....................................... 128
Exposure meters........................... 42, 291
Exposure mode.................................... 117
Exposure program .............................. 411
Extended menu banks ...................... 270
External microphone ........... 65, 70, 389
Eye-Fi upload ........................................ 339
F
Face-priority AF ...................................... 49
File information ................................... 223
File naming............................................ 273
File number sequence....................... 294
Filter effects........................................... 348
Filter effects (Set Picture Control). 166,
167
Fine-tune optimal exposure ............ 290
Firmware version ................................. 340
Fisheye..................................................... 358
Flash.................... 181, 188, 190, 380, 381
Flash (White balance)......................... 145
Flash bracketing................ 132, 307, 308
Flash cntrl for built-in flash............... 301
Flash compensation............................ 188
Flash mode............................................. 183
Flash only (Auto bracketing set).... 132,
307
Flash pop-up button .......................... 181
Flash range............................................. 187
Flash shutter speed................... 184, 300
Flash sync speed ............... 299, 300, 413
Flash sync terminal.............................. 380
Flash-ready indicator. 9, 181, 191, 305,
384, 428
Flexible program.................................. 118
Flicker reduction .................................. 329
Fluorescent (White balance)............ 145
f-number....................................... 121, 374
Focal length ....................... 212, 378–379
Focal length scale .................................. 24
Focal length scale index...................... 24
Focal plane mark.................................. 102
Focus ................................................ 91–102
Focus indicator ....................... 40, 98, 102
Focus lock ................................................. 98
Focus mode ................... 48, 91, 281, 282
Focus mode switch ........................ 24, 25
Focus point ....................... 49, 93, 96, 285
Focus point wrap-around ................. 284
Focus tracking................................ 92, 283
Focus tracking with lock-on............. 283
Focusing screen.................................... 424
Focus-mode selector ............ 48, 91, 101
Format .............................................. 32, 326
Format memory card.......................... 326
Frame interval (Slide show).............. 267
Frame rate ............................. 70, 104, 210
Framing grid ..................................... 8, 295
Front-curtain sync ............................... 183
Full-frame playback............................. 219
n
443
Full-time servo AF .................................. 48
FV lock ..................................................... 190
FX (36 × 24) 1.0 ×.................................... 80
FX format............................................ 67, 80
FX-based (movie) format.............. 67, 68
G
GPS .................................................. 215, 229
GPS data ................................................. 229
GPS unit .................................................. 215
Green intensifier .................................. 348
H
H.264........................................................ 429
HDMI............................................... 256, 433
HDMI mini-pin connector ............ 3, 256
Headphones............................................. 65
Help...................................................... 15, 18
Hi ............................................................... 110
Hide image ............................................ 260
High definition ............................ 256, 433
High Dynamic Range (HDR) ............ 176
High ISO NR........................................... 277
Highlights............................................... 224
Histogram ........................... 225, 226, 310
Hue ........................................................... 166
I
n
444
Image area ............. 25, 67, 68, 79, 82, 87
Image comment .................................. 333
Image Dust Off ref photo ................. 327
Image overlay ....................................... 350
Image quality........................................... 84
Image review ..................... 211, 220, 265
Image size ................................................. 87
Incandescent (White balance)........ 145
Index .................................................... 63, 73
Index print ............................................. 251
In-focus indicator .................. 40, 98, 102
Information .................................. 222, 261
Information display ............ 10, 295, 296
Interval timer shooting ..................... 201
ISO display and adjustment ............ 295
ISO sensitivity .............................. 109, 111
ISO sensitivity step value.................. 287
i-TTL ....................................... 181, 185, 382
J
JPEG ............................................................
JPEG basic.................................................
JPEG compression .................................
JPEG fine....................................................
JPEG normal.............................................
L
84
84
86
84
84
L (large) ............................................... 68, 87
LAN............................................................ 387
Landscape .............................................. 163
Language......................................... 26, 330
LCD.............................................. 4, 296, 326
LCD brightness...................................... 326
LCD illumination................................... 296
Lens......................... 24–25, 212, 338, 371
Lens cap..................................................... 24
Lens distance information ................ 185
Lens focus ring........................ 24, 55, 101
Lens mount .......................................... 4, 25
Live view ............................. 45–57, 59–69
Live view photography........................ 45
Live view selector............................ 45, 59
Lo ............................................................... 110
Lock mirror up for cleaning.............. 398
Long exposure NR ............................... 277
Lossless compressed (Type)............... 86
M
M (Manual focus) .................................. 101
M (medium) ....................................... 68, 87
Magnifying eyepiece .......................... 388
Manage Picture Control..................... 169
Manual (Exposure mode).................. 122
Manual flash .......................................... 301
Manual focus .................................. 55, 101
Matrix ....................................................... 115
Max. continuous release.................... 293
Maximum aperture ................... 102, 212
Maximum sensitivity........................... 112
MB-D12.......................................... 297, 298
Memory buffer............................... 40, 105
Memory card ................. 29, 32, 326, 434
Memory card capacity....................... 436
Metering................................................. 115
Microphone.................................. 3, 65, 70
Miniature effect ................................... 361
Minimum aperture ...................... 25, 117
Minimum shutter speed................... 112
Mired ....................................................... 150
Mirror.............................................. 108, 398
Mirror up ....................................... 108, 398
Mirror up mode........................... 104, 108
Modeling flash .................. 117, 301, 307
Monitor ..................... 10, 43, 45, 219, 326
Monitor cover .......................................... 14
Monitor off delay................................. 292
Monitor pre-flash ....................... 185, 301
Monochrome........................................ 347
Monochrome (Set Picture Control) 163
Mounting index ................................. 3, 25
Movie live view .................... 59, 321–324
Movie settings......................................... 70
Movie-record button ............................ 61
Movies........................................................ 59
Multi selector................................. 16, 310
Multiple exposure............................... 195
Multi-selector center button........... 309
My Menu ................................................ 366
N
NEF ................................................ 84, 85, 86
NEF (RAW)......................... 84, 85, 86, 353
NEF (RAW) bit depth ............................. 86
NEF (RAW) processing ....................... 353
NEF (RAW) recording ............................ 86
Neutral (Set Picture Control) ........... 163
Nikon Transfer 2................................... 239
No. of copies (PictBridge [Setup] menu)
249
Noise reduction ................................... 277
Non-CPU lens .............................. 212, 371
Normal-area AF....................................... 49
Number of focus points .................... 285
O
Optimal quality (JPEG compression) 86
Optional flash........................................ 380
Overflow ................................................... 89
Overview data....................................... 230
P
Page size ................................................. 249
Perspective control ............................. 360
Photo info..................................... 222, 261
PictBridge ..................................... 247, 433
Picture Control Utility......................... 172
Picture Controls.................................... 163
Picture size ............................................. 378
Playback ........................................... 43, 219
Playback display options .................. 261
Playback folder ..................................... 260
Playback information ............... 222, 261
Playback menu ..................................... 259
Playback zoom...................................... 231
Portrait..................................................... 163
Power connector........................ 387, 391
Predictive focus tracking..................... 92
Preset manual (White balance)...... 146,
154
Press the shutter-release button
halfway............................................ 41, 128
Preview button ........... 63, 117, 315, 322
Primary slot ....................................... 38, 89
Print (DPOF) ........................................... 251
Print options (PictBridge [Setup] menu)
249
Print select.............................................. 251
Printing.................................................... 247
Programmed auto ............................... 118
Protecting photographs.................... 233
Q
Quick adjust........................................... 166
Quick retouch........................................ 357
R
Rank items (My Menu) ....................... 369
Rear-curtain sync ................................. 183
Recent settings ..................................... 370
Red intensifier ....................................... 348
Red-eye correction.............................. 345
n
445
Red-eye reduction .............................. 183
Release button to use dial................ 318
Release mode ....................................... 103
Remote cord................................. 124, 390
Remove items (My Menu) ................ 368
Removing the lens from the camera 25
Repeating flash .................................... 301
Reset ........................................................ 193
Resize....................................................... 355
Restoring default settings....... 193, 405
Retouch menu...................................... 341
Reverse indicators............................... 319
RGB ........................................... 84, 225, 274
RGB Histogram..................................... 225
Rotate tall............................................... 266
S
n
446
S (small) ............................................... 68, 87
Saturation .............................................. 166
Save selected frame ....................... 74, 77
Save/load settings............................... 335
Screen tips ............................................. 295
SD memory card.................. 30, 326, 434
Secondary slot function....................... 89
Selective color ...................................... 362
Self-timer............................. 103, 106, 291
Sensitivity...................................... 109, 111
Sepia (Monochrome) ......................... 347
Set Picture Control.............................. 163
Setup menu........................................... 325
Shade (White balance) ...................... 145
Sharpening ............................................ 166
Shooting data....................................... 227
Shooting menu .................................... 268
Shooting menu bank ......................... 269
Shutter speed .................... 119, 122, 126
Shutter speed lock .............................. 126
Shutter-priority auto .......................... 119
Shutter-release button 40, 41, 98, 128,
290, 324
Shutter-release button AE-L............ 290
Side-by-side comparison.................. 364
Single frame .......................................... 103
Single-point AF ................................ 93, 95
Single-servo AF....................... 48, 91, 282
Size .............................................. 68, 87, 346
Size priority (JPEG compression)...... 86
Skylight.................................................... 348
Slide show .............................................. 267
Slot .............................................................. 29
Slot empty release lock...................... 318
Slot selection ...................... 159, 221, 342
Slow sync ................................................ 183
Smoothing.............................................. 178
Soft............................................................ 348
Speedlights .................................. 181, 380
Spot........................................................... 115
sRGB (Color space)............................... 274
Standard (Set Picture Control) ........ 163
Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR 185,
382
Start printing ............................... 250, 253
Storage folder........................................ 271
Straighten ............................................... 357
T
Television ................................................ 256
Ten-pin remote terminal ..... 3, 215, 390
Thumbnail .................................... 219, 310
TIFF (RGB).................................................. 84
Time ................................................... 27, 329
Time stamp (PictBridge) .................... 250
Time zone ........................................ 27, 329
Time zone and date ..................... 27, 329
Time-lapse photography .................. 207
Timer............................................... 106, 201
Toning (Set Picture Control)... 166, 168
Transfer photographs......................... 243
Trim ........................................................... 346
Tripod ...................................... 49, 106, 124
Two-button reset ................................. 193
Type D lens ................................... 371, 373
Type G lens ................................... 371, 373
U
Uncompressed (Type) .......................... 86
USB.................................................. 243, 248
USB cable .................................. 1, 243, 248
USB cable clip ................................... 1, 243
Use GPS to set camera clock ........... 218
UTC ........................................... 27, 217, 229
V
Vibration reduction mode switch .... 24
Viewfinder................................... 8, 35, 424
Viewfinder eyepiece........... 36, 106, 203
Viewfinder focus........................... 35, 388
Viewing photographs on TV ........... 256
ViewNX 2 ............. 85, 239, 274, 331, 334
Vignette control................................... 275
Virtual horizon............... 54, 66, 313, 337
Vivid (Set Picture Control) ................ 163
W
Warm filter ............................................. 348
WB.................................................... 137, 145
WB bracketing (Auto bracketing set)....
137, 307
White balance.............................. 137, 145
White balance bracketing................ 137
Wide-area AF ........................................... 49
Wireless.......................................... 245, 387
Wireless network........................ 245, 387
Wireless transmitter .................. 245, 387
n
447
DIGITAL CAMERA
User's Manual
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part
(except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be
made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.
6MB12211-02
En
Printed in Thailand
En
Download PDF

advertising